HomeMy WebLinkAboutProject Manual
THE CORNELL STORE
EMERGENCY POWER &
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
REPLACEMENT
Project Manual & Specifications
March 22, 2021
Owner
Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Architect
Cornell University Facilities Engineering 201 Humphreys Service Building Ithaca, New York 14853
THE CORNELL STORE EMERGENCY POWER TABLE OF CONTENTS & EMERGENCY LIGHTING REPLACEMENT Page 1
Instructions to Bidders Bid Proposal Submission Form General Conditions and Exhibits Supplemental Conditions DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 11 00 Summary of the Work Section 01 14 00 Work Restrictions Section 01 23 00 Alternates Section 01 25 00 Substitutions and Product Options Section 01 31 19 Project Meetings Section 01 31 50 Electronic Project Management Section 01 32 16 Construction Schedules Section 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 01 35 29 General Health & Safety Section 01 35 43 General Environmental Requirements Section 01 35 44 Spill Control Section 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements Section 01 42 00 References Section 01 45 00 Quality Control Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 01 51 00 Temporary Utilities Section 01 66 00 Storage and Protection Section 01 71 23 Field Engineering Section 01 73 29 Cutting, Patching and Repairing Section 01 77 00 Project Close Out Section 01 78 22 Fixed Equipment Inventory Section 01 78 23 Operating and Maintenance Data Section 01 78 36 Warranties and Bonds Section 01 78 39 Record Documents
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS Section 02 82 13 Asbestos Abatement DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 84 00 Firestopping DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Section 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 33.13 Conduit for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 33.16 Boxes for Electrical Systems
THE CORNELL STORE EMERGENCY POWER TABLE OF CONTENTS & EMERGENCY LIGHTING REPLACEMENT Page 2
Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems Section 26 22 00 Low-Voltage Transformers Section 26 24 16 Panelboards Section 26 27 29 Stationary Load Bank Section 26 28 16.13 Enclosed Circuit Breakers Section 26 36 00 Transfer Switches Section 26 43 00 Surge Protective Devices Section 26 51 00 Interior Lighting Section 26 56 00 Exterior Lighting DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK Section 31 00 00 Earthwork Section 31 01 01 Site Restoration
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS Section 32 12 16 Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Pavements Section 32 13 00 Concrete Walks Section 32 13 73 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants Section 32 16 40 Granite Curbs Section 32 17 23 Pavement Markings DRAWINGS T-001 Title Sheet AR-101 Asbestos Abatement Plan and Notes C-001 Notes, Legends and Abbreviations C-101 Site Demolition & Construction Plans C-301 Details E-001 General Notes and Symbol Legends
E-101 Partial Second Floor Demolition Plan and Olin Hall Basement Power Plan E-102 First Floor Emergency Lighting Plan E-103 Second and Third Floor Emergency Lighting and Power Plans E-301 One-Line Diagram and Generator Controls Schematic E-401 Details E-501 Schedules
END OF DOCUMENT
Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-1
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Project: The Cornell Store Emergency Power & Emergency Lighting Replacement Owner: Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Architect: Cornell University Facilities Engineering 201 Humphreys Service Building Ithaca, New York 14853 1. BID DOCUMENTS The Bid Documents provided electronically by the Owner will consist of the following: (1) Instructions to Bidders. (2) Bid Proposal Certification Form. (3) General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 - "General Requirements", and Supplemental Conditions. (4) Drawings and Specifications. (5) Addenda and/or bulletins issued prior to date of opening of Proposals.
• Pre-Bid Conference materials will be available via Drop Box at: https://cornell.box.com/s/8sfbld2e5enjh1qo6d956btdq6ab5fkk Bid Documents are available electronically in the eBuilder Bid Portal under the Bid Package Invitation – Invitation Documents Tab. Dataflow, Inc. maintains the current set of Documents and all addenda and is the contracted supplier for printed plans and specifications for this project. Contact Dataflow at CUProjects@goDataflow.com. Bid Documents Terms of Use / Disclaimer - By accessing and/or using the Cornell University Document Files, You accept without limitation or qualifications, the following Terms of Use: a. Cornell University grants You the permission to use and view the Document Files subject to these Terms of Use.
Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-2
b. Except in connection with preparing your bid, You may not modify, copy, transmit, display, reproduce, publish, license, create derivative works from, transfer, or sell any information, materials, drawings, content, products or services from the Document Files (together "Content") in any form without Cornell University's prior written permission. You may print out a copy or download Content solely for Your internal use. In doing so, you may not remove or alter, or cause to be removed or altered, any copyright, trademark, trade name, service mark, or any other proprietary notice or legend appearing on any of the Content. c. You may not provide parts of or full sets of Document Files to any planhouse or online document repositories. d. The trademarks, logos, and service marks (collectively the "Trademarks") displayed on the Document Files are registered and unregistered Trademarks of Cornell University and others. Nothing contained on the Document Files should be construed as granting, by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license or right to use any Trademark displayed on the Document Files without the written permission of Cornell University or such party that may own the Trademark. Your use of the Trademarks displayed on the Document Files, or any other content, except as provided in these Terms of Use, are strictly prohibited. 2. EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS a. Each Bidder shall acquaint themselves with location conditions as they exist, as well as the character of the necessary work to be carried out under the proposed Contract. A Pre-Bid Zoom meeting will be scheduled and include: a review of project related information, an opportunity to ask and receive responses to Bidder questions, and make such inquiries as are necessary to fully understand the subject facilities, physical conditions and/or restrictions attendant to the work under the Contract. b. Boring information, water levels, indications of sub-surface conditions and similar information given on the Drawings or in the Specifications are furnished only for the convenience of the Bidders. The Owner, Architect and Consulting Engineer make no representation regarding the character and extent of the soil data or other sub-surface conditions to be encountered during the work and no guarantee as to the accuracy or validity of interpretation of such data or conditions is made or intended. c. Each Bidder shall also thoroughly examine and become familiar with the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents. d. By submitting a Bid, the Bidder covenants and affirms that the Bidder has carefully examined all of the Bid Documents including Drawings, Specifications, and the Addenda and Bulletins, if any, as well as posed any questions associated with the Site, and that Bidder is satisfied as to the nature and location of the work, the general and local conditions, and all matters which may in any way affect the work or its performance.
Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-3
3. DISCREPANCIES a. Should a Bidder find discrepancies in or omissions from the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents, or be in doubt as to their meaning, Bidder shall at once enter the item in the Q&A Board of the eBuilder Bid Portal and an Addenda with written instructions will be sent to all bidders. Neither the Owner nor the Architect will be responsible for oral instructions. Every request for such interpretation should be in writing and entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Q&A Board. Inquiries received in advance of the deadline established at the Pre-Bid conference will be given consideration. 4. PRE-BID CONFERENCE a. A virtual pre-bid conference has been scheduled for 9:00 AM April 14, 2021, via Zoom at: https://cornell.zoom.us/j/93938063556?pwd=allyK3QyS1k4WUg3REkwOXBWa0QvUT09&from=addon In person, on site Pre-Bid walkthroughs will not be conducted during the Pre-Bid Conference. The Zoom meeting will be to review project related information and respond to Bidder questions. The Pre-Bid Conference is designed to assist Bidders in understanding the Contract Documents, the opportunity to pose clarifying questions or make inquiries regarding Contract Documents. Results will be published in an Addendum. 5. BID SUBMISSION Bid Submissions must include the following: a. Base Bid entered into the eBuilder Portal broken down per the Bid Scope Tab Schedule of Values (Step 1: Bid Form of the Response Form tab). b. Additional Required Information: 1. Bid Proposal Certification Form 2. Bid Bond 3. Bond Surety Company 4. Bonding Rate for Change Orders 5. Proposed Project Team and Resumes 6. Proposed Project Schedule 7. Substitutions c. Bid Proposal Certification Form: The Bid Proposal Certification Form shall be signed by the Principal(s) or Officer(s) legally authorized to bind the Bidder, and to execute such documents on behalf of their respective firms or organizations, and the Certificates included in the Bid Proposal Certification Form shall be completed accordingly. Bidder's legal name should be fully and accurately stated. Completed form shall be without interlineation, alterations, or erasures unless initialed and dated by the signer; Owner expressly reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids, and to waive irregularities or informalities in its sole and reasonable discretion.
Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-4
d. Bid Bond: Each Bidder will be required to furnish a Bid Bond electronically via the eBuilder Bid Portal in the amount of 10% of the Bid Amount. Such Bid Bond shall guarantee that the Bidder will execute the Contract if it is awarded to him in conformity with his Proposal. Such Proposal Guarantee Bond shall include a statement that the Insurer shall, at the option of the Bidder, be willing to provide to the Bidder the Contract Bonds as described in 13 below.
6. SALES AND USE TAX EXEMPTION a. The Owner, Cornell University, a non-profit educational institution, is exempt from payment of certain Sales and Use Taxes.
7. FEDERAL EXCISE TAX a. The Owner, Cornell University, a non-profit educational institution, is exempt from payment of certain Federal Excise Taxes.
8. TAX EXEMPT STATUS a. Bidders shall inform all prospective subcontractors and suppliers from whom they expect to obtain proposals or quotations of the tax-exempt status of the Owner as set forth above and request that they reflect anticipated tax credits in their proposals or quotations.
9. EXEMPTION CERTIFICATES a. At the Contractor's request, following the award of a Contract, Contractor exempt purchase certificates will be furnished by the Owner to the Contractor with respect to such tax-exempt articles or transactions as may be applicable under the Contract. 10. TRADE SUBCONTRACTORS, MATERIAL SUPPLIERS a. Each portion of the work shall be performed by an organization equipped and experienced to do work in that particular field, and no portion of the work shall be reserved by the Bidder to himself unless he is so equipped and experienced. Subcontracts shall be awarded only to parties satisfactory to the Owner and the Architect. Each subcontractor and materials supplier shall be approved individually. b. In the spaces provided in the eBuilder Bid Portal Bid Scope form, the Bidder shall list all portions of the work he proposes to perform directly with his own forces. c. A list of names from which the Bidder proposes to select subcontractors, materials suppliers, and/or manufacturers for the principal trades or subdivisions of the work is required as part of the Proposal. d. In the Bid Scope Tab in the eBuilder Bid Portal, a list of the principal trades or subdivisions of the work for which such a listing is required, together with the provisions which govern the listing, selection and approval of principal subcontractors.
Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-5
11. UNIT PRICES The Bidder agrees, if awarded the Contract, to perform work "In addition to" or "deducted from" the scope of the Contract Documents as directed by the Owner and/or Architect, computed in accordance with the unit prices, which prices include all overhead, profit and other expense items in connection therewith, subject to the terms of the Contract Documents. a. Certain Unit Prices may be requested. If requested, a form will be attached to these instructions and will need to be completed and uploaded to the eBuilder Bidding Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields. All Bidders are required to bid on all Unit Prices without exception. b. All unit prices include the installation or omission, complete for each item, together with all work in connection therewith and shall include all shoring, bracing, dewatering and other incidental work. c. Unit prices shall be the total compensation for the item and includes all overhead, profit and any other charges of the Contractor and/or subcontractor in connection therewith. d. Adjustments will be computed on net variation of total quantities of like items. e. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all of the unit prices listed below prior to the execution of the Contract. 12. SUBSTITUTIONS a. Proposals shall conform to the requirements of the Bid Documents. b. The Bidder may offer substitutions for any item of material or equipment, element of work, or method of construction set forth in the Bid Documents, with the exception of Form of Contract, General Conditions and General Requirements - Division 1, are to be entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields by listing each proposed substitution, together with the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid if the substitution is accepted on the form supplied with these instructions. However, the Bidder is cautioned to make his base proposal on the materials and items specified by name or other particular reference. 13. ALTERNATE PROPOSALS a. Certain Alternate Proposals may be requested by the Owner and are included in the General Requirements. They will be listed in the Bid Scope Tab in the eBuilder Bid Portal. All Bidders are required to bid on all Alternates without exception. b. Alternate Proposals shall include all overhead, profit and other expenses in connection therewith. 14. METHOD OF SUBMISSION a. Base Bid shall be prepared and electronically submitted via the eBuilder Bid Portal. All required fields and attachments in the eBuilder Bid Portal must be completed. b. Bid Proposal Certification Form shall be prepared electronically submitted as an attachment via the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields.
Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-6
c. Completed and responsive Bid Proposals shall be submitted through the eBuilder Bid Portal no later than 2:00 PM on April 30, 2021. d. Bid Proposals shall not contain any recapitulation of the work to be done. No oral, written, electronic or telephonic proposals, or modifications will be considered. 15. BID OPENING a. Completed and responsive Bid Proposals will be opened electronically via eBuilder Bid Portal. Responsive Bid results will be posted to the Facilities Contracts website at: https://finance.fs.cornell.edu/contracts/pob/projects.cfm The Owner reserves the right to postpone the date and time of opening of proposals at any time prior to the date and time announced in this Instruction to Bidders or amendments thereto. 16. AWARD OF CONTRACT a. It is the intent of the Owner to enter into a Contract with one General Contractor for the entire project. All labor and services and materials and supplies, etc. are to be provided in accordance with the Contract. b. Award of the Contract shall be made to the bidder submitting the lowest responsive and responsible base bid who, in the opinion of the Owner, is qualified to perform the work. The competence and responsibility of the Bidders' proposed principal subcontractors will be considered in making the Award. c. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Proposals, and to waive any informalities in Bidding. Contract award shall be subject to approval of Cornell University’s Contractors Qualification Statement. d. Bidder expressly warrants and commits that its Proposal shall remain unchanged and in full force and effect at the Owner’s option for a period of not less than ninety (90) calendar days following the bid opening date. e. Bidders may submit, recall, modify, resubmit or withdraw their Bids through the eBuilder Bid Portal up until the Bid Due Date and Time. f. The Owner reserves the right to accept any of the Alternate Proposals listed within sixty (60) calendar days following the award of a construction contract or such other time as may be agreed to by the Owner and Contractor. 17. SCHEDULE OF VALUES a. The successful Bidder shall submit a complete "Schedule of Values" showing the amounts allocated to the various trades, suppliers, subcontractors, installers and General Contractor's work, aggregating the total sum of the Contract. If requested by the Owner or Architect, the complete "Schedule of Values" shall be submitted prior to award of Contract. 18. PERFORMANCE AND LABOR AND MATERIALS PAYMENT BONDS Prior to commencement of on-site construction activities, the successful Bidder shall furnish the Owner with "Performance" and “Labor and Material Payment Bonds", each in the amount of
Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-7
100% of the Contract Price. Each of these Bonds are to be in a form with such sureties as the Owner may approve. The cost of such bonds shall be included in the Bidders Proposal. 19. START OF WORK a. Construction activities on-site shall be started within seven (7) calendar days. Bidder further agrees to achieve substantial completion within the established Project Duration Schedule. 1. Work shall be completed by September 30, 2021. 2. NOTE: Prior to commencement of any on-site construction activities, the successful Bidder shall: i. Furnish the Owner with fully executed and satisfactory Payment and Performance bonds. No on-site construction activities may commence until executed and satisfactory bonds are in place for the subject project. ii. Furnish the Owner with safety plan related to COVID-19 pandemic b. The construction schedule and completion are critical. The Contractor shall provide adequate labor and equipment in the Bid to ensure that no slippage of the schedule will occur.
20. ADDENDA AND BULLETINS a. Bidders must acknowledge in Step 3 of the Bid Response in the eBuilder Bid Portal each Addendum and/or Bulletin issued during the bidding period. 21. REQUIRED POST-AWARD SUBMISSIONS BY THE APPARENT LOW BIDDER a. Within fourteen days after bid opening: (1) Use of Minority and Female Vendor Forms (2) Summary of Bid Activity with Minority and Female Subcontractors/Vendors (3) Six-Month Workforce Projection b. Upon Execution of Contract: (1) Insurance Certificate (2) Performance Bond (3) Labor and Material Payment Bond (4) Schedule of Work (bar chart) (5) Federal Tax Identification Number END OF SECTION
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-1
THE CORNELL STORE EMERGENCY POWER & EMERGENCY LIGHTING REPLACEMENT Cornell University, Ithaca, New York
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM Vendor Name:
Type of Firm, State of Incorporation if Applicable
Street Address, City, State, Zip
Having carefully examined the Instructions to Bidders, the "Conditions of the Contract" (General, Division 1 - "General Requirements"), Supplemental Conditions, the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents dated March 22, 2021 prepared by Cornell University, Facilities Engineering, 201 Humphreys Service Building, Ithaca, New York 14853, as well as the premises and conditions affecting the work, proposes to furnish all material, equipment, labor, plant, machinery, tools, supplies, services, applicable taxes and specified insurance necessary to perform the entire work, as set forth in, and in accordance with the said documents. 1. Receipt of the Addenda to the Terms and Conditions, Drawings or Specifications has been acknowledged in the eBuilder Bid Portal. 2. Minority and Women’s Business Enterprises (M/WBEs) a. The undersigned shall, if awarded the Contract, endeavor to include both Minority and
Women Owned Business Enterprises participation and to demonstrate a “good faith effort” with respect to these requirements. Goals shall be as follows:
• A goal of 2.9% for Minority-Owned Business Enterprise participation shall be applied as follows: a maximum of one-third (1/3) of the goal may be applied to purchases of materials,
supplies, and equipment from MBEs.
• A goal of 2.7% for Women-Owned Business Enterprise participation shall be applied as follows: a maximum of one-third (1/3) of the goal may be applied to purchases of materials, supplies, and equipment from WBEs. 3. Milestone Dates a. Upon project being deemed essential or discontinuance or modification of applicable civil order(s) (e.g., NY State Executive Order(s)) permitting commencement of the subject Work, construction activities on-site shall be started within seven (7) calendar days. Bidder agrees to achieve substantial completion within the established Project Duration. i. Work shall be completed September 30, 2021.
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-2
b. The Contractor shall provide adequate labor and equipment in the Bid to ensure that no slippage of the schedule will occur. Contractor shall attach a Project Duration Schedule to this form that meets the duration established.
c. Following are additional Milestone Dates:
d. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to furnish a "Construction Progress Schedule" consistent with the agreed upon Construction Duration showing the starting and completion dates for all principal trades and subdivisions of the Work, together with such additional information related thereto as may reasonably be required. Such schedule shall be in conformance with General Requirements, Section 01 32 16, 1.3, A. 4. Proposed Principal Subcontractors
a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to employ subcontractors from the list submitted in the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields subject to the following provisions: i. The Owner and Architect reserve the right to review the list of "Proposed Principal Subcontractors" prior to the award of the Contract, and to delete from it the name or names of any to whom they may have a reasonable objection. The Contractor may make the final selection of principal subcontractors at his option from the resulting list after the award of the Contract. 5. Contractor Team: a. The Owner reserves the right to reject the names of any Project Manager or Superintendent
provide in the eBuilder Bid Portal submission to whom they have a reasonable objection. 6. Bonds a. Bid Bond. A Bid Bond in the amount of a minimum of 10% of Bid Amount is attached to the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields. b. Performance and Payment Bonds. Prior to commencement of any on-site construction activities, the undersigned expressly agrees if awarded the Contract, to deliver to Owner executed "Performance" and "Labor and Material Payment Bonds" in such forms as are acceptable to the Owner and in an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Sum. c. Such bonds will be furnished by the Surety entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields.
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-3
d. Bonding Rate for Change Orders has been entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields. 7. Bid Scope - Schedule of Values
a. The undersigned agrees, prior to the award of a construction contract and upon the request of the Architect or Owner, to submit a complete, itemized and detailed "Schedule of Values" including Alternates elected, if any, showing the amount allocated to the various trades and subdivisions of the work, aggregating to the total Contract Sum submitted in the eBuilder Bid Portal. 8. Substitutions a. The Base Bid is predicated on compliance with the Drawings and Specifications without substitutions. b. The Bidder may offer substitutions for any item noted in the Specifications, with the exception of Form of Contract, General Conditions and General Requirements - Division 1. c. Any Substitutions are to be entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields by listing each proposed substitution, together with the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid if the substitution is accepted. d. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any proposed substitution. e. The sum stated includes any modifications of work or additional work that may be required by reason of acceptance of substitution. Substitute materials must be approved and accepted by the Owner in writing before same may be used in lieu of those named in the Specifications. 9. Unit Price Schedule
a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to perform work "In addition to" or "deducted from" the scope of the Contract Documents as directed by the Owner and/or Architect, computed in accordance with the unit prices form uploaded in the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields, which prices include all overhead, profit and other expense items in connection therewith, subject to the terms of the Contract Documents. b. All unit prices include the installation or omission, complete for each item, together with all work in connection therewith and shall include all shoring, bracing, dewatering and other incidental work. c. Adjustments will be computed on net variation of total quantities of like items. d. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all of the unit prices entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields prior to the execution of the Contract.
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-4
10. Acceptance
a. The undersigned agrees that the amount submitted for the Base Bid and any Alternates and Unit Pricing along with the required attachments in the Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields submitted in the eBuilder Bid Portal have been reviewed and are accurate. b. The undersigned acknowledges as Contractor to be and remain exclusively in control of the Project site and Work, as well as the Project’s Health & Safety Plan, measures, and/or protocols, for the duration of construction activities. i. The undersigned acknowledges receipt of Supplemental Conditions to the Contract surrounding Contractor Response and Health & Safety Protocols for COVID-19, or other viral, bacterial, or microbial presence (as applicable). ii. The undersigned acknowledges that no one will be permitted on the job site until the Health & Safety Plan has been submitted.
c. It is understood and agreed that the Owner expressly reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids, and to waive irregularities or informalities in its sole and reasonable discretion. d. Upon acceptance of Bidder’s Proposal, Bidder expressly agrees and affirms to hold its unchanged Bid Proposal for ninety (90) calendar days. The undersigned will execute an Agreement between Contractor and Owner, amended and/or supplemented, if required, in accordance with the Proposal as accepted. Nothing contained herein shall preclude Bidder and Owner from mutually agreeing upon a Contract based upon the unchanged Bid Proposal if the
time elapsed from Award is in excess of ninety (90) calendar days. e. The undersigned acknowledges the following Addendum(s) (as applicable):
f. It is understood and agreed that award of the Contract shall be made to the Bidder submitting the lowest responsive and responsible bid who, in the sole discretion of the Owner, is qualified to perform the Work.
g. The undersigned agrees to furnish Owner satisfactory and executed Performance and Payment Bonds prior to the commencement of any Work on-site. h. Alternates: 1. The undersigned, if awarded the Contract, proposes to perform work in addition to or in place of the scope of the work shown and specified herein associated with the Base Bid in accordance with the Alternate Proposals, which amounts are to be added or deducted to the
amount of the Base Bid as indicated for the Alternates specified in Division 1 of the Specifications.
Addendum No. __ dated ____.
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-5
2. It is understood that the Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any of the Alternate Proposals provided in the eBuilder Bid Portal within sixty (60) calendar days following the award of a construction contract or such other time as may be agreed to by the Owner and Contractor. The following documentation is required to be submitted electronically in the eBuilder Bidding Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields
Bid Proposal Certification Form (this Form) signed and executed
Project Duration Schedule
Bid Bond
Proposed Project Team Resumes (Bidder)
By: Title: Business Address: Dated:
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-6
CERTIFICATE OF NON-COLLUSION
By submission of this bid, each bidder and each person signing on behalf of any bidder certifies, and in the case of a joint bid each party thereto certifies as to its own organization, under penalty of perjury, that to the best of its knowledge and belief: a. The prices in this bid have been arrived at independently without collusion, consultation, communication, or agreement, for the purpose of restricting competition, as to any matter relating to such prices with any other bidder or with any competitor. b. Unless required by law, the prices that have been quoted in this bid have not been knowingly disclosed, directly or indirectly, by the bidder and will not knowingly be disclosed by the bidder to any other bidder or any competitor prior to opening. c. No attempt has been made or will be made by the bidder to induce any other persons, partnership, or corporation to submit or not submit a bid for the purpose of restricting competition. (Bidder) By: Title: Dated:
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-7
CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE BIDDER
I, _____________________________________________________, certify that I am the
_____________________________ of the Corporation named as Bidder within this Bid Form for General
Contractors; that __________________________________, who signed said Bid Form on behalf of the
bidder was then _______________________________ of said Corporation; that I know his signature; that
his signature thereto is genuine and that said Bid Form and attachments thereto were duly signed and
executed for and on behalf of said Corporation by authority of its governing body. (Secretary-Clerk) Dated:
Rev 12.2018
G E N E R A L C O N D I T I O N S FOR THE CORNELL STORE EMERGENCY POWER & EMERGENCY LIGHTING REPLACEMENT CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK
i Rev 12.2018
GENERAL CONDITIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS Page
ARTICLE 1 INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Section 1.01 Owner 1 Section 1.02 Meaning and Intent of Specifications, Plans and Drawings 1 Section 1.03 Order of Precedence 1 ARTICLE 2 CONTRACTOR Section 2.01 Contractor's Obligations 2 Section 2.02 Contractor's Title to Materials 2 Section 2.03 "Or Equal" Clause 2 Section 2.04 Quality, Quantity and Labeling 3 Section 2.05 Superintendence by Contractor 3 Section 2.06 Subsurface or Site Conditions 4 Section 2.07 Representations of Contractor 4 Section 2.08 Verifying Dimensions and Site Conditions 4 Section 2.09 Copies of Contract Documents for Contractors 5 Section 2.10 Meetings 5 Section 2.11 Related Work 5 Section 2.12 Surveys and Layout 5 Section 2.13 Errors, Omissions or Discrepancies 5 Section 2.14 Project Labor Rates 6 Section 2.15 Daily Reports 6 ARTICLE 3 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE Section 3.01 Access to the Work 6 Section 3.02 Notice for Testing 6 Section 3.03 Inspection of Work 7 Section 3.04 Inspection and Testing 7 Section 3.05 Defective or Damaged Work 7 Section 3.06 Acceptance 7 ARTICLE 4 CHANGES IN WORK
Section 4.01 Changes 8 Section 4.02 Claims for Extra Work 11 Section 4.03 Form of Change Orders 12 ARTICLE 5 TIME OF COMPLETION Section 5.01 Time of Completion 12
ii Rev 12.2018
TABLE OF CONTENTS Page
ARTICLE 6 TERMINATION Section 6.01 Termination for Cause 13 Section 6.02 Termination for Convenience of Owner 13 Section 6.03 Owner's Right to do Work 13 ARTICLE 7 DISPUTES Section 7.01 Disputes Procedure 14 ARTICLE 8 SUBCONTRACTS Section 8.01 Subcontracting 15 ARTICLE 9 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION Section 9.01 Cooperation with Other Contractors 15 ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF RIGHTS, PERSONS AND PROPERTY Section 10.01 Accidents and Accident Prevention 16 Section 10.02 Adjoining Property 17 Section 10.03 Emergencies 17 Section 10.04 Bonds 17 Section 10.05 Risks Assumed by the Contractor 18 Section 10.06 Contractor's Compensation and Liability Insurance 18 Section 10.07 Liability Insurance of the Owner 20 Section 10.08 Owner's and Contractor's Responsibilities for Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Hazards 20 Section 10.09 Effect of Procurement of Insurance 21 Section 10.10 No Third Party Rights 21 ARTICLE 11 USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER Section 11.01 Substantial Completion 21 Section 11.02 Occupancy Prior to Acceptance 21
ARTICLE 12 PAYMENT Section 12.01 Provision of Payment 22 Section 12.02 Stored Materials & Equipment 23 Section 12.03 Retention 24 Section 12.04 Withholding Payments 24 Section 12.05 Documents and Conditions Precedent to Final Payment 25 Section 12.06 Final Payment and Release 26
iii Rev 12.2018
TABLE OF CONTENTS Page
ARTICLE 13 TAX EXEMPTION Section 13.01 Tax Exemption 26 ARTICLE 14 GUARANTEE Section 14.01 Guarantee 27 ARTICLE 15 STANDARD PROVISIONS Section 15.01 Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted 27 Section 15.02 Laws Governing the Contract 27 Section 15.03 Assignments 27 Section 15.04 No Third Party Rights 28 Section 15.05 Waiver of Rights of Owner 28 Section 15.06 Limitation on Actions 28 Section 15.07 Owner's Representative 28 ARTICLE 16 MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISES Section 16.01 Definitions 28 Section 16.02 Participation by Minority and Women Business Enterprises 28 Section 16.03 MWBE Utilization Plan 29 Section 16.04 Reports and Records 29 ARTICLE 17 ACCOUNTING, INSPECTION AND AUDIT 30 ARTICLE 18 CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION 30 ARTICLE 19 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 30 ARTICLE 20 CONFIDENTIALITY AND USE OF OWNER'S NAME Section 20.01 Release of Information 31 Section 20.02 Confidential Information 31 Section 20.03 Use of Owner's Name 31
ARTICLE 21 CORNELL UNIVERSITY STANDARDS OF ETHICAL CONDUCT 32
iv Rev 12.2018
EXHIBITS A Change Order Documentation Instructions Construction Contract Change Order Request Construction Contract Change Order Summary
B Final Release C Guarantee D Form I MWBE Utilization Plan Form II Contractor’s Affirmative Action Plan Form III Affirmative Action Workforce Report E Labor Rate Breakdown F Stored Materials Invoicing Documentation G Contractor Performance Evaluation
1 Rev 12.2018
ARTICLE 1 -- INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Section 1.01 - Owner
A. The Owner is Cornell University as identified in the Agreement and referred to throughout the Contract Documents as the "Owner" or "Cornell University". B. Ownership of Documents: All drawings, specifications, computations, sketches, test data, survey results, photographs, renderings and other material relating to the Work, whether furnished to or prepared by the Contractor, are the property of Cornell University. The Contractor shall use such materials or information therefrom only in connection with the Work of this Contract. When requested, the Contractor shall deliver such materials to Cornell University. C. The Owner shall give all orders and directions contemplated under the Contract relative to the execution of the Work. The Owner shall determine the amount, quality, acceptability, and fitness of the Work and shall decide all questions which may arise in relation to said Work. The Owner's estimates and decisions shall be final except as otherwise expressly provided. D. Any differences or conflicts concerning performance which may arise between the Contractor and other Contractors performing Work for the Owner shall be adjusted and determined by the Owner. E. The table of contents, titles, captions, headings, running headlines, and marginal notes contained herein and in said documents is intended to facilitate reference to various provisions of the Contract Documents and in no way affect the interpretation of the provisions to which they refer. Section 1.02 - Meaning and Intent of Specifications, Plans and Drawings The meaning and intent of all specifications, plans and drawings shall be determined in a manner approved by the Owner. Section 1.03 - Order of Precedence A. Should a conflict occur in or between or among any parts of the Contract Documents that are entitled to equal preference, the more expensive way of doing the Work, the better quality or greater quantity of material shall govern, unless the Owner otherwise so directs in writing.
B. Drawings and specifications are reciprocal. Anything shown on the plans and not mentioned in the specifications, or mentioned in the specifications and not shown on the plans, shall have the same effect as if shown or mentioned in both. C. Requirements of reference standards form a part of these specifications to the extent indicated by the reference thereto. When provisions of reference standards conflict with provisions in these specifications, the specifications shall govern.
2 Rev 12.2018
ARTICLE 2 -- CONTRACTOR Section 2.01 - Contractor's Obligations
A. The Contractor shall, in good workmanlike manner, perform all the Work required by the Contract within the time specified in the Contract. The Contractor shall comply with all terms of the Contract, and shall do, carry on, and complete the entire Work to the satisfaction of the Owner. 1. All labor for this project which is normally under the jurisdiction of one of the local unions as covered in the contract between the Tompkins-Cortland Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division and Cornell University shall be performed by Union labor. B. The Contractor shall furnish, erect, maintain, and remove such construction plant and such temporary Work as may be required. C. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, material, tools, equipment, machinery, as well as utility connections, transportation, and all other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work, except as otherwise specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. D. Whenever a provision of the Specifications conflicts with agreements or regulations in force among members of trade associations, unions, or councils which regulate or distinguish what work shall or shall not be included in the work of a particular trade, the Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to reconcile such conflict without delay, damage, or cost to the Owner and without recourse to the Architect or the Owner. In case progress of the Work is affected by undue delay in furnishing or installing items of material or equipment required under the Contract because of a conflict involving such agreement or regulations, the Owner or the Architect may require that other material or equipment of equal kind and quality be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. Section 2.02 - Contractor's Title to Materials A. The Contractor warrants that the Contractor has full, good and clear title to all materials and supplies used by the Contractor in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. B. All materials, equipment and articles which become the property of the Owner shall be new unless specifically stated otherwise.
Section 2.03 - "Or Equal" Clause A. Whenever a material, article or piece of equipment or method is identified on the plans or in the specifications by reference to manufacturers' or vendors' names, trade name, catalogue number, or make, no others may be substituted. Any and all other "Or Equal" considerations will be handled under this Section in accordance with General Requirements, Section 01 25 00.
3 Rev 12.2018
B. Where the Architect approves a product proposed by the Contractor and said proposed product requires a revision or redesign of any part of the Work covered by this Contract, or the Work covered by other contracts, all said revision or redesign, and all new drawings and details required therefor shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be approved by the Architect.
All time spent by the Architect or its agents to evaluate the proposed substitution and or necessary engineering cost to accommodate the requested change shall be reimbursed to the Owner by the Contractor via the Change Order procedure. Section 2.04 - Quality, Quantity and Labeling A. The Contractor shall furnish materials and equipment of the quality and quantity specified in the Contract. Unless otherwise provided, all materials and articles incorporated into the work shall be new and of the most suitable grade of their respective kinds for the purpose. When required by the Contract Documents or when directed by the Owner, the Contractor shall supply the Owner's Representative, for their acceptance, full information concerning any material which the Contractor contemplates incorporating into the work. Materials and articles installed or used without such acceptance shall be at the risk of subsequent rejection. B. When materials are specified to conform to any standard, the Owner may require that the materials delivered to the Site shall bear manufacturer's labels stating that the materials meet said standards. C. The above requirements shall not restrict or affect the Owner's right to test materials as provided in the Contract. D. Whenever several alternative materials or items are specified by name or other particular reference for one use, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to submit in writing a list of the particular materials or items the Contractor intends to use before the Contract is executed. Section 2.05 - Superintendence by Contractor A. The Contractor shall employ a full-time effective, responsive and competent construction superintendent and necessary staff; the construction superintendent shall devote full time to the Work and shall have full authority to act for the Contractor at all times. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with the names and authority of such personnel in writing. B. If at any time the superintendent is not satisfactory to the Owner, the Contractor shall, if requested by the Owner, replace said superintendent with another superintendent satisfactory to the Owner. There shall be no change in superintendent without the Owner's approval.
C. The Contractor shall remove from the Work any employee of the Contractor or of any Subcontractor when so directed by the Owner.
4 Rev 12.2018
Section 2.06 - Subsurface or Site Conditions A. The Contractor acknowledges that it has assumed the risk and that the contract consideration includes such provision as the Contractor deems proper for all subsurface conditions
as the Contractor could reasonably anticipate encountering from the provisions of the Contract Documents, borings, rock cores, topographical maps and such other information as the Owner made available to the Contractor or from their own inspection and examination of the site prior to the Owner's receipt of bids. B. In the event that the Contractor encounters subsurface physical conditions at the site differing substantially from those shown on or described or indicated in the Contract Documents and which could not have been reasonably anticipated from the aforesaid information made available by the Owner or from the Contractor's aforesaid inspection and examination of the site, the Contractor shall give immediate notice to the Owner of such conditions before they are disturbed. Such notice shall include probable cost and/or any impact to the schedule. The Owner will thereupon promptly investigate the conditions and if Owner finds that they do substantially differ from that which should have been reasonably anticipated by the Contractor, the Owner shall make such changes in the drawings and specifications as may be necessary and a change order shall be issued. Section 2.07 - Representations of Contractor The Contractor represents and warrants: A. That the Contractor is financially solvent and is experienced in and competent to perform the Work; B. That the Contractor is familiar with all Federal, State, or other laws, ordinances, orders, building codes, rules and regulations, which may in any way affect the Work; C. That any temporary and permanent Work required by the Contract can be safely and satisfactorily constructed. D. That the Contractor has carefully examined the Contract and the Site of the Work and that, from the Contractor's own investigations is satisfied as to the nature and location of the Work, the character, quality and quantity of surface and subsurface materials likely to be encountered, the character of equipment and other facilities needed for the performance of the Work, the general and local conditions, and all other materials or items which may affect the Work. The Contractor has correlated those observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents and has made all other investigations essential to a full understanding of the Work and the difficulties which may be encountered in performing the Work.
Section 2.08 - Verifying Dimensions and Site Conditions A. The Contractor shall take all measurements at the Site and shall verify all dimensions and site conditions at the Site before proceeding with the Work. If said dimensions or conditions are found to be in conflict with the Contract, the Contractor immediately shall refer said conflict to the Owner.
5 Rev 12.2018
B. During the progress of Work, the Contractor shall verify all field measurements prior to fabrication of building components and equipment, and proceed with the fabrication to meet field conditions.
C. The Contractor shall consult all Contract Documents to determine exact location of all Work and verify spatial relationships of all Work. Any question concerning said location or spatial relationships shall be submitted in a manner approved by the Owner. D. Specific locations for equipment, pipelines, ductwork and other such items of Work, where not dimensioned on plans, shall be determined in consultation with the Owner and other affected Contractors and Subcontractors. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of the Work in place. F. Should failure of the Contractor to perform services under this section result in additional costs to the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for such additional costs. Section 2.09 - Copies of Contract Documents for Contractors A. The Contractor will have access to view and download the Bid Documents in eBuilder. B. All drawings, specifications, and copies thereof are the property of the Owner and are not to be used on other work Section 2.10 - Meetings The Contractor and all subcontractors as requested shall attend all meetings as directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative. Section 2.11 - Related Work The Contractor shall examine the Contract for related work to ascertain the relationship of said work to the Work under the Contract. Section 2.12 - Surveys and Layout Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract, the Owner shall furnish the Contractor all surveys of the property necessary for the Work, but the Contractor shall lay out the Work.
Section 2.13 - Errors, Omissions or Discrepancies The Contractor shall examine the Contract thoroughly before commencing the Work and report in writing any errors or discrepancies to the Owner or the Owner's Representative.
6 Rev 12.2018
Section 2.14 - Project Labor Rates The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, for review and approval, within thirty (30) days after Contract is awarded all trade labor rates inclusive of fringe benefits, taxes, insurance for the
duration of the individual craft agreement in accordance with Exhibit G. Revised rates shall be provided within thirty (30) days of signing any new agreements with the individual crafts during this project. Section 2.15 – Daily Reports The Contractor's Construction Superintendent shall submit a Daily Report to the Cornell University Project Manager or the Resident Field Engineer at the job site. Such reports shall, at a minimum, contain the following information: Name of Project Project Number Date of Report Weather Conditions Equipment on the site Contractors on site including name and number of employees on site for each contractor Work/area and activity for each contractor Overtime worked and planned work progress Environmental problems and corrections Other information, such as special events, occurrences, materials delivered, accidents or injuries, recommendations, suggestions, visitors, inspections, equipment start-up and check out, occupancy, etc. ARTICLE 3 -- INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE Section 3.01 - Access to the Work The Owner and Architect, or their duly authorized representatives, assistants, or inspectors shall at all times and for any purpose have access to the work and the premises used by the Contractor, and the Contractor shall provide safe and proper facilities therefor. In addition, the Contractor shall, whenever so requested, give the Owner and Architect or their duly authorized representatives access to the proper invoices, bills of lading, specifications, etc., which may be required in determining the adequacy and/or quantity of materials used in completion of the work. Section 3.02 - Notice for Testing
If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction require any work to be inspected, tested, accepted, or approved, the Contractor shall give the Owner timely notice of its readiness and of the date arranged so the Owner may observe such inspection, testing, or approval. The Contractor shall bear all costs of such inspection, tests, and approvals unless otherwise provided.
7 Rev 12.2018
Section 3.03 - Inspection of Work A. The Contractor will cooperate in all ways to facilitate the inspection and examination of the work. The inspections and examinations will be carried out in such a manner
that the work will not be delayed. B. All Work, all materials whether or not incorporated in the Work, all processes of manufacturer, and all methods of construction shall be, at all times and places, subject to the inspection of the Owner and the Owner shall be the final judge of the quality and suitability of the Work. Any Work not approved by the Owner shall immediately be reconstructed, made good, replaced or corrected by the Contractor including all Work of other Contractors destroyed or damaged by said removal or replacement. C. Required certificates of inspection, testing, acceptance, or approval shall be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Owner. Section 3.04 - Inspection and Testing All materials and equipment used in the Work shall be subject to inspection and testing in accordance with accepted standards to establish conformance with specifications and suitability for uses intended, unless otherwise specified in the Contract. If any Work shall be covered or concealed without the approval or consent of the Owner, said Work shall, if required by the Owner, be uncovered for examination. If any test results are below specified minimums, the Owner may order additional testing. The cost of said additional testing, any additional professional services required, and any other expenses incurred by the Owner as a result of said additional testing shall be paid by the Contractor. Reexamination of any part of the Work may be ordered by the Owner, and if so ordered the Work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If said Work is found to be in accordance with the Contract, the Owner shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement. If said Work is found not to be in accordance with the Contract, the Contractor shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement. Section 3.05 - Defective or Damaged Work If, in the opinion of the Owner, it is undesirable to replace any defective or damaged materials or to reconstruct or correct any portion of the Work injured or not performed in accordance with the Contract, the compensation to be paid to the Contractor shall be reduced by an amount which, in the judgment of the Owner, shall be deemed to be equitable. Section 3.06 - Acceptance No previous inspection shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation to perform the Work
in accordance with the Contract. No payment, either partial or full, by the Owner to the Contractor shall excuse any failure by the Contractor to comply fully with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall remedy all defects, paying the cost of any damage to other Work resulting therefrom.
8 Rev 12.2018
ARTICLE 4 -- CHANGES IN WORK Section 4.01 - Changes
A. The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes within the general scope of the Contract and the Contractor shall promptly comply with such change orders. B. A change order is a written direction to the Contractor signed by the Owner, issued after execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the Work, extra work, or an adjustment in the Contract price or time of performance. C. No claims for changes, extra work or additional time to complete the Contract or an adjustment in the Contract price shall be allowed unless such change is ordered in writing by the Owner. D. The Owner shall determine the amount by which the Contract consideration is to be increased or decreased by a change order by one (1) or more of the following methods: 1. By agreement with the Contractor. 2. By applying the applicable price or prices previously bid and approved. (i) To the extent that Unit Prices are applicable, as determined by the Owner, work shall be priced and paid for or credited in accordance with such Unit Prices; except that a Unit Price shall not apply to any portion of work which is either reduced or increased by more than 25%. Said Unit Prices shall be valid for the duration of the project as applicable, unless stipulated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. (ii) For Unit Price items, additions and deletion of like items shall be algebraically summed and then multiplied by the applicable Unit Prices. For Direct Labor and Material items, all additions and deletions shall be algebraically summed for each subcontractor and then multiplied by the applicable markup. (iii) Unit Prices are for work complete, measured in place and cover profit and all other costs and expenses. Unit Prices include, without limit, all conditions of the contract and all general requirements such as layout, reproduction of Drawings and Specifications, testing and inspection, shop drawing and sample coordination, supervision (field and home office), small tools and expendable items, insurance, taxes,
temporary facilities and services, including access and safety, "as-built" drawings, and general and administrative overhead and profit.
9 Rev 12.2018
3. By estimating the fair and reasonable cost of: (i) Labor, including all wages, required wage supplements and insurance required by law paid to employees below the rank of superintendent directly employed at the Site.
(ii) Materials (iii) Equipment, excluding hand tools, which in the judgment of the Owner, would have been or will be employed exclusively and directly on the Work. When submitting change orders, equipment which is common to the project scope at hand is expected to be previously paid for as overhead / general conditions to the project. Special rental equipment or tools not common to the project that are required to perform the change order will be accepted as additional costs. 4. By determining the actual cost of the extra work in the same manner as in Subsection 3 except the actual costs of the Contractor shall be used in lieu of estimated costs. E. Mark-up Percentages 1. Work performed by the Contractor: Where the Work is performed directly by the Contractor by adding to the total of such estimated costs a sum equal to fifteen percent (15%) thereof. 2. Work performed by a Subcontractor: Where the change order work is performed by a Subcontractor under contract with the Contractor, by adding a sum equal to fifteen (15%) of said costs for the benefit of said Subcontractor, and by adding for the benefit of the Contractor an additional sum equal to ten percent (10%) of said costs. 3. Work performed by a Sub-Subcontractor: Where work is performed by a Sub-Subcontractor, by adding the sum equal to fifteen percent (15%) of said costs for the benefit of said Sub-Subcontractor, by adding for the benefit of the Subcontractor an additional sum equal to five percent (5%) of said cost and by adding for the benefit of the Contractor an additional sum equal to five percent (5%) of said cost. The maximum aggregate of all mark-up percentages may not exceed twenty five percent (25%). 4. No Markup on Bonds and Insurance Costs: Change Order cost adjustments due to increases or decreases in bond or insurance costs (if applicable) shall
not be subject to any Markup Percentage. 5. Overtime Pay: No mark-up shall be paid on the premium portion of overtime pay.
10 Rev 12.2018
6. Direct and Indirect Costs Covered by Markup Percentages: As a further clarification, the agreed upon Markup Percentage is intended to cover the Contractor's profit and all indirect costs and expenses associated with the change order work. Items intended to be covered by the Markup Percentage
include, without limit: home office expenses, branch office and field office overhead expense of any kind; project management; superintendents, general foremen; estimating, engineering; coordinating; expediting; purchasing; detailing; legal, accounting, data processing or other administrative expenses; reproduction of drawings and specifications; shop drawings and sample coordination; “as-built” drawings; permits; auto insurance and umbrella insurance; pick-up truck costs; parking permits; cellular phones; testing and inspection; temporary facilities; access and safety provisions; and warranty expense costs. The cost for the use of small tools and/or tools already in use on site are also to be considered covered by the Markup Percentage. Small tools shall be defined as tools and equipment (power or non-power) with an individual purchase cost of less than $750 7. Deduct Change Orders and Net Deduct Changes: The application of the markup percentage will apply to both additive and deductive change orders. In the case of a deductive change order, the credit will be computed by applying the percentage so that a deductive change order would be computed in the same manner as an additive change order. In those instances where a change involves both additive and deductive work, the additions and deductions will be netted and the markup percentage adjustments will be applied to the net amount F. Regardless of the method used by the Owner in determining the value of a change order, the Contractor, within thirty (30) calendar days after a request for the estimate of value shall submit to the Owner a detailed breakdown of the Contractor's estimate, including all subcontractors details, of the value of the Change Order Work, in the format detailed in Exhibit A. Each submission shall include an electronic .pdf format of all documentation. G. Unless otherwise specifically provided for in a change order, the compensation specified therein includes a full payment for both the Work covered by the order and for any damage or expense incurred by the Contractor by any delays, including any delays to other Work to be done under the Contract resulting from said change order. The Contractor waives all rights to any other compensation for said damage or expense. H. The Contractor shall furnish satisfactory bills, payrolls and vouchers covering all items of cost and when requested by the Owner shall give the Owner access to accounts and records relating thereto.
11 Rev 12.2018
Section 4.02 – Claims for Extra Work If the Contractor claims (i) that any work it has been ordered to do is extra work or (ii) that it has performed or is going to perform extra work or (iii) that any action or omission of the Owner
or the Architect is contrary to the terms and provisions of the Contract, the Contractor shall: A. Promptly comply with such order; B. Notwithstanding the provisions of this Agreement, Article 4 of these General Condition and any other provisions of the Contract documents to the contrary, file with the Owner, within fourteen (14) calendar days after being ordered to perform the work claimed by it to be extra work or within fourteen (14) calendar days after commencing performance of the extra work, whichever date shall be the earlier, or within fourteen (14) calendar days after the said action or omission on the part of the Owner or the Architect occurred, a written notice of the basis of its claim and request a determination thereof; C. Notwithstanding the provisions of this Agreement and any other provisions of the Contract documents to the contrary, file with the Owner, within thirty (30) calendar days after said alleged extra work was required to be performed or said alleged extra work was commenced, whichever date shall be the earlier, or said alleged action or omission by the Owner or the Architect occurred, a verified detailed statement, with documentary evidence, of the items and basis of its claim; D. Produce for the Owner’s examination, upon notice from the Owner, all its books of account, bills, invoices, payrolls, subcontracts, time books, progress records, daily reports, bank deposit books, bank statements, checkbooks and cancelled checks, showing all of its actions and transactions in connection with or relating to or arising by reason of its claim, and submit persons in its employment and in its subcontractors' employment for examination under oath by any person designated by the Owner to investigate any claims made against the Owner under the Contract, such examination to be made at the offices of the Contractor; and E. Proceed diligently, pending and subsequent to the determination of the Owner with respect to any such disputed matter, with the performance of the Contract and in accordance with all instructions of the Owner and the Architect. F. The Contractor's failure to comply with any or all parts of Section 4.02 shall be deemed to be: (i) a conclusive and binding determination on its part that said order, work, action or omission does not involve extra work and is not contrary to the terms and provisions of the Contract; and (ii) a waiver by the Contractor of all claims for additional compensation or damages as a result of said order, work, action or omission. The provisions of Section 4.02 is to promptly afford the Owner opportunity to cancel or revise any order, change its plans, mitigate or remedy
the effects or circumstances giving rise to a claim or take such other action as may seem desirable and to verify any claimed expenses or circumstances as they occur. Compliance with such provisions is essential whether or not the Owner is aware of the circumstances of any order or other circumstances which might constitute a basis for a claim and whether or not the Owner has indicated it will consider a claim in connection therewith. G. No person has power to waive or modify any of the foregoing provisions and, in any action against the Owner to recover any sum in excess of the sum certified by the Owner to be due under or by reason of the Contract, the Contractor must allege in its complaint and prove compliance with the provisions of this Section.
12 Rev 12.2018
Section 4.03 - Form of Change Orders All change orders shall be processed, executed and approved via the Owner's E-Builder
Change Order Process. No payment for change order Work shall be due the Contractor unless a change order has been issued and approved as noted above. ARTICLE 5 -- TIME OF COMPLETION Section 5.01 - Time of Completion A. The Work shall be commenced at the time stated in the written order of the Owner and shall be completed no later than the date of completion specified in the Contract. All required overtime to maintain progress schedule is included in the Base Bid. B. The date of beginning and the time for completion of the Work, as specified in the Contract, are essential conditions of the Contract. C. The Work shall be prosecuted diligently at such rate of progress as shall insure full completion within the time specified. It is expressly understood and agreed, that the time for the completion of the Work described herein is a reasonable time, taking into consideration the average climatic range and usual business and labor conditions prevailing in the locality of the Site. D. Time is of the essence on each and every portion of the Work. In any instance in which additional time is allowed for the completion of any Work, the new time of completion established by said extension shall be of the essence. If in the Architect’s or Owner's judgment, it becomes necessary at any time during construction to accelerate and/or complete certain areas of the project, the Contractor shall concentrate efforts and manpower on designated areas. E. Where Work occurs within occupied areas, perform same only on approved schedule, so as not to interfere with normal operation of occupied areas. F. The Contractor shall not be charged with damages or any excess cost if the Owner determines that the Contractor is without fault and the Contractor's reasons for the time extension are acceptable to the Owner. The Contractor shall not be charged with damages or any excess cost for delay in completion of the work if the Owner determines that the delay is due to: 1. any preference, priority or allocation order duly issued by the Government of the United States or the State of New York;
2. unforeseeable cause beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor, and approved by the Owner, including, but not limited to, acts of God or of public enemy, acts of the Owner, fires, epidemics, quarantine, restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes and unusually severe weather.
13 Rev 12.2018
G. The time for completion can only be extended by change order and may be extended for: 1. all of the Work, or
2. only that portion of the Work altered by the change order. H. Any claim for extension of time shall be made in writing to the Owner not more than ten (10) days after the commencement of the delay; otherwise it shall be waived. ARTICLE 6 -- TERMINATION Section 6.01 - Termination for Cause In the event that any provision of this Contract is violated by the Contractor or by any Subcontractor of the Contractor, the Owner may serve written notice upon the Contractor, and upon the Contractor's surety, if any, of the Owner's intention to terminate the Contract. The notice shall briefly state the reasons for the termination and shall specify a termination date. If arrangements satisfactory to the Owner are not made to remove and remedy the violation, the Contract shall terminate upon the date specified by the Owner in the notice. In the event of termination, the Owner may take over and complete the Work at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor and Contractor's surety shall be liable to the Owner for all costs thereby incurred by the Owner. In the event of such termination the Owner may take possession of and may utilize such materials, appliances, and plant as may be located on the Site and which may be necessary or useful in completing the Work. Section 6.02 - Termination for Convenience of Owner The Owner, at any time, may terminate the Contract in whole or in part. Any said termination shall be effected by delivering to the Contractor a notice of termination specifying the extent to which performance of Work under the Contract is terminated and the date upon which said termination becomes effective. Upon receipt of the notice of termination, the Contractor shall act promptly to minimize the expenses resulting from said termination. The Owner shall pay the Contractor for costs actually incurred by the Contractor up to the effective date of said termination, but in no event shall the Contractor be entitled to compensation in excess of the total consideration of the Contract. In the event of said termination the Owner may take over the Work and prosecute same to completion. Section 6.03 - Owner's Right to do Work
The Owner may, after notice to the Contractor, without terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Owner may have, perform or have performed by others all of the Work or any part thereof and may deduct the cost thereof from any monies due or to become due the Contractor.
14 Rev 12.2018
ARTICLE 7 -- DISPUTES Section 7.01 - Disputes Procedure
A. If the Contractor claims that any Work which the Contractor has been ordered to perform will be Work which should have been authorized or directed by change order, or that any action or omission of the Owner is contrary to the terms of the Contract, the Contractor shall: 1. File a notice with the Owner which sets forth the basis of the Contractor's claim and requests a resolution of the dispute. Such notice shall be filed within fifteen (15) working days after being ordered to perform the disputed work or within fifteen (15) working days after commencing performance of the disputed work, whichever is earlier, or within fifteen (15) working days after the act or omission of the Owner which the Contractor claims is contrary to the terms of the Contract. 2. Proceed diligently with the performance of the work in accordance with the instructions of the Owner pending the resolution of the dispute by the Owner. 3. Promptly comply with the order of the Owner regarding the disputed matter. 4. Any such decision, or any other decision of the Owner in respect to a dispute, shall be final unless the Contractor, within ten (10) working days after such decision, shall deliver to the Owner a verified written statement which sets forth the Contractor's contention that the decision is contrary to a provision of the contract. Pending the decision of the Owner, the Contractor shall proceed in accordance with the original decision. The Owner shall determine the validity of the Contractor's claim and such determination shall be final. The Contractor may file a notice with the Owner reserving its rights in connection with the dispute but shall comply with the Owner's decision and complete the work as directed. B. No claim for additional costs regarding changed or extra work shall be allowed unless the work was done pursuant to a written order of the Owner. C. The value of claims for extra work, if allowed, shall be determined by the methods described in the Contract. Refer to Article 4 of these General Conditions. D. The Contractor's failure to comply with any or all parts of Article 7 shall be deemed
to be: 1. a conclusive and binding determination on the part of the Contractor that the order, work, action or omission is not contrary to the terms and provisions of the Contract; 2. a waiver by the Contractor of all claims for additional compensation, time extension, or damages as a result of said order, work, action or omission.
15 Rev 12.2018
ARTICLE 8 -- SUBCONTRACTS Section 8.01 - Subcontracting
A. The Contractor may utilize the services of Subcontractors. B. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, in writing, the name of each proposed Subcontractor and Sub-Subcontractor, as required by the Contract. The Contractor shall not award any Work to any Subcontractor or Sub-Subcontractor without the prior written approval of the Owner. C. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the Work, acts and omissions of Subcontractors, and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by Subcontractors. D. The Contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts relative to the Work to bind Subcontractors to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract insofar as applicable to the Work of Subcontractors, indemnification and to give the Contractor the same power to terminate any subcontract that the Owner may exercise over the Contractor. E. The Contractor's use of Subcontractors shall not diminish the Contractor's obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor shall control and coordinate the Work of Subcontractors. F. Nothing contained in the Contract shall create any contractual relationship between Subcontractors and the Owner. ARTICLE 9 -- COORDINATION AND COOPERATION Section 9.01 - Cooperation with Other Contractors A. Normally, the Work will be performed by a single Contractor. However, the Owner reserves the right to perform work related to the Work with its own forces or award separate contracts. In that event, the Contractor shall coordinate its operations with the Owner's forces or separate Contractors. B. The Owner cannot guarantee the responsibility, efficiency, unimpeded operations or performance of any contractor. The Contractor acknowledges these conditions and shall bear the risk of all delays including, but not limited to, delays caused by the presence or operations of other contractors.
C. The Contractor shall keep informed of the progress and workmanship of other contractors and shall notify the Owner immediately of lack of progress or defective workmanship on the part of other contractors where said delay or defective workmanship may interfere with the Contractor's operations. D. Failure of a Contractor to keep so informed and failure to give notice of lack of progress or defective workmanship by others shall be construed as acceptance by the Contractor of said progress and workmanship as being satisfactory for proper coordination with the Work.
16 Rev 12.2018
E. If the Contractor notifies the Owner, in writing, that another contractor on the Site is failing to coordinate the work of said contractor with the Work, the Owner shall investigate the charge. If the Owner finds it to be true, the Owner shall promptly issue such directions to the other contractor with respect thereto as the situation may require. The Owner shall not be liable for any
damages suffered by the Contractor by reason of the other contractor's failure to promptly comply with the directions so issued by the Owner, or by reason of another contractor's default in performance. F. If the Owner shall determine that the Contractor is failing to coordinate the Work with the work of other contractors as the Owner has directed: 1. the Owner shall have the right to withhold any payments due under the Contract until the Owner's directions are complied with by the Contractor; and 2. the Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from any and all claims or judgments for damages and from any costs or damages to which the Owner may be subjected or which the Owner may suffer or incur by reason of the Contractor's failure promptly to comply with the Owner's directions. G. Should the Contractor sustain any damage through any act or omission of any other contractor having a contract with the Owner or through any act or omission of any Subcontractor of said other contractor, the Contractor shall have no claim against the Owner for said damage. H. Should any other contractor having a Contract with the Owner sustain damage through any act or omission of the Contractor or its Subcontractor, the Contractor shall reimburse said other contractor for all said damages and shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from all said claims. ARTICLE 10 -- PROTECTION OF RIGHTS, PERSONS AND PROPERTY Section 10.01 - Accidents and Accident Prevention A. The Contractor shall at all times take reasonable precautions for the safety of persons engaged in the performance of the work. The Contractor shall comply fully with all applicable provisions of federal, state, and local law. The Contractor alone shall be responsible for the safety, efficiency and adequacy of the Contractor's Work, plant, appliances and methods, and for any damage which may result from the failure or the improper construction, maintenance, or operation of said Work, plant, appliances and methods. B. The Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of all cases of death, occupational
disease, and injury requiring medical attention or causing loss of time from work, arising out of or in the course of employment on Work under the Contract, and shall immediately notify the Owner in writing of any injury which results in hospitalization or death, or significant near miss incidents that had the potential to result in serious injury or death. The Contractor shall upload all completed Contractor and Subcontractor incident investigation forms and reports within five (5) working days of the incident. The report shall include the extent of damage or injury, the persons involved and their employers, the number of days persons are hospitalized, and any other pertinent information required by Cornell University. Such reporting shall be submitted on the e-Builder Accident Form.
17 Rev 12.2018
C. The Contractor shall provide to the Project Manager, Material Safety Data Sheets (OSHA Form 20 or the equivalent) for all chemicals to be used on site. All chemicals requiring any precautionary measures (eg. special storage or disposal requirements, personal protective equipment, or additional ventilation), shall be brought to the attention of Cornell University for
review and approval, prior to their use on site. 1. All chemicals brought on site by the Contractor shall be clearly labeled. The label shall state the identity of the chemical, any associated hazards, and the Contractor's name. 2. All Contractor employees who are using chemicals shall be made aware of the hazards associated with their use. Safe chemical handling procedures in accordance with OSHA or other governmental agencies, and manufacturer's recommendations shall be used at all times. 3. The Contractor shall dispose of all chemicals in accordance with EPA and Cornell University requirements, regardless of the size of the container or the quantity of waste, and must receive prior approval of Cornell University. 4. A Contractor’s Waste Material Disposal Plan form is required (with or without waste) to be submitted with submission of the first payment. The form can be found at: https://ehs.cornell.edu/sites/default/files/resource-files/FRM_CWMDPContractorWasteMaterialDisposalPlan.pdf D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the initiation, maintenance and supervision of safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. E. The Contractor shall, at all times, guard the Owner's property from injury or loss in connection with the Work. The Contractor shall, at all times, guard and protect the Contractor's Work. The Contractor shall replace or make good any said loss or injury unless said loss or injury is caused directly by the Owner. F. The Contractor shall have full responsibility to install, protect and maintain all materials and supplies in proper condition and forthwith repair, replace and make good any damage thereto until Final Acceptance. Section 10.02 - Adjoining Property A. The Contractor shall be required to protect all the adjoining property and to repair or replace any such properties damaged or destroyed by the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors thereof, by reason of, or as a result of activities under, for or related to the Contract.
Section 10.03 - Emergencies A. In case of an emergency which threatens loss or injury to persons or property, the Contractor will be allowed to act, without previous instructions from the Owner, in a diligent manner, to the extent required to avoid or limit such loss or injury, and the Contractor shall notify the Owner immediately thereafter of the action taken.
18 Rev 12.2018
Section 10.04 - Bonds A. Before commencing the performance of any work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner any required Bonds. The failure of the Contractor to supply
the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the Contract signing shall constitute a default. Section 10.05 - Risks Assumed by the Contractor A. Indemnification. The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and its trustees, officers, agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses, fines, and expenses, including reasonable attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the work including, but not limited to, bodily or personal injury, sickness, disease, death, or injury or damage to tangible property, to the extent they arise out of or result from: 1. any negligent act or omission, or intentional or willful misconduct, violation of law, or breach of this Contract by the Contractor, or any of its subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, or 2. any injury to an employee of the Contractor, its subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them. The indemnification obligation under this section shall not be limited by the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor under workers’ compensation, disability benefit or other employee benefit laws. B. In the event that Contractor is requested but refuses to honor its indemnification obligations hereunder, then the Contractor shall, in addition to all other obligations, pay the cost, including reasonable attorneys' fees, of bringing an action to enforce such indemnification obligations. C. Neither the Owner's final acceptance of the work to be performed hereunder nor the making of any payment shall release the Contractor from its obligations under this Section. The enumeration elsewhere in the Contract of particular risks assumed by the Contractor or of particular claims for which the Contractor is responsible shall not be deemed to limit the effect of the provisions of this Section or to imply that the Contractor assumes or is only responsible for risk or claims of the type enumerated. Section 10.06 - Contractor's Compensation and Liability Insurance A. The Contractor shall procure and maintain, at its own cost and expense, until final acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by this Contract, the following kinds of insurance:
1. Worker's Compensation Insurance. A policy complying with the requirements of the laws of the State of New York and any other laws that may be applicable thereto, including Coverage B - Employer's Liability with a limit of not less than $1,000,000.
19 Rev 12.2018
2. Contractor's Comprehensive General Liability Insurance. A standard comprehensive general liability insurance policy, with contractual, completed operations, explosion, collapse and underground property damage coverage’s issued to and covering the liability of the Contractor for all work and operations
under this Contract, all obligations assumed by the Contractor under this Contract and all damage to work performed by subcontractors on your behalf. The Contractor shall provide Broad Form Comprehensive General Liability Insurance, and the Owner shall be an additional insured in the policy. The policy shall include cross liability coverage and shall be endorsed to indicate that it is primary coverage. The completed operations coverage’s shall be maintained for not less than two years after acceptance of the work. The coverage under such policy shall be not less than a combined single limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage as follows, or such limits carried by the Contractor, whichever is greater: BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY (BROAD FORM) $ 5,000,000 Each Occurrence $ 5,000,000 Aggregate 3. Automobile Liability Insurance. A policy covering the use in connection with the work covered by the Contract Documents of all owned, non-owned and hired vehicles bearing, or, under the circumstances under which they are being used, required by the Motor Vehicle Laws of the State of New York to bear license plates. The coverage under such policy shall be not less than a combined single limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage of: BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY $ 1,000,000 Each Person $ 1,000,000 Each Accident B. In addition to maintaining all of the above insurances, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and its agents and employees from and against liability, including additional premium due because of the Contractor's failure to maintain coverage limits as required under this section. C. Insurance similar to that required of the Contractor shall be provided by or on behalf of all subcontractors to cover their own operations performed under this Contract. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any modifications in these insurance requirements as they apply to subcontractors.
20 Rev 12.2018
D. Before commencing the performance of any work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a current certificate or certificates, in duplicate, of the insurance required under the foregoing provisions including copies of subcontractor’s certificates. Such certificates shall be on a form prescribed by the Owner, shall list the various coverage’s and
shall contain, in addition to any provisions hereinbefore required, a provision that the policy shall not be changed or cancelled and that it will be automatically renewed upon expiration and continued in force until final acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by the Contract, unless the Owner is given thirty (30) days written notice to the contrary. Upon renewal of each of the Contractor's insurance coverage’s, the Owner shall be provided with a new certificate of insurance showing such renewal. Certificates and written notices shall be directed to the Office of Facilities Contracts. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a certified copy of each policy including any and all exclusions to such policy. E. If at any time any of the above required insurance policies should be cancelled, terminated or modified so that insurance is not in effect as above required, then, if the Owner shall so direct, the Contractor shall suspend performance of the work covered in the Contract. If the said work is so suspended, no extension of time shall be due on account thereof. The Owner may, at its option, obtain insurance affording coverage equal to that above required, at the Contractor's expense. Section 10.07 - Liability Insurance of the Owner A. The Owner, at its own cost and expense, shall procure and maintain such liability insurance as will, in its opinion, protect the Owner from its contingent liability to others for damages because of bodily injury, including death, and property damage which may arise from operations under this Contract.
21 Rev 12.2018
Section 10.08 - Owner's and Contractor's Responsibilities for Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Hazards A. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain in force a builders risk insurance
policy on the entire work. Such insurance shall be written on a completed value form and in an amount equal to the initial contract sum and modified by any subsequent modifications to the contract sum. The insurance shall name Cornell University and the State of New York, all subcontractors and sub- subcontractors. The insurance policy shall contain a provision that the insurance will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until the Contractor has given at least thirty (30) days prior written notice to Cornell University. The insurance shall cover the entire work at the site, including reasonable compensation for Architect’s services and expenses made necessary by an insured loss. Insured property shall include portions of the work located away from the site and in transit to the site. The policy shall cover the cost of removing debris and demolition as may be legally necessary. The policy shall cover any boiler or machinery loss which may be suffered during installation and until final acceptance. The insurance required shall be written to cover “all risk” of physical loss including a loss due to collapse. Any deductible shall be the responsibility of the Contractor but in no case shall the deductible be more than $10,000 unless Cornell University has agreed to a higher deductible. The Contractor shall provide to Cornell University a certificate of insurance and a summary of coverage’s including all endorsements and exclusions prior to commencement of the work. Once the policy is received, the Contractor shall provide a copy of such policy to Cornell University. There shall be a mutual waiver of recovery between Cornell University, the Contractor and all other parties to the extent such losses are covered by the builders risk policy. If Cornell University wishes to occupy the building prior to final acceptance and if the policy contains a provision which limits coverage for such partial occupancy, the parties agree work together to obtain consent of the insurance company for such partial occupancy or use under mutually acceptable terms. B. Losses, if any, under such insurance shall be payable to the Owner. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all loss of materials connected with the construction due to unexplainable disappearance, theft or misappropriation of any kind or nature. D. The foregoing provisions shall not operate to relieve the Contractor and subcontractors of responsibility for any loss or damage to their own or rented property or property of their employees, of whatever kind or nature, or on account of labor performed under the Contract incidental to the repair, replacement, salvage, or restoration of such items, including but not limited to tools, equipment, forms, scaffolding, and temporary structures, including their contents, regardless of ownership of such contents, except for such contents as are to be included in and remain a part of the permanent construction. The Owner shall in no event be liable for any loss or damage to any of the aforementioned items, or any other property of the Contractor, subcontractors
and the Architect, or employees, agents, or servants of same, which is not to be included in and remain a part of the permanent construction. The Contractor and subcontractors severally waive any rights of recovery they may have against the Owner and the Architect for damage or destruction of their own or rented property, or property of their employees of whatever kind or nature.
22 Rev 12.2018
Section 10.09 - Effect of Procurement of Insurance A. Neither the procurement nor the maintenance of any type of insurance by the Owner or the Contractor shall in any way be construed or be deemed to limit, discharge, waive or
release the Contractor from any of the obligations and risks imposed upon the Contractor by the Contract or to be a limitation on the nature or extent of such obligations and risks. Section 10.10 - No Third Party Rights A. Nothing in the Contract shall create or give to third parties; any claim or right of action against the Contractor, the Architect, and the Owner beyond such as may legally exist irrespective of the Contract. ARTICLE 11 -- USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER Section 11.01 – Substantial Completion A. The term "substantial completion" means the completion of the Work to the extent that Cornell University may have uninterrupted occupancy or use of the facility or specified portion thereof for the purpose for which intended. The Contractor shall obtain all certificates of occupancy required prior to occupancy, and any electrical, mechanical and plumbing certificates, or other certificates or required approvals and acceptances by City, County, and State governments or other authority having jurisdiction. Section 11.02 - Occupancy Prior to Acceptance A. If, before Final Acceptance, the Owner desires Beneficial Occupancy of the Work, or any part thereof, which is completed or partly completed, or to place or install therein equipment and furnishings, the Owner shall have the right to do so, and the Contractor shall in no way interfere with or object to said Beneficial Occupancy by the Owner. B. Said Beneficial Occupancy (1) shall not constitute acceptance of space, systems, materials or elements of the Work, nor shall said Beneficial Occupancy affect the start of any guarantee period, and (2) shall not affect the obligations of the Contractor for Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract or other obligations of the Contractor under the Contract. C. The Contractor shall continue the performance of the Work in a manner which shall not unreasonably interfere with said use, occupancy and operation by the Owner.
ARTICLE 12 -- PAYMENT Section 12.01 - Provision for Payment A. The Owner agrees to pay the Contract Price to the Contractor for the performance of this Contract and the fulfillment of all the Contractor's obligations. The Contract Price means all costs reimbursable under the Contract Documents.
23 Rev 12.2018
B. The final certificate of the Architect shall certify that the Contract has been completed within the stipulated time, and shall not be issued until all drawings and specifications have been returned to the Owner. The issuance of said certificates, however, or any payments made thereon shall not lessen the total responsibility of the Contractor to complete the work to the
satisfaction of the Owner in accordance with the Contract. C. Payments on the Contract Price shall be made each month as the work progresses in accord with the following procedure: 1. The Contractor's schedule of values, including quantities, aggregating the total Contract Price, divided so as to facilitate payments to subcontractors as specified herein, shall be the basis for monthly progress payments. This schedule, as shown in the E-Builder Schedule of Values Process, when approved by the Owner shall be used as a basis for progress payments. In applying for payments, the Contractor shall submit a statement based upon this approved schedule. 2. (a) On a date agreed upon by the Owner, Architect, and Contractor, a meeting shall be held by the Owner to review the work completed and materials on hand. This meeting shall review each item to be submitted by the Contractor in the requisition for payment. (b) On the first day of each month, or as soon thereafter as practicable, the Contractor shall submit via the E-Builder Payment Application Process, a statement and all applicable documentation setting forth in detail the cost of the work done and materials delivered to the job site up to and including the last day of the previous month and shall make application for payment of ninety percent (90%) of the amount of said statement, less the aggregate of all previous payments made by the Owner against the Contract Price. (c) Each statement and application shall be accompanied by an affidavit, executed by the Contractor, certifying that the statement is true and correct, and that all bills for labor, and materials incorporated in or delivered to the job, due and payable at the time of the preceding progress payment, have been paid. The Contractor shall attach a single .pdf file of certified payrolls for all employees on the project as indicated in the E-Builder Payment Application Process. Before final payment is made, the Contractor shall submit evidence that all payrolls, material bills and other indebtedness incurred in connection with the Contract have been paid, including final waivers of any liens. 3. Each such application for payment shall be subject to the review and
approval of the Architect. If the Architect finds that the affidavit and application for payment are acceptable and that all the above requirements in connection therewith have been complied with, the Architect shall, within seven (7) calendar days after receiving such application for payment, certify to the Owner that the payment applied for is due and payable to the Contractor.
24 Rev 12.2018
4. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment constitutes a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the date of the Application for Payment, that the work has progressed to the point indicated, that, to the best of their knowledge, information, and belief, the quality of the work is in accordance with the Contract
Documents and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. The Owner shall make payment in the manner provided in the Agreement within thirty (30) calendar days of receipt of the approved Certificate in E-Builder. Approval of the Payment Application by the Architect shall not be deemed to represent that the Architect has made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work or that the Architect has reviewed the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or proceedings or that the Architect has made any examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used the monies previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. Section 12.02 – Stored Materials & Equipment A. The Contractor may submit, no more than thirty (30) calendar days after contract approval and prior to the first application for payment, a written request to Cornell University for permission to invoice for critical materials and equipment ready, but not yet incorporated into the work. For the purpose of this paragraph, "critical materials and equipment" eligible for payment are defined as those items affecting project schedule or budget as determined by Cornell University's evaluation of the project schedule. This includes finished goods normally shipped to the job site in a condition ready for incorporation into the work that require significant time for delivery. Raw materials or work-in-process at a manufacturer's plant location shall not be eligible for such consideration unless the Contractor can demonstrate that Cornell University can save money by purchasing material in bulk quantities at the beginning of the project. B. Cornell University will be under no obligation to accept such requests. C. Payment authorized by Cornell University for such "long-lead" critical materials and equipment not yet incorporated in the work will be made provided the Contractor submits Exhibit H and complies with the following: 1. Items shall be listed in the “Total Materials Presently Stored” column on the Application for Payment. 2. Transfer of Title shall be executed and included in the Application for Payment.
3. The method used to store off-site items shall be described in the Contractor's request to invoice for such materials and equipment. Cornell University shall give prior approval of the location of off-site storage. Items requiring special environmental conditions to protect their integrity (temperature, humidity, etc.) shall be continuously stored in such an environment.
25 Rev 12.2018
4. Items in storage shall be identified as property of Cornell University, and a description of the identification method used shall be submitted in the Application for Payment. Contractor shall maintain all necessary insurance on items in storage.
5. A written and photographic inventory of items and method used to verify such inventory, including Contractor's certification that all quantities have been received in good condition at the job site or other location acceptable to Cornell University shall be submitted with the Application for Payment. 6. A copy of the vendor's invoice is included with the Contractor's invoice. Packing lists will not be accepted. D. Cornell University retains the right to verify storage by physical inspection prior to payment approval and at any time thereafter. Such payment shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for protecting, safeguarding, and properly installing the equipment or materials. The Warranty and Guarantee period shall not commence until installation and final acceptance of the completed work by Cornell University. The Contractor shall bear the cost of transporting materials stored off-site to the site E. Each subsequent invoice will restate the prior months' materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work and current month additions and deletions for materials and equipment incorporated into the Work. F. Upon the making of partial payment by Cornell University, all work, materials, and equipment covered thereby shall become the sole property of Cornell University. Partial payments, however, shall not constitute acceptance of the Contractor's work by Cornell University, nor be construed as a waiver of any right or claim by Cornell University. Section 12.03 – Retention A. Retention in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the value of the work done and materials furnished and installed under this Agreement shall be retained by the Owner as part security for the faithful performance of the Contractor’s work within the time specified, and shall be paid as indicated in Section 12.06. B. Cornell University in its sole discretion may, upon the Contractor's application thereof, release retention applicable to a subcontractor, provided that there are no outstanding claims associated with the subcontractor's work and the subcontractor and Contractor submit an acceptable partial or final release when submitting the payment application process. If the project is bonded, a Consent of Surety to the reduction must be attached as well.
26 Rev 12.2018
Section 12.04 - Withholding Payments A. The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or a part of any Certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect the
Owner from loss on account of: 1. Defective work not remedied. 2. To assure payment of just claims of any persons supplying labor or materials for the work and to discharge any lien filed against the Owner's property. 3. A reasonable doubt that the Contract can be completed for the balance of the Contract Price then unpaid. 4. Damage to another Contractor. 5. Unsatisfactory prosecution of the work by the Contractor. 6. Failure to provide and maintain an acceptable Critical Path Method Network Schedule. Section 12.05 – Documents and Conditions Precedent to Final Payment A. As-Built Documentation 1. Prior to acceptance by the Owner of all work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner through the Architect one (1) set of current reproducible full-size Contract Drawings on which the Contractor has recorded in a neat and workmanlike manner all instances where actual field construction differs from work as indicated on the Contract Drawings. B. Final Documentation: 1. Prior to final payment, and before the issuance of a final certificate for payment in accordance with the provisions of these General Conditions, file the following documents with the Owner. a. Warranties, Bonds, Service & Maintenance Contracts and any other extended guarantees stated in the technical sections of the Specifications.
b. Release or Waiver of Lien for the Contractor and Sub-Contractors in accordance with Exhibit C, attached hereto. c. Project Record Documents as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 39. d. Notification that Final Punch List work has been completed. e. Manufacturers Instruction and Maintenance Manuals as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 23.
27 Rev 12.2018
f. Fixed Equipment Inventory as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 22.
2. The Contractor shall also provide a CD containing scanned .pdf format and/or Word Documents of all documentation. Section 12.06 - Final Payment and Release A. When the Contractor determines that the work or a designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare for submission to the Owner a list of items to be completed or corrected. This list, prepared by the Contractor, shall constitute a complete detailed list of defects and deficiencies which, when remedied, will complete all Contract requirements. The submittal shall be accompanied by a statement to that effect. B. The failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all work in accordance with the Contract Documents. When the Architect, on the basis of an inspection, determines that the work is substantially complete, the Architect will then prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion. C. Upon receipt of written notice that the work is ready for final inspection and acceptance, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the work acceptable under the provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contract fully performed, and if bonds have been required, the written Consent of the Surety to the payment of the balance due, and a satisfactory Release of Lien, attached hereto as Exhibit "C" and made a part of the Contract Documents, has been submitted by the Contractor, each subcontractor and sub-subcontractor, the Contractor will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment, stating that to the best of their knowledge, information, and belief, and on the basis of their observations and inspections the work has been completed in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, and that the entire balance is due and payable. D. All prior certificates upon which progress payments may have been made, being estimates, shall be subject to correction to the final certificate. E. The acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment aforesaid shall constitute a general release of the Owner and its agents or representatives from all claims and liability to the Contractor. ARTICLE 13 -- TAX EXEMPTION
Section 13.01 - Tax Exemption A. The Owner is exempt from payment of Federal, State and local taxes, including sales and compensating use taxes on all materials and supplies incorporated into the completed Work. These taxes are not to be included in bids. This exemption does not apply to tools, machinery, equipment or other property leased by or to the Contractor or a Subcontractor, or to supplies and materials which, even though they are consumed, are not incorporated into the completed Work, and the Contractor and Subcontractors shall be responsible for and pay any and all applicable taxes, including sales and compensating use taxes, on said leased tools, machinery, equipment or other property and upon all said unincorporated supplies and materials.
28 Rev 12.2018
B. The Contractor and Subcontractor shall obtain any and all necessary certificates or other documentation from the appropriate governmental agency or agencies, and use said certificates or other documentation as required by law, rule or regulation.
ARTICLE 14 -- GUARANTEE Section 14.01 - Guarantee A. The Contractor, at the convenience of the Owner, shall remove, replace and/or repair at their own costs and expense any defects in workmanship, materials, ratings, capacities or characteristics occurring in or to the work covered by Contract for the period of one (1) year or within such longer period as may otherwise be provided in the Contract, the period of such guarantee to commence with the Owner's final acceptance of all work covered under the Contract, and the Contractor, upon demand, shall pay for all damage to all other work resulting from such defects and all expenses necessary to remove, replace and/or repair such work which may be damaged in removing, replacing or repairing the said defects. Acceptance means final acceptance of the entire work, early partial occupancy notwithstanding B. In some instances the nature of the work may require the Owner to accept various components, equipment, spaces or phase of the project. In such cases the Contractor shall submit a separate guarantee for the Owner's acceptance on the form attached hereto as Exhibit "E". Upon completion of the project, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner a guarantee for the project on the form attached hereto as Exhibit "E". ARTICLE 15 -- STANDARD PROVISIONS Section 15.01 - Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted Each and every provision of law or clause required by law to be inserted in the Contract and made a part hereof, shall be deemed to be inserted herein and, in the event any such provision is not inserted or is not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, this Contract shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion or correction. Section 15.02 - Laws Governing the Contract The Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of New York, without reference to conflict of law principles. Any and all proceedings relating to the subject matter hereof shall be maintained in New York State Supreme Court, Tompkins County or the federal district court for
the Northern District of New York, which courts shall have exclusive jurisdiction for such purposes. Section 15.03 - Assignments The Contractor shall not assign the Contract in whole or in part without prior written consent of the Owner.
29 Rev 12.2018
Section 15.04 - No Third Party Rights Nothing in the Contract shall create or shall give to third parties any claim or right of action against the Owner, beyond such rights as may legally exist irrespective of the Contract.
Section 15.05 - Waiver of Rights of Owner A. None of the provisions of the Contract will be considered waived by the Owner except when such waiver is given in writing. Section 15.06 - Limitation on Actions No action or proceeding shall be filed or shall be maintained by the Contractor against the Owner unless said action shall be commenced within six (6) months after receipt by the Owner of the Contractor's final requisition or, if the Contract is terminated by the Owner, unless said action is commenced within six (6) months after the date of said termination. Section 15.07 - Owner's Representative The Owner shall designate a representative authorized to act in its behalf with respect to the Project. The Owner or its representative shall examine documents and shall render approvals and decisions pertaining thereto promptly, to avoid unreasonable delay in the progress of the Contractor's work. Only directives from Cornell University’s designated representative (Debra Melanson) shall be recognized by the Contractor. ARTICLE 16 – MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISES Section 16.01 – Definitions The terms "Minority-owned business enterprise" ("MBE") or “Women-owned business enterprise” (“WBE”) or “minority group member” shall have the same meaning as under Section 310 of the New York State Executive Law, as the same may be from time to time amended. Section 16.02 – Participation by Minority and Women Business Enterprises A. The Contractor shall, in addition to any other nondiscrimination provision of the Contract and at no additional cost to Owner, fully comply and cooperate with the Owner in the implementation of MBE and WBE goals. These requirements include equal employment opportunities for minority group members and women (“EEO”) and contracting opportunities for certified minority and women-owned business enterprises (“MWBEs”). The Contractor’s
demonstration of “good faith efforts” shall be a part of these requirements. These provisions shall be deemed supplementary to, and not in lieu of, the nondiscrimination provisions required by New York State or other applicable federal, state or local laws. B. The Contractor shall include the provisions of this Article in each and every Agreement and/or Contract in such a manner that the provisions of this Article will be binding upon each subcontractor and supplier as to work in connection with and related to this Agreement.
30 Rev 12.2018
C. For purposes of this procurement, the Owner has established goals as outlined in the Bid Proposal Certification Form for Minority-Owned Business Enterprises (“MBE”) and Women-Owned Business Enterprises (“WBE”) participation. 1. The goal for Minority-Owned Business Enterprise participation shall be applied as follows: a maximum of one third (1/3) of the goal may be
applied to purchases of materials, supplies, and equipment from MBEs. 2. The goal for Women-Owned Business Enterprise participation shall be applied as follows: a maximum of one third (1/3) of the goal may be applied to purchases of materials, supplies, and equipment from WBEs. D. For purposes of providing meaningful participation by MWBEs on the Contract and achieving the Contract Goals established in paragraph C above, the Contractor should reference the Directory of New York State Certified MWBEs found at the following internet address: http://www.esd.ny.gov/mwbe.html.
E. Where MWBE goals have been established herein, the Contractor must document “good faith efforts” to provide meaningful participation by MWBEs as sub-contractors or suppliers in the performance of the Contract.
F. Where it appears that a Contractor is unable to comply with the MWBE participation requirements, Contractor may submit in writing for the Owner’s consideration, the reasons for Contractor’s inability to meet any or all of the participation requirements together with an explanation of the efforts taken by the Contractor to obtain the stated MWBE participation.
Section 16.03 MWBE Utilization Plan A. The Contractor shall submit a MBE/WBE Utilization Plan for the Owner’s review prior within fifteen (15) calendar days after receipt of a Letter of Intent or Notice to Proceed. B. The Contractor shall use such Owner approved MBE/WBE Utilization Plan for the performance of MWBEs on the Contract pursuant to the prescribed MWBE goals established in
Article 16 hereof. The Contractor shall designate a Compliance Officer in their organization who shall be responsible for implementing the MBE/WBE Utilization Plan of the Contractor and its subcontractors. Said Compliance Officer shall make such periodic, but not less than monthly, reports on the Plans' progress and on the number of women and minority workers employed. These reports shall be submitted to the Owner Representative on the Affirmative Action Workforce Report attached hereto as Exhibit "D".
Section 16.04 Reports and Records A. The following forms, attached hereto as Exhibit "D" and made a part of the Contract Documents, are to be used in submitting MBE/WBE Utilization Plans. Electronic
versions are available in the E-Builder Resources Project or at https://fcs.cornell.edu/project-contractors-and-consultants. 1. MWBE Utilization Plan 2. Affirmative Action Workforce Report
31 Rev 12.2018
B. The Contractor shall demonstrate compliance with these goals by submission of the Affirmative Action Workforce Report on a monthly basis, or as requested by Owner. The Contractor shall provide a single monthly report inclusive of all subcontractor information for the project labor and such report must document the progress made towards achievement of the MWBE
goals of the Contract. Such forms shall be uploaded monthly to E-Builder. C. The Contractor shall permit access to its books, records and accounts by the Owner for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with the provisions of this Article. The Contractor shall include this provision in every subcontract so that such provision will be binding upon each subcontractor.
ARTICLE 17 -- ACCOUNTINGS, INSPECTION AND AUDIT The Contractor agrees to keep books and records showing the actual costs incurred for the Work. Such books and records (including, without limitation, any electronic data processing files used by the Contractor in analyzing and recording the Work) shall be open for inspection and audit by the Owner and its authorized representatives at reasonable hours at the Contractor's local office or at the Owner's office, if necessary, and shall be retained by the Contractor for a period of seven years after the Work has been completed, except that if any litigation, claim or audit is started before the expiration date of the seven year period, the records shall be retained until all litigation, claims or audit findings involving the records have been resolved.. Each Sub-Contractor shall be similarly obligated to maintain, for inspection and audit by the Owner, books and records respecting the Work. If requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish copies of any and all subcontracts, purchase orders and/or requisitions of any nature associated with the project. ARTICLE 18 – CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION At project completion the Owner shall schedule a meeting to review with the Contractor their performance for the project unless performance warrants additional reviews. The Owner may schedule a meeting at fifty percent (50% completion) based on project complexity and/or duration. The Owner shall present its review based on the attached “Contractor Performance Evaluation”, Exhibit I. The Contractor shall be given the opportunity to provide input as to the findings of the evaluation after completion by the Owner. ARTICLE 19 -- ROYALTIES AND PATENTS The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees and shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patents, and shall save Cornell University harmless from loss on account thereof; except that Cornell University shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular process or product is specified by Cornell University unless the Contractor shall have reason to believe that the particular process or product infringes a patent, in which event it shall be responsible for loss on account thereof unless it promptly provides such information to Cornell University.
32 Rev 12.2018
ARTICLE 20 -- CONFIDENTIALITY AND USE OF OWNER'S NAME Section 20.01 - Release of Information
The Contractor shall not divulge information concerning the Work (including news releases, social media, internal house organizations, applications for permits, etc.) to anyone without Cornell University's prior written approval, except to subcontractors and suppliers to the extent that they need such information to perform their work. The Contractor shall require a similar agreement from each such subcontractor and supplier, requiring their compliance with the foregoing. Cornell University reserves the right to release all information, as well as to time its release and specify its form and content. The Contractor may obtain Cornell University's approval to release information by submitting such request to the Cornell University Project Manager. Section 20.02 - Confidential Information The term "Confidential Information" means all unpublished information obtained or received from Cornell University during the term of this Contract which relates to Cornell University's research, development, manufacturing and business affairs. The Contractor shall not disclose confidential information to any person, except to its employees and subcontractors to the extent that they require it in the performance of their Work, during the term of this Contract and until authorized by Cornell University in writing. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall hold all confidential information in trust and confidence for Cornell University, and shall use confidential information only for the purpose of this Contract. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall require all of their employees to whom confidential information is revealed to comply with these provisions. The Contractor shall have an agreement with each subcontractor, requiring their compliance with the foregoing. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to defend in case of litigation related to its services rendered, permission shall be sought from Cornell University, who shall not unreasonably withhold such permission, before any disclosures are made. This Section does not apply to information which (1) is or becomes known in public domain or (2) is learned by the Contractor from third parties. Section 20.03 - Use of Owner's Name The Contractor shall not use, in its external, advertising, marketing program, social media, or other promotional efforts, any date, pictures, or other representation of the Owner except on the specific written authorization in advance of the Owner's Representative.
33 Rev 12.2018
ARTICLE 21 -- CORNELL UNIVERSITY STANDARDS OF ETHICAL CONDUCT Cornell University expects all executive officers, trustees, faculty, staff, student employees, and others, when acting on behalf of the university, to maintain the highest standard of
ethical conduct as per Cornell University's Policy 4.6 - Standards of Ethical Conduct, a copy of which is available at https://fcs.cornell.edu/project-contractors-and-consultants This includes treating equally all persons and firms currently doing business with or seeking to do business with or for Cornell University, whether as contractors, subcontractors, or suppliers. Such persons and firms are respectfully reminded that Cornell University employees and their families may not personally benefit from Cornell University's business relationships by the acceptance of gifts or gratuities, defined as a gift in excess of $75.00 given to a Cornell employee for personal use. Items not considered gifts/gratuities include occasional business meals, items of an advertising nature, and items that are generally distributed to all potential customers. In addition, it is expected that the Contractor's officers and employees shall conduct all business related to this Contract within the highest ethical standards, observing applicable policies, practices, regulations, law, and professional standards. All parties are expected to report violations of this policy to appropriate university personnel. You may file a report to on the web https://secure.ethicspoint.com/domain/en/report_custom.asp?clientid=6357 or contact Cornell University through EthicsPoint by dialing toll-free 1-866-293-3077.
EXHIBIT "A"
CORNELL UNIVERSITY Construction Contract Change Order Forms Instructions to Change Order Documentation
Cornell University has several standard forms related to Changes in the Work. These forms have been prepared to comply with contract requirements related to Changes in the Work. The standard Construction Contract Change Order Request and Change Order Summary Forms shall be used to facilitate preparation of change order requests in conformity with construction contract requirements. These forms shall be used by the Contractor and by all Subcontractors in preparing their respective cost estimates for services associated with the Changed Work for the Owner’s consideration and
shall include all associated back-up documentation supporting the request.
Direct Cost of the Work: 1. Direct Labor – Include the “wages paid” hourly direct labor and/or foreman necessary to perform the required change. “Wages paid” is the burdened labor rate documented in accordance with Section 2.14 – Project Labor Rates of the General Conditions. “Assigned Personnel or Work Crews” should be stated by trade or type of work performed not by name of person or company title. For example carpenter, mason, backhoe operator, etc. Supervisory personnel in district or home office shall not be included. Supervisory personnel on the job-site, but with broad supervisory responsibility and paid as salaried personnel, shall not be included as Direct Labor 2. Direct Material – Include the acquisition cost of all materials directly required to perform the required change. Examples of “Unit of Measure” include square feet, cubic yards, linear feet, days, gallons, etc. 3. Equipment – Include the rental cost of equipment items necessary to perform the change. For company-owned equipment items, include documentation of internal rental rates. Charges for small tools, and craft specific tools are not allowed. Bond Premiums The Contractor’s actual documented bond premium rate as entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields at time of bid shall be added to all direct and indirect costs of the proposed change. Overhead & Profit
The Contractor’s overhead & profit rate shall be added to all direct and indirect costs of the proposed change in accordance with the Contract.
EXHIBIT "A"
EXHIBIT "A"
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER SUMMARY
DATE:
PCO #
PROJECT TITLE:CONTRACT NO.
CONTRACTOR:
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
1 DIRECT COST OF WORK:
NAME OF CONTRACTOR/SUBCONTRACTORS TO TAL
PERFORMING WORK COST
TOTAL COST OF PROPOSED CHANGE ORDER ITEM $0
TOTAL CONTRACT DAYS ADDED/DELETED FROM PROJECT SCHEDULE
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
FINAL RELEASE EXHIBIT "B"
FINAL WAIVER OF CLAIMS AND LIENS AND RELEASE OF RIGHTS
Sworn to before me this Corporation or Business Name Day of 20 By: Title:
Date Contract Date
Project Contract Price
Address Net Extras and Deductions
City Adjusted Contract Price
County Amount Previously Paid
State Balance Due - Final Payment
The undersigned hereby acknowledges that the above Balance Due when paid represents payment in full for all labor, materials, etc., furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier in connection with its work on the above Project in accordance with the Contract.
In consideration of the amounts and sums previously received, and the payment of $ being the full and Final Payment amount due, the below named Contractor or Supplier does hereby waive and release the Owner from any and all claims and liens and rights of liens upon the premises described above, and upon improvements now or hereafter thereon, and upon the monies or other considerations due or to become due from the Owner or from any other person, firm or corporation, said claims, liens and rights of liens being on account of labor, services, materials, fixtures or apparatus heretofore furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier to the Project. The premises as to which said claims and liens are hereby released are identified as follows: . The undersigned further represents and warrants that he/she is duly authorized and empowered to sign and execute this waiver on his/her own behalf and on behalf of the company or business for which he/she is signing; that it has properly performed all work and furnished all materials of the specified quality per plans and specifications and in a good and workmanlike manner, fully and completely; that it has paid for all the labor, materials, equipment and services that it has used or supplied, that it has no other outstanding and unpaid applications, invoices, retentions, holdbacks, expenses employed in the prosecution of work, chargebacks or unbilled work or materials against the Owner as of the date of the aforementioned last and final payment application; and that any materials which have been supplied or incorporated into the above premises were either taken from its fully-paid or open stock or were fully paid for and supplied on the last and final payment application or invoice. The undersigned further agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner for any losses or expenses (including without limitation reasonable attorneys' fees) should any such claim, lien or right of lien be asserted by the below named Contractor or Supplier or by any of its or their laborers, material persons or subcontractors. In addition, for and in consideration of the amounts and sums received, the below named Contractor or Supplier hereby waives, releases and relinquishes any and all claims, rights or causes of action in equity or law whatsoever arising out of through or under the above mentioned Contract and the performance of work pursuant thereto. The below named Contractor or Supplier further guarantees that all portions of the work furnished and installed are in accordance with the Contract and that the terms of the Contract with respect to this guarantee will remain in effect for the period specified in said Contract.
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
EXHIBIT "C"
GUARANTEE
Date:
In accordance with plans and specifications and the terms and conditions of our contract with Cornell
University dated , we hereby guarantee
the as found in the specifications
for , Ithaca, New York to be free (Project Title)
from defects in materials and workmanship for the period of year(s) from
, the date of acceptance by the Owner. (Date) (COMPANY) By: Title:
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
EXHIBIT "D" – FORM I
1
MWBE Utilization Plan
– Submit Part I and Part II within 15 days after Letter of Intent or Notice to Proceed –
– Submit Part III Quarterly and at end of project –
PART I – PROJECT INFORMATION e-Builder Project No. Project Name: Contract Value:
Contractor Name and Address:
Primary Contact Name, Phone Number, Email: Bid Date:
% Goals MBE: 2.9% WBE: 2.7% Contractor’s MWBE Contact Name, Phone Number, Email:
PART II – MWBE LIST (Update as MWBE firms come under contract, sign and date, resubmit) Subcontractor Name, Address, Contact, Email, MBE or WBE
(List your firm if also MBE or WBE)
Federal ID Number Dollar Value of Contract or Purchase Order
Description of Work or Supplies Subcontractor or Supplier Start and End Dates
(Update totals as MWBE firms are added/subtracted to above list) Print Name of Principal or Officer: Title:
Signature: Date:
MWBE Contract Percentages Summary %
MBE Totals
WBE Totals
EXHIBIT "D" – FORM I
2
MWBE Utilization Plan
– Submit Part I and Part II within 15 days after Letter of Intent or Notice to Proceed –
– Submit Part III Quarterly and at end of project –
PART III – Quarterly Utilization Report (Subcontractors & Sub-subcontractors fill this out and submit to General Contractor to compile into a single form.) Double click on table to edit. Month/Year:
General Contractor, Subcontractor, Sub-
Subcontractor, or Vendor Trade
Dollar Value of
SubContract or
Purchase Order
MBE,
WBE, or
N/A
% of Total
Contract
TOTALS 0 0
EXHIBIT "D" - FORM II
SUMMARY OF BID ACTIVITY WITH MBE AND WBE SUBCONTRACTORS AND VENDORS
Please print or type all information, except where a signature is required. PROJECT:
Name of Prime Contract Bidder:
Address (Street, City, State and Zip Code):
Contact Person (Name, Title and Telephone Number):
MBE and WBE Subcontractor/Vendor Item/ Bid Submitted: Award Status Date of (Indicate which) Trade Date Amount Date Amount Elimination
EXPLANATION OF ELIMINATION: Include meetings held for negotiation, etc. (Use additional sheet if necessary)
OFFICER OF FIRM:
Name and Title: Date:
Signature:
EXHIBIT "D" - FORM III
EXHIBIT "E"
LABOR RATE BREAKDOWN
PROJECT TITLE:CONTRACT NO.
CONTRACTOR:TRADE:
EFFECTIVE DATE:
EXPIRATION DATE:
Base Hourly Rate:$
Payroll Taxes and Insurance % per Hour
F.I.C.A.
Federal Unemployment (Base on 1500 hours of work)
State Unemployment (Base on 1500 hours of work)
*Worker's Compensation
*Bodity Injury & Property Damage
Disability
TOTAL %
Payroll Taxes and Insurance Rates: Base Rate (x) Total % =$
*
Supplemental Benefits $ per Hour
Vacation
Health & Welfare
Pension
Annuity
Education / Training
Industry
Total Hourly Fringe Benefits $
Hourly Labor Rate: Base Rate, Taxes/Insurance and Fringe Benefits $
Adjustment for a composite rate which includes apprentices:$
CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION
Signature of Authorized Representative:
Print Name:
Print Title:
I certify that the labor rates, insurance enumerations, labor fringe enumerations and expenses are correct and in accordance
with actual and true cost incurred.
Rates are net Contractor cost after premium discounts and experience
modifications have been applied against manual rate.
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
EXHIBIT "F”
STORED MATERIALS INVOICING
DOCUMENTATION
PROJECT TITLE:
CONTRACT NO.
CONTRACTOR:SUBCONTRACTOR:
REASON FOR REQUEST:
APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT NO. __________DATE:
1 Material Identification
Description:
Quantity:
Provide Specific Location of Materials Stored:
2 Material Value
Attach an Invoice or Quantified Statement of Value.$
3 Certificate of Insurance
Attach a Certificate of Insurance for the above specified materials. Certificate shall name
"Cornell University" as a loss payee with respect to the specified materials.
4 Transfer of Title
The Contractor hereby agrees to transfer complete ownership of all listed materials to Cornell University at the
time payment is made to Contractor for the above referenced Application for Payment. The Contractor remains
responsible for all contractual requirements for the above listed materials including complete installation and
providing of all warranties.
Signed:
Date:
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
EXHIBIT "G"
Contractor Performance
Evaluation
Project Information
Project Name:____________________________________________Date Of Evaluation___________________
Project Number___________________________Evaluators;
Project Team_____________________________
Campus_________________________________
Project Start Date_________________________Substantial Completion________________
Contractor______________________________________________Prequalification Status_________________
Original Contract Amount__________________________________Total Change Order Amount_____________
Contractor Project Manager___________________________________________Initial Evaluation_____
Contractor Superintendent____________________________________________Final Evaluation_____
Type Of Contract
Prime Contractor___Subcontractor___Construction Manager___
Project Comments/Description
Performance Evaluation
Please give one rating for each category. Add comments as required to justify your rating.
Fails to Achieve Needs Fully AchieveFreq ExceedsCons Exceed
Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation
1 2 3 4 5
1 Quality of Workmanship
Rate this contractor's performance in regards to quality of work
a. Compliance with project drawings and specifications
b. Workmanship quality and accuracyc. Tools- quality and sufficient quantity
d. Equipment - sufficient quantity and operating condition
e. Quality of jobsite craft personnel
Comments:
2 Scheduling/Productivity
Rate this contractor's performance with regard to producing and
meeting contract schedules and milestones
a. Project schedule quality and completenessb. Controlling of project schedule
c. Manpower allocation for maintaining schedule
d. Material deliveries to support project schedulee. Ability to meet substantial completion date and project milestones
f. Productivity of work force
g. Ability to deal with added work and unforeseen issues.
Comments:
3 Subcontractor Management
Rate this contractor's ability, effort and success in managing and coordinating
subcontractors(if no subcontractors rate overall management performance)
Comments:
3A Major subcontractor performance(score not added in final Contractor Evaluation
For contractor information only
a. Plumbing Contractor overall Performance
Comments:
b. HVAC Contractor overall Performance
Comments:
c. Electrical Contractor overall Performance
Comments:
Fails to Achieve Needs Fully AchieveFreq ExceedsCons Exceed
Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation
1 2 3 4 5
4 MBE/WBE Participation
Rate this contractor's MBE/WBE solicitation effort and participation for this
project for, Project Team, Subcontractors, Material Vendors
Comments:
5 Safety
Rate this contractor's performance in regards to project safetya. Timely submission of site specific safety program
b. Knowledge of OSHA standards
c. Implementation of safety rules and regulationsd. Promotion and creation of safety awareness
e. Daily overall housekeeping
f. Safety record
g. Response to safety concerns
h. Awareness of public safety
Comments:
6 Contract Administration
Rate this contractor's performance in regards to contract
administration as per criteria below
a. Timely submission of complet and correct
documentation required for insurance and bond
b. Change order processing
c. Timely submission of RFI's, Shop Drawings,
and change orders
d. Subcontractor payments made promptlye. Timely submission of complete and correct payment
applications
f. Quality of paperwork
Comments:
7 Working Relationships
Rate this contractor's working relationships with other parties
(Cornell, Design Team, subcontractors,ect.)
Comments:
Fails to Achieve Needs Fully AchieveFreq ExceedsCons Exceed
Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation
1 2 3 4 5
8 Supervisory Personnel Rating
Rate the overall performance of this contractor's on site supervisory
personnel and project management staff
Comments:
9 Contract Close-Out
Rate this contractor's overall ability to efficiently close out the project
a. Timely completion of all punchlist items
b. Timely resolution of all outstanding change orders
c. Timely submission of all close out documents(O&M's,
As-Builts, warranties, final releases and consent of surety)
d. Quality of close out documentation and timely completion
of any outstanding audit questionsComments:
Summary Sheet
Project:___________________________________________
Contractor:________________________________________
Rating Per Weight
Performance Categories Category %Scoring
1 Quality of Workmanship 0 15.00%0
2 Scheduling 0 10.00%0
3 Subcontractor Management 0 10.00%0
4 MBE/WBE Participation 0 10.00%0
5 Safety 0 10.00%0
6 Contract Administration 0 10.00%0
7 Working Relationships 0 10.00%0
8 On Site Supervisory Personnel Rating 0 18.00%0
9 Contract Close Out 0 7.00%0
Over All Rating 0
Rating Reference
Fails to achieve expectation 1
Needs improvement 2
Fully achieves expectation 3
Frequently exceeds expectation 4
Consistently exceeds expectatio 5
OWNER COMMENTS:
OWNER COMMENTS on 3A Ratings:
CONTRACTOR COMMENTS:
(To be completed by Contractor prior to Owner/Contractor discussion meeting)
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS TO THE CONTRACT PATHOGENS CONTAGIONS COVID-19
SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS
PROTOCOLS AND SAFETY REQUISITES TO CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY APPLICABLE
TO PATHOGENS, CONTAGIONS AND/OR COVID-19 VIRUS
In response to the public health emergency for the COVID-19, requirements, recommendations and
guidelines from civil authorities including, but not limited to, New York State Executive Orders, CDC,
OSHA and New York State Department of Health (herein after referred to as “COVID-19 Authorities and
Guidelines”) surrounding health and safety measures designed to eliminate or reduce the transmission of
the COVID-19 virus, these Supplemental Conditions are provided for guidance for construction related
work. Contractors and businesses are further required to comple with applicable “COVID-19 Authorities
and Guidelines” mandatory directives and health and safety practices issued.
1.0 These Supplemental Conditions apply to the current COVID-19 pandemic, but may also apply to
any existing or future pathogen or contagion impacting construction activity and necessitating
protective health and safety measures for worker safety, the general public, and any personnel
connected to the advancement of Work on this, or any applicable project.
1.1 The purpose of this document is to set forth recommended elements and practices to
safeguard the public and all persons connected to each project for Cornell University.
1.2 The direction from “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines” are applicable to businesses,
entities, and services, and they must comply with the most recent direction. Contractor
obligations include modification of all their existing protocols and practices as necessary
to adhere to the most current modifications to “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines”.
2.0 Contractor’s responsibilities under the Contract with Owner as provided in the General Conditions
and General Requirements are unchanged. Nothing contained herein shall alter or modify the
Contractor’s exclusive control over the job site, subcontractors, project labor, Health & Safety
Plans, Protocols, Measures, or the Contractor’s exclusive control over the methods and means
associated with any and all of the foregoing elements.
2.1 Cornell University possesses neither control nor any right of control over the job site,
project labor, health & safety practices or programs, or methods and means of advancing
the Contracted Work.
2.2 These Supplemental Conditions are provided to the Contractor for the attainment of
Contractor’s fully compliant health and safety measures and practices communicated by
applicable civil authorities as requirements, recommendations, and/or guidance necessary
to engage in qualifying construction activities.
2.3 Contractor’s responsibilities under the Contract with Owner as provided in the General
Conditions and General Requirements shall remain and include, but not limited to:
2.3.1 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers are required at all times to guard
the safety and health of all persons on and in the vicinity of the work site
2
2.3.2 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers are required to comply with all
applicable rules, regulations, codes, and bulletins of the New York State
Department of Labor and the standards imposed under the Federal Occupational
Safety and Health Act of 1970, as amended (“OSHA”) and New York State
Executive Orders
2.3.3 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers are also required to comply with
all applicable job site safety requirements
2.3.4 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers must comply with all County,
City or State of New York safety requirements for projects within the City or State
of New York constructed in accordance with the applicable Building Code, and
contractors are required to provide written Safety Plans for the site demonstrating
how all applicable safety requirements are to be implemented for all elements of
the Work for the duration of the contract.
3.0 Contractors, their subcontractors and suppliers, and workers are required to adhere to “COVID-19
Authorities and Guidelines” to prevent or limit the possible exposure or spread of COVID-19,
pathogens, or contagions (as applicable).
3.1 To that end, Contractor shall develop a written Health & Safety Plan related to the
protective measures and protocols Contractor shall employ on the Project in response to
“COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines” necessary to manage and mitigate the exposure
or transmission of COVID-19, pathogens, or contagions (as applicable).
3.2 This Plan shall be submitted to the Owner prior to start of Construction Activity on the
Campus. Owner’s receipt of the subject Plan is to document that measures and practices
are in place, not for substantive review or approval.
3.3 Health and safety practices constitute a continuing compliance obligation, Contractors and
their subcontractors and suppliers must remain current with, and immediately implement
updated health and safety protocols and practices as they are published. The Campus may
request updated elements of the Contractor’s written safety plan to address evolving best
practices for measures and/or practices of the “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines”.
3.4 The Contractor must notify Cornell immediately upon discovery of any employees of their
firm, or subcontractors, or suppliers that are, or have been working on the Cornell Campus
that have been confirmed to have COVID-19 contagion.
4.0 Guidance & General Recommendations for Inclusion in the Plan:
4.1 Information for local health departments can be found at www.health.ny.gov
4.2 OSHA Guidance on Preparing Workplaces for COVID-19 can be found at
www.osha.gov/Publications/OSHA3990.pdf
4.3 Comply with all OSHA requirements in accordance with the Hazard Communication
(Global Harmonization) Standard at https://coronavirus.health.ny.gov/home
4.4 Centers for Disease Control -- https://www.cdc.gov/coronavirus/2019-ncov/index.html
3
5.0 Project Closure:
5.1 Where work is suspended on a project, contractors are directed to follow any additional
project shut-down protocols as provided by the Owner. Including, but not limited to,
photographs, securing the work site and project status narrative.
6.0 Contractor expressly agrees to fully comply and remain exclusively responsible for the
implementation of applicable Contractor Health and Safety Protocols and Measures as set forth in
applicable and then current Guidance for Construction Activities. Express Contractor agreement to
the foregoing and Contractor submission of the Plan are conditions precedent to engage in any on-
site construction activity.
MARCH 22, 2021
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR THE CORNELL STORE EMERGENCY POWER
& EMERGENCY LIGHTING REPLACEMENT CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK
MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK ....................................................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS ........................................................... 2 1.3 CONTRACT MILESTONES ............................................................................... 2
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 2
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 2
SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS ..................................................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .................................................................................. 1 1.2 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES ................................................................ 1 1.3 UNIVERSITY CLOSURES ................................................................................. 2
1.4 WATER USE RESTRICTION ............................................................................ 2
1.5 PARKING .............................................................................................................. 2
1.6 CHANGEOVERS AND CONTINUITY OF SERVICES ................................. 3 1.7 OBSTACLES, INTERFERENCE AND COORDINATION............................. 4 1.8 EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENTS ..................................................................... 4 1.9 EXISTING EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, FIXTURES, ETC. ......................... 5
1.10 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES, DRAWINGS, ETC. .................................... 5
1.11 STAND DOWN DATES ...................................................................................... 6 1.12 WORKING HOURS ............................................................................................. 7
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 7
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 7
SECTION 01 23 00 ALTERNATES ....................................................................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .................................................................................. 1 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS .............................................................. 1
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 1
3.0 EXECUTION.................................................................................................................... 1
3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES ........................................................................ 1
MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS .............................. 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................... 1
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................... 2 1.4 PRODUCTS LIST ................................................................................................. 2 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................... 2
1.6 PROCEDURES ..................................................................................................... 3
1.7 EQUIVALENTS – APPROVED EQUAL .......................................................... 3 1.8 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS .............................................................................. 4 1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS ................................................................................................ 6 1.10 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS ............................................................................. 7
1.11 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION ............................................................ 8
1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES ...................................................................................... 8
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 8
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 8
SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS ........................................................................ 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING ................................................................... 1 1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS ..................................................................................... 3 1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE(S)........................................................ 4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 4
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 4
SECTION 01 31 50 ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT .................................. 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 SUMMARY ........................................................................................................... 1 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ........................................................................................ 1
1.3 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................... 1
1.4 PROCEDURES ..................................................................................................... 1 1.5 PROCESS OVERVIEW ....................................................................................... 2 1.6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ........................................................................ 4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 4
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 4
MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE ......................................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 SUMMARY ........................................................................................................... 1
1.2 FORM OF SCHEDULES ..................................................................................... 1
1.3 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES ............................................................................. 1 1.4 PROGRESS REVISIONS .................................................................................... 2 1.5 SUBMISSIONS ..................................................................................................... 3
2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED ............................................................................................. 3
3.0 EXECUTION.................................................................................................................... 3
3.1 DISTRIBUTION ................................................................................................... 3
SECTION 01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION ......................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS ...................................................................................................... 1
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 1
3.0 EXECUTION.................................................................................................................... 1
3.1 EXISTING CONDITION PHOTOGRAPHS...................................................... 1 3.2 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS ............................................................................ 1
3.3 FINAL COMPLETION PHOTOGRAPHS ......................................................... 2
SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ............................................................ 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 SUBMITTAL REGISTRY AND SCHEDULE .................................................. 1
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS .............................................................................................. 3 1.4 PRODUCT DATA ................................................................................................ 3 1.5 SAMPLES.............................................................................................................. 4 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS ...... 5
1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS ......................................................................... 6
1.8 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES .............................................................. 9
1.9 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES .......................................................................... 10 1.10 RECORD SUBMITTALS .................................................................................. 12 1.11 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS............................................................... 12 1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES .................................................................................... 12
1.13 DISTRIBUTION ................................................................................................. 13
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED........................................................................................... 13
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ........................................................................................ 13
MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 35 29 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY...................................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 CONTRACTOR’S PROJECT SITE SPECIFIC PLAN ..................................... 1
1.3 ASBESTOS ........................................................................................................... 2 1.4 LEAD ..................................................................................................................... 3 1.5 SITE VISITS.......................................................................................................... 3
1.6 CONFINED SPACE ............................................................................................. 3
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 3
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 3
SECTION 01 35 43 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS .................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ........................................................................................ 1 1.3 SUBMITTALS ...................................................................................................... 1 1.4 JOB SITE ADMINISTRATION .......................................................................... 1 1.5 CLEARING, SITE PREPARATION AND SITE USE ...................................... 2
1.6 SPOIL AND BORROW ....................................................................................... 2
1.7 NOISE AND VIBRATION .................................................................................. 2
1.8 DUST CONTROL ................................................................................................. 3 1.9 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT ....................................................... 3 1.10 TEMPORARY RE-ROUTING OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK .................... 4 1.11 HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC MATERIALS ......................................................... 4
1.12 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL AND TITLE ......................................... 5
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 5
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 5
SECTION 01 35 44 SPILL CONTROL ................................................................................. 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 SPILL PREVENTION .......................................................................................... 1
1.2 SPILL CONTROL PROCEDURES .................................................................... 1 1.3 SPILL REPORTING AND DOCUMENTATION ............................................. 4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 5
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 5
MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS .................................................. 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 PERMITS AND LICENSES ................................................................................ 1
1.2 INSPECTIONS ...................................................................................................... 1
1.3 COMPLIANCE ..................................................................................................... 1 1.4 OWNER’S REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................ 2
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 2
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 2
SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES ....................................................................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ........................................................ 1 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS .................................................................................. 2
1.3 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................... 2
1.4 OWNER AGREEMENTS .................................................................................... 4 1.5 INDUSTRY STANDARDS ................................................................................. 4 1.6 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS ............................................................ 5
2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED ........................................................................................... 17
3.0 EXECUTION - NOT USED ......................................................................................... 17
SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL.......................................................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1 1.2 CONTROL OF ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION .................................................... 1
1.3 CONTROL OF OFF-SITE OPERATIONS ........................................................ 2
1.4 TESTING ............................................................................................................... 3
1.5 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE ......................................................................... 3
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 3
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 3
MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ............................ 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES ....................................... 1
2.0 PRODUCTS ...................................................................................................................... 1
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL ................................................................................... 1 2.2 TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES........................................................... 1 2.3 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION.................................................................. 2
2.4 CONSTRUCTION AIDS ..................................................................................... 4
2.5 SUPPORTS ............................................................................................................ 4 2.6 TEMPORARY WATER CONTROL .................................................................. 4 2.7 TREE, PLANT AND LAWN PROTECTION .................................................... 4
2.8 PERSONNEL, PUBLIC AND EMPLOYEE PROTECTION ........................... 8
2.9 ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING AREAS ..................................................... 8 2.10 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS ..................................................... 8 2.11 SECURITY ............................................................................................................ 8 2.12 FIELD OFFICES ................................................................................................... 8
3.0 EXECUTION.................................................................................................................... 9
3.1 PREPARATION.................................................................................................... 9 3.2 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 9 3.3 REMOVAL ............................................................................................................ 9
SECTION 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES ................................................................. 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES ....................................... 1
2.0 PRODUCTS ...................................................................................................................... 1
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL ................................................................................... 1
2.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY, LIGHTING AND WATER ........................... 1
2.3 TEMPORARY USE OF ELEVATOR ................................................................ 2
2.4 TEMPORARY CONTRACTOR TELEPHONE SERVICE .............................. 3 2.5 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES ......................................................... 3
3.0 EXECUTION.................................................................................................................... 3
3.1 REMOVAL ............................................................................................................ 3
MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 66 00 STORAGE AND PROTECTION........................................................ 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING .......................................................... 1
1.3 ON-SITE STORAGE ............................................................................................ 1 1.4 CAMPUS SITE / PALM ROAD STORAGE ..................................................... 2 1.5 PROTECTION ...................................................................................................... 3
1.6 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ......................................................... 4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 4
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 4
SECTION 01 71 23 FIELD ENGINEERING ....................................................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 QUALIFICATION OF SURVEYOR .................................................................. 1 1.3 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS ....................................................................... 1 1.4 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS ............................................................ 2 1.5 RECORDS ............................................................................................................. 2
1.6 SUBMITTALS ...................................................................................................... 2
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 3
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 3
SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING .................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS ...................................................................................................... 2
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................... 2 1.4 WARRANTIES ..................................................................................................... 4
2.0 PRODUCTS ...................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................ 4
3.0 EXECUTION.................................................................................................................... 4
3.1 INSPECTION ........................................................................................................ 4 3.2 PREPARATION.................................................................................................... 5 3.3 PERFORMANCE.................................................................................................. 5
3.4 CLEANING ........................................................................................................... 7
MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 77 00 PROJECT CLOSEOUT ....................................................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 INSPECTIONS ...................................................................................................... 1
1.2 SUBMITTALS ...................................................................................................... 2
1.3 FINAL CLEAN UP ............................................................................................... 3 1.4 MAINTENANCE STOCK ................................................................................... 4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 5
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 5
SECTION 01 78 22 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY ................................................. 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY.................................................................. 1
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 3
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 3
SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA .................................. 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1 1.2 FORM OF SUBMITTALS ................................................................................... 1
1.3 CONTENT OF MANUAL ................................................................................... 2
1.4 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES............................................... 3 1.5 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS .............................................. 4 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................... 6 1.7 INSTRUCTIONS OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL ............................................... 6
1.8 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS.......................................................................... 7
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 7
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 7
SECTION 01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS ............................................................. 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 SUMMARY ........................................................................................................... 1
1.3 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................... 1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................... 2 1.5 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................... 2 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................... 3
1.7 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED ................................................................................ 4
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 4
3.0 EXECUTION.................................................................................................................... 4
3.1 FORM OF SUBMITTALS ................................................................................... 4
3.2 TIME OF SUBMITTALS..................................................................................... 5
MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 78 39 RECORD DOCUMENTS ..................................................................... 1
1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES................................... 1
1.3 RECORDING ........................................................................................................ 1 1.4 SUBMITTAL ........................................................................................................ 6
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 6
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 6
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 11 00 Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE WORK
CORNELL STORE EM POWER SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-1 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work to be Done
1. Provide a 480V Generator feeder from the Olin Hall Generator Power Distribution System to the Cornell Store. Work includes the installation of a new load bank at the Olin Hall Generator.
2. Provide both life safety and optional standby electrical distribution at the Cornell Store including 208V closed-transition transfer switches and panelboards. Select 120V refrigeration equipment will also be refed from the optional standby power system.
3. Select luminaires will be refed from the life safety system and become permanent emergency egress lighting. Exit signs will be replaced and refed from the life safety power distribution system. This includes the extension of the Barnes Hall emergency circuits to the Cornell Store life safety power distribution.
B. The Scope of the Work
1. The scope of the WORK in all SECTIONS of this Specification shall consist of the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment and appliances and the performance of the Work required by the Contract Documents and/or by the conditions at the site, joining all parts of this Work with itself and the Work of others to form a complete, functioning entity.
2. Items not specifically mentioned in the Specifications or shown on the drawings, but which are inherently necessary to make a complete working installation, shall be included.
3. It is the intent and purpose of the Contract Documents to cover and include under each item all materials, machinery, apparatus, and labor necessary to properly install materials and equipment, adjust and put into perfect operation the respective portions of the installation specified and to so interconnect the various items or sections of the work as to form a complete and operating whole. Any equipment, apparatus, machinery, material and small items not mentioned in detail, and labor not hereinafter specifically mentioned, which may be found necessary to complete or perfect any
portion of the installation in a substantial manner, and in compliance with the requirements stated, implied, or intended in the Contract Documents, shall be furnished without extra cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall provide the greatest quantity, highest quality, highest degree of safety, and most stringent material, equipment or Work. Should the Drawings or the Specifications disagree in themselves or with each other, the Contractor shall provide the better quality or greater quantity of work and/or materials unless otherwise directed by written addendum to the Contract.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 11 00 Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE WORK
CORNELL STORE EM POWER SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-2 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
1.2 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS
A. The Contractor shall cooperate with other contracts performing related work, including providing labor, materials and other costs necessary to satisfactorily coordinate the Contract work with work performed under others contracts.
B. Concurrent:
1. Contractor will be required to coordinate installation of the underground feeder from the Cornell Store to the Olin Hall generator with the Olin Hall Roof Replacement and Envelope Renewal project, which is scheduled to occur about the same time as the Cornell Store Emergency Power & Emergency Lighting project.
1.3 CONTRACT MILESTONES
A. Installation of the underground feeder from the Cornell Store to the Olin Hall generator is the first phase of work that will need to be completed within 3-5 days from start of work.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 11 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-1 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
A. All traffic and pedestrian control measures shall be compliant with the National Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD) and 17 NYCRR Chapter V (New York Supplement), (https://www.dot.ny.gov/mutcd) and all other local laws and regulations.
B. The Contractor shall carry on the Work in the manner which will cause the least interruption to pedestrian and vehicular traffic and permit access of emergency vehicles at all times.
C. The Work shall be scheduled and performed in such a manner that at least one lane of traffic will be maintained on all public streets. Two flag persons, equipped with radio communication devices, must be provided for any activity blocking a traffic lane. One lane of traffic must be maintained at all times. Where traffic must cross open trenches, the Contractor shall provide suitable bridges and railings; including pedestrian bridges.
D. The Contractor shall maintain 20’ minimum fire lane access to all facilities in the area.
E. The Contractor shall post and maintain flag persons and suitable signs indicating that construction operations are under way and other warning signs as may be required.
F. The Contractor shall safeguard the use by the public and Owner of all adjacent highways, roadways and footpaths, outside the Contract Limit Lines (work area), and shall conform to all laws and regulations concerning the use thereof, especially limitations on traffic and the movement of heavy equipment. Access to the site for delivery of construction materials and/or equipment shall be made only at the locations shown in the Contract Documents or approved by the Owner’s Representative.
G. The Contractor shall make every effort to keep dirt and debris from making its way to roadways. The Contractor shall immediately remove dirt and debris which may collect on permanent roadways due to the Work.
H. The Contractor shall limit the extent of its activities to that area of the site defined on the Contract Drawings as being within the Contract Limit Lines.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-2 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
I. For that portion of the Work required under this Contract which must be performed in other than the defined areas both on-site and off, including operations involving delivery and removal of materials, the Contractor shall schedule and coordinate its activities through the Owner's Representative, to meet the approval of the Owner and minimize disruption of the
normal scheduled activities of the occupants of adjacent spaces.
J. It is the Owner’s expectation that the Contractor will take protective measures to minimize damage caused by construction activities including, but not limited to, the use of personnel
lifts, material handling equipment, on-site material storage, etc. All portions of the site, including the staging area and those areas affected by the work, shall be returned to their original condition after completion of Work. Such repair work shall include lawn restoration and reseeding, if required, and shall be included in the Contractor's Guarantee of Work.
K. Routes to and from the location of the Work shall be as indicated in the Contract or as directed by the Owner's Representative. Temporary roadways shall be closed only with prior approval of the Owner's Representative.
L. Parking may be made available for staging at Palm Road or other pre-determined area for the duration of the project. The Contractor will be responsible for fencing, securing and maintaining the designated area. All vehicles at Palm Road must be registered with Transportation Services. Due to ongoing work at the Palm Road lot, parking may be limited.
1.3 UNIVERSITY CLOSURES
A. In the event of University closure, the Contractor should use their judgement, follow their internal guidance on continuity of operations, and the direction of law enforcement, as to whether or not they will maintain operations on construction sites on campus. They should make this decision with the awareness that Cornell response to any project needs (shutdowns, emergencies) will not possible and the maintenance of roads and walks will not be to normal operating standards.
B. With your safety as a top priority, the Cornell University Police allows you the ability to take advantage of our Emergency Mass Notification System that enables your cellphone to become a personal safety device for you. Contractor’s wishing to participate may text the following: CornellAlert to 67283 and you will be set up to receive alert messages. Be advised that you may stop receiving messages at any time by sending “stop” to CornellAlert. There will also be a system generated “stop” every year on August 1st at which point you will need to send the text CornellAlert to re-enlist.
1.4 WATER USE RESTRICTION
A. The Contractor shall adhere to any University issued Water Use Restrictions in place at the time of construction.
1.5 PARKING
A. The Owner may designate an area for parking of essential Contractor vehicles near the project site.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-3 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
B. The Contractor shall make all arrangements, and bear the cost, for transportation of all trade persons from the designated parking area to the construction site as necessary.
C. It should be noted that there is a fee for all parking on the Cornell University campus. The Contractor is responsible for the payment for all parking costs imposed by the Owner. The Contractor should contact the Project Manager (Debra Melanson) for additional information. The Contractor will be required to complete a “New Construction Employee Form” for each permit requested. This form may be found at
http://finance.fs.cornell.edu/contracts/forms/contractors.cfm.
D. Contractor shall cooperate with Transportation Services and/or other authorities having jurisdiction, as follows:
1. Ensure parking by all employees of the Contractor, subcontractors, material suppliers, and others connected with this project only within construction fence or the designated parking area.
2. Prohibit employees from parking in any other areas, roads, streets, grounds, etc.
3. Discharge any employee refusing to comply with these requirements.
4. Ensure proper transportation of personnel between the designated parking area and the construction site.
E. The Contractor shall remove from the parking area and staging area all temporary trailers, rubbish, unused materials, and other materials belonging to the Contractor or used under the Contractor’s direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance of the property and shall restore such areas affected by the work to their original condition, and, in the event of its failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at the expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor shall be liable therefore.
1.6 CHANGEOVERS AND CONTINUITY OF SERVICES
A. Make all changeovers, tie-ins and removals, etc., of any part of the Work that would affect the continuity of operation of the adjacent services at approved times that will not interfere with the Owner's operations. Secure approval of Owner before proceeding.
B. Make all necessary temporary connections required to permit operation of the building services and/or equipment. Remove the connections after need has ceased.
C. The Contractor may be permitted to make changeovers during normal working hours at the Owner’s discretion. Should the Contractor perform this Work outside of normal working hours, no extra payment will be made for resulting overtime expenses.
D. When connecting new facilities do not shut off any existing Mechanical/Electrical facilities or services without prior written approval of Owner's Representative.
E. The Contractor shall not, except in an emergency condition, shutdown any utility without the express permission of the Owner's Representative. Major, affecting life safety or outside contract limit lines, shutdowns of utilities will be performed by Cornell University to enable Contractor to perform required work. Major shutdowns shall be defined as those affecting life safety or which are outside the project site limits.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-4 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
F. Maintain domestic water and firewater in service at all times. No service may be out for more than twenty-four (24) hours. Maintain firewater flow capability (hose, if necessary) to all buildings and coordinate with Cornell Utilities, Cornell Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S), and City of Ithaca Fire Department.
G. All shutdowns to be scheduled a minimum of seven (7) calendar days in advance and requests shall be submitted via ePM system to the Owner’s Representative.
H. IN THE EVENT OF AN EMERGENCY WHERE THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE IS NOT AVAILABLE, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DIAL 911 IMMEDIATELY.
1.7 OBSTACLES, INTERFERENCE AND COORDINATION
A. General
1. Plans show general design arrangement. Install work substantially as indicated and verify exact location and elevations; DO NOT SCALE PLANS.
2. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevations, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in the Work, equipment
locations, etc., after notification to the Owner's Representative and Architect. Obtain approval from same, as part of Contract, to accommodate work to obstacles and interferences encountered.
3. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing. If requested, submit drawings, detailing all such deviations or changes.
4. Exposed to view mechanical units, ductwork, conduit, pipes or other building equipment are essential parts of the artistic effect of the building design and shall be installed in locations as shown on the drawings. Conformance to given dimensions and alignments with the structural system, walls, openings, indicated centerlines are a requirement of the Contract and the Contractor shall familiarize himself with the critical nature of proper placement of these items. The Contractor shall notify the Architect of conflicts which would cause such equipment to be installed in locations other than as indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall not proceed with the installation of exposed to view mechanical units, ductwork, conduit, pipes, etc. until all conflicts have
been identified by the Contractor and resolutions to conflicts approved by the Architect.
B. Interference
1. Install work so that all items are operable and serviceable and avoid interfering with removal of rails, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors, etc. Provide easy and safe access to valves, controllers, motor starters and other equipment requiring frequent attention.
1.8 EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENTS
A. Since all equipment of equal capacity is not necessarily of same arrangement, size of construction, these Plans are prepared on basis of one manufacturer as "basis-of-design equipment", even though other manufacturers' names are mentioned.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-5 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
B. If Contractor elects to use specified equipment other than "design equipment" which differs in arrangement, size, etc., the Contractor does so subject to following conditions:
1. Submit detailed drawings indicating proposed installations of equipment and showing maintenance and service space required.
2. If revised arrangement meets approval, make all required changes in the work of all trades, including but not limited to louvers, panels, structural supports, pads, etc. at no increase in Contract. Provide larger motors and any additional control devices, valves, fittings and other miscellaneous equipment required for proper operation of revised layout, and assumes responsibility for proper location of roughing in and connections by other trades.
3. If revised arrangement does not meet approval because of increase in pressure loss, possibility of increase in noise, lack of space or headroom, insufficient clearance for removal of parts, or for any other reason, provide equipment which conforms to Contract Drawings and Specifications.
1.9 EXISTING EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, FIXTURES, ETC.
A. Where existing equipment, piping, fittings, etc. are to be removed, Contractor shall submit complete list to Owner. All items that Owner wishes to retain shall be carefully removed and salvaged and delivered to building storage where directed by Owner. Items that Owner does not wish to retain shall be removed from the site and legally disposed.
1.10 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES, DRAWINGS, ETC.
A. Before Submitting Proposal
1. Examine all Drawings and Specifications relating to Work of all trades to determine scope and relation to other work.
2. Examine all existing conditions affecting compliance with Plans and Specifications, by visiting site and/or building.
3. Ascertain access to site, available storage and delivery facilities.
B. Before Commencing Work on Any Phase or in any Area
1. Verify all governing dimensions at site and/or building.
2. Inspect all adjacent work.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-6 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
C. All work is to be conducted in such a manner as to cause a minimum degree of interference with the Campus’ operation and academic schedule. Prior to the commencement of each phase, submit Shutdown / Demo action plans that clearly describe the steps required to safely shut down utilities, systems and infrastructure that are within the work area (or effecting the
work area); and those outside the work area and within approximately 25 feet of the work area limits, as approved by the Owner. The Shutdown / Demo action plan shall identify the shut off point(s) for each utility, system and infrastructure as well as the secondary shut off point(s) to account if the primary points fail or are otherwise inaccessible. To identify shutoff points, trace each utility, system and infrastructure in the presence of the campus representative from the work area to the shutoff points and place clear label on same indicating what the shutoff point is and what it effects and whether it is the primary or secondary shut off. The Shutdown / Demo action plan shall describe the shutdown procedure, identify tools and material required for shutdown, sequence of activities required for proper shutdown, the name of the person(s) or trade(s) deemed competent to perform each activity in the shutdown sequence and names and telephone numbers of the campus staff required to provide access to shut off points, assist in the shut off or perform portions of the shutdown activities. Additionally, the plan will address the Contractor’s plan for maintaining MEP to adjacent occupied areas, inclusive of planned tie-in points for any and all necessary, temporary infrastructure, alarming, monitoring etc. Submit the Shutdown / Demo action plan for review and approval at least two weeks prior to field work in the work area. Field work shall not begin until the Shutdown / Demo action plan is reviewed. Contractor is to assign and include a competent crew, knowledgeable of each unique system involved (i.e. Mechanic, Electrician, Sheet metal, Plumber, Controls, IT, etc.). Field investigation is to include any and all necessary ladders, scaffold, temp lighting, cutting tools, photos, labels, PPE, etc. needed to properly locate, access and label shut off points. The University is explicitly requesting heightened awareness and an earnest mitigation of impact. Tender of Proposal Confirms Agreement
1. All items and conditions referred to herein and/or indicated on accompanying Drawings.
2. No consideration, additional monies or time extensions will be granted for alleged misunderstanding.
D. Existing or Archived Drawings
1. Existing or Archived drawings of impacted buildings are appended in electronic format only for reference and informational purposes. These historic drawings are not to be considered contract drawings and are provided “FOR INFORMATION ONLY”. The Owner makes no representation as to the accuracy of the drawings as representing current conditions.
1.11 STAND DOWN DATES
A. Strict and effective enforcement by Contractor’s management and supervision of the following dates and hours is required.
1. Stand-Down Dates (No construction work and no deliveries on site):
a. Commencement: TBD
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-7 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
2. Restricted Work Dates (delivery & demolition restrictions, all work to be contained to the fenced area of the project site):
a. Student and Campus Life:
Residence Halls Open August 20, 2021 (date may change depending on Cornell’s Academic Calendar).
No deliveries, no hauling materials into or out of the project site.
3. Courses Study Time & Final Exams: * See below. While future dates are unknown at this point, the Contractor shall assume these general timeframes for the duration of the project.
Study period: May 15-17, 2021; Final Exams: May 18-25, 2021
1.12 WORKING HOURS
A. Normal work hours are 7AM-dusk Monday-Saturday except during above noted restrictions. This means that Contractor shall not permit any noise generating activities that could disturb campus occupants or residents to take place outside of these hours. Should any conditions necessitate work to extend beyond these hours – Contractor may submit a detailed request with reasonable advance notice to Cornell. Cornell (at its sole discretion) may issue a written relaxation of the above but Contractor is advised never to assume that it will be granted.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 14 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 23 00 Ithaca, New York ALTERNATES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER ALTERNATES 01 23 00-1 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 23 00 ALTERNATES
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. This Section describes the changes to be made under each Alternative.
B. The Specification Section containing the pertinent requirements of materials and methods to achieve the Work described herein.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS
A. Definition: An alternate is an amount proposed by Bidders and stated on the Bid Proposal Submission Form and in the eBuilder Bid Module for certain items that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the product, materials, equipment, systems or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. Alternates shall include all overhead, profit and other expenses, including bond costs, in connection therewith.
B. Coordination: Coordinate related Work and modify or adjust adjacent Work as necessary to ensure that Work affected by each accepted alternate is complete and fully integrated into the Project.
C. Notification: Immediately following Contract award, prepare and distribute to each party involved, notification of the status of each alternate. Indicate whether alternates have been accepted, rejected or deferred for consideration at a later date. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates.
D. Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included at the end of this Section. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects or similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the alternate.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. ALTERNATE NO. 1
Replace the HID High-Bay Luminaires with LED High-Bay Luminaires on the First Floor. Drawing E-102, Keyed Note No 3.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 23 00 Ithaca, New York ALTERNATES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER ALTERNATES 01 23 00-2 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
B. ALTERNATE NO. 2
Provide a duplex receptacle and branch circuit from the optional standby power system to the existing Telecom Room 209H, UPS. Drawing E-103, Keyed Note No. 19. ***END OF SECTION 01 23 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-1 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT PRODUCT OPTIONS MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the products specified, under the options and conditions for substitutions stated in this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions that are beyond the Contractor’s control, such as unavailability of product, or regulatory changes.
a. Products that are not available from Contractor’s preferred suppliers does not constitute unavailability of product.
2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.
B. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Items salvaged from other projects are not considered new products. Items that are manufactured or fabricated to include recycled content materials are considered new products, unless indicated otherwise.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-2 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT PRODUCT OPTIONS MARCH 22, 2021
C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other
characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Submit indicated number of copies of each Substitution Request Form, attached hereto, for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. In addition to submission of Substitution Request Form, substitutions shall be listed on the Bid Proposal Submission Form with description, specification references, and corresponding change in base bid
1.4 PRODUCTS LIST
A. Within thirty (30) days after the award of Contract, submit to the Architect five copies of a complete list of products which are proposed for installation.
B. Tabulate the products by listing under each specification section title and number.
C. For products specified only by reference standards, list for each such product:
1. Name and address of the manufacturer.
2. Trade name.
3. Model or catalog designation.
4. Manufacturer's data:
a. Reference standards.
b. Performance test data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.
B. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
1. Contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with other products and construction methods.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-3 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT PRODUCT OPTIONS MARCH 22, 2021
2. If a dispute or compatibility issue arises over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.
1.6 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of accepted substitutions and approved comparable products.
1.7 EQUIVALENTS – APPROVED EQUAL
A. Equivalents or Approvals - General
1. The words “similar and equal to”, or “or equal”, “equivalent” and such other words of similar content and meaning shall for the purposes of this Contract be deemed to mean similar or equivalent to one of the named products. For the purposes of Paragraph A and B of this Section 1.4 and for the purposes of Bidding Documents, the word “products” shall be deemed to include the words “articles”, “materials”, “items”, “equipment” and “methods”. Whenever in the Contract documents one or more products are specified, the words “similar and equal to” shall be deemed inserted.
2. Whenever any product is specified in the Contract documents by a reference to the name, trade name, make or catalog number of any manufacturer or supplier, the intent is not to limit competition, but to establish a standard of quality which the Architect has determined is necessary for the Project. The Contractor may at its option use any product other than that specified in the Contract Documents provided the same is approved by the Architect in accordance with the procedures set forth in Paragraph B of this Section 1.4. In all cases the Architect shall be the sole judge as to whether a proposed product is to be approved and the Contractor shall have the burden of proving, at its own cost and expense, to the satisfaction of the Architect, that the proposed product is similar and equal to the named product. In making such determination the Architect may establish such objective and appearance criteria as it may deem proper that the proposed product must meet in order for it to be approved.
3. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall be construed as representing, expressly or implied, that the named product is available or that there is or there is not a product similar and equal to any of the named products and the Contractor shall have and make
no claim by reason of the availability or lack of availability of the named product or of a product similar and equal to any named product.
4. The Contractor shall have and make no claim for an extension of time or for damages by reason of the time taken by the Architect or by reason of the failure of the Architect to approve a product proposed by the Contractor.
5. Request for approval of proposed equivalents will be received by the Architect only from the Contractor.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-4 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT PRODUCT OPTIONS MARCH 22, 2021
B. Equivalents or Approvals After Bidding
1. Request for approval of proposed equivalents will be considered by the Architect after bidding only in the following cases: (a) the named product cannot be obtained by the Contractor because of strikes, lockouts, bankruptcies or discontinuance of manufacturer and the Contractor makes a written request to the Architect for consideration of the proposed equivalent within ten (10) calendar days of the date it ascertains it cannot obtain the named product; or (b) the proposed equivalent is superior, in the opinion of
the Architect, to the named product; or (c) the proposed equivalent, in the opinion of the Architect, is equal to the named product and its use is to the advantage of the Owner, e.g., the Owner receives an equitable credit, acceptable to it, as a result of the estimated cost savings to the Contractor from the use of the proposed equivalent or the Owner determines that the Contractor has not failed to act diligently in placing the necessary purchase orders and a savings in the time required for the completion of the construction of the Project should result from the use of the proposed equivalent; or (d) the proposed equivalent, in the opinion of the Architect, is equal to the named product and less than
ninety (90) calendar days have elapsed since the Notice of Award of the Contract.
2. Where the Architect pursuant to the provisions of this Section 1.4 approves a product proposed by the Contractor and such proposed product requires a revision or redesign
of any part of the work covered by this Contract, all such revision and redesign and all new Drawings and details required therefore shall be subject to approval of the Architect and shall be provided by the Contractor at its own cost and expense.
3. Where the Architect pursuant to the provisions of this Section approves a product proposed by the Contractor and such proposed product requires a different quantity and/or arrangement of duct work, piping, wiring, conduit or any other part of the work from that specified, detailed or indicated in the Contract Documents, the contractor shall provide the same at its own cost and expense.
1.8 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS
A. For products specified only by reference standard, select any product meeting that standard, by any manufacturer.
B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any one of products and manufacturers named.
1. Products:
a. Restricted List (Products): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Products” or that include the phrase “provide one of the following”, and include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
- Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-5 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT PRODUCT OPTIONS MARCH 22, 2021
b. Non-restricted List (Available Products): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Available Products” or that include the phrase “include, but are not limited to, the following”, and include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an
unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Restricted List (Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Manufacturers” or that include the phrase “provide products by one of the following”, and include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
- Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Non-restricted List (Available Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Available Manufacturers” or that include the phrase “include, but are not limited to, the following”, and include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.
3. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named.
a. Restricted List (List of Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Basis-of-Design Product”, and include a list of other manufacturers' names, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers that complies with requirements.
- Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.
- Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Non-restricted List (No List of Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Basis-of-Design Product”, and do not include a list of other manufacturers’ names, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by another manufacturer that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-6 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT PRODUCT OPTIONS MARCH 22, 2021
C. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers and stating "or equal", the Contractor shall submit a request as for substitutions, for any product or manufacturer not specifically named. Such substitution shall have been listed on Bid Proposal Submission Form as required in Instructions to Bidders. If not so listed, no substitution will
be allowed.
D. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, no option and no substitution will be considered unless listed on the Bid Proposal Submission Form as
provided in the Instructions to Bidders. Base Bid must include the specified product or manufacturer. Substitutions will be at the sole discretion of the Owner.
1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need
for change, but not later than 21 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.
B. Substitutions for Convenience: Submit requests for substitution within thirty (30) days of contract award.
C. Submit a separate request for each substitution. Support each request with:
1. Completed "Request for Substitution" form in eBuilder. A request for substitution of a product, material, or process for that specified in the Contract Documents must be formally submitted as such accompanied by evidence that the proposed substitution ﴾1﴿ is equal in quality and serviceability to the specified item; ﴾2﴿ will not entail changes in detail and construction of Other Work; ﴾3﴿ will be acceptable to the Architect and Owner's Design Consultant's in achieving design and artistic intent; and ﴾4﴿ will not result in a cost and/or schedule disadvantage.
2. Complete data substantiating compliance of the proposed substitution with requirements stated in Contract Documents:
a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address.
b. Manufacturer's literature; identify:
- Product description.
- Reference standards.
- Performance and test data.
c. Samples, as applicable.
d. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and the date of each installation.
3. An itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with the product specified listing any variations.
4. Data relating to any changes in the construction schedule.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-7 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT PRODUCT OPTIONS MARCH 22, 2021
5. The effect of the substitution on each separate contract of the Project.
6. List any changes required in other work or projects.
7. Designate any required license fees or royalties.
8. Designate availability of maintenance services, and source of replacement materials.
D. Substitutions shall not result in additions to the Contract Sum.
E. Substitutions will not be considered as having been accepted when:
1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without a formal request from the Contractor.
2. They are requested by a subcontractor or supplier.
3. The acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents.
F. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance of the Owner.
G. The Owner and the Architect shall be the sole judges of the acceptability of a proposed substitution.
1.10 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Conditions for Consideration: Contractor's request for approval of comparable product will be considered when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may reject or return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to other required submittals, to obtain approval of an
unnamed product or manufacturer:
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the
indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight,
size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the product specified.
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
5. Samples, if requested.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-8 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT PRODUCT OPTIONS MARCH 22, 2021
1.11 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION
A. In making a formal request for a substitution the Contractor represents that:
1. By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor thereby represents that he has determined and verified all dimensions, quantities, field dimensions, relations to existing work, coordination with work to be installed later, coordination with information on previous Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples and compliance with all the requirements of the Contract Documents. The accuracy of all such information is the responsibility of the Contractor.
2. The Contractor has personally investigated the proposed product and has determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified.
3. The Contractor will provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution as for the product specified.
4. The Contractor will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into the Work, and will make such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects.
5. The Contractor waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which may subsequently become apparent.
1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES
A. Review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness.
B. Transmit evaluations and recommendations to the Owner, so that the Owner can notify the Contractor of the decision for acceptance or rejection of the request for substitution.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 25 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-1 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Owner will schedule and administer pre-construction meeting, periodic progress meetings, and specially called meetings throughout the progress of the work.
1. Prepare agenda for meetings.
2. Distribute written notice of each meeting four days in advance of meeting date.
3. Make physical arrangements for meetings.
4. Preside at meetings.
5. Record the minutes; include all significant proceedings and decisions.
6. Duplicate and distribute copies of minutes after each meeting.
a. To all participants in the meeting.
b. To all parties affected by decisions made at the meeting.
c. To the Architect.
B. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors and suppliers attending the meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.
1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Schedule at least fifteen (15) days after date of Notice to Proceed.
B. Location: A central site, convenient for all parties.
C. Attendance:
1. Owner's Representative(s)
2. Contractor(s)
3. Architect and its professional consultants
4. Major Subcontractors
5. Major suppliers
6. Safety Representatives for the Owner and Contractor
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-2 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
D. Minimum Agendum:
1. Distribution and discussion of:
a. List of major subcontractors and suppliers
b. Projected Construction Schedules
2. Critical work sequencing
a. Identification of major shut downs and approximate schedule
3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities
4. Project Coordination
a. Designation of responsible personnel
5. Procedures and processing of:
a. Field decisions
b. Proposal requests
c. Submittals
d. Change Orders
e. Applications for Payment
f. Requests for Information
g. Daily Reports
6. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents
7. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents
8. Use of premises:
a. Office, work and storage areas
b. Owner's requirements
c. Job site personnel conduct
d. Building access and security
9. Temporary facilities, controls and construction aids
10. Temporary utilities
11. Safety and first-aid procedures
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-3 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
a. Contractor’s Project Site Specific Plan
12. Security procedures
13. Housekeeping procedures
14. Affirmative Action Plan and Reporting requirements
1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Schedule regular periodic meetings on the site, not less than once every two weeks throughout the Construction period.
B. Attendance:
1. Architect
2. Architect's professional consultants when, in the opinion of the Owner, needed
3. General Contractor, including Site Superintendent
4. Owner's Representatives
5. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda
6. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda
7. Safety Representative
C. Minimum Agenda:
1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting
2. Review percentage of work to be in place by next meeting by individual trades
3. Review of work progress since previous meeting
4. Field observations, problems, and conflicts
5. Problems which impede Construction Schedule
6. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules
7. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule
8. Revisions to Construction Schedule
9. Planned progress and schedule, during succeeding work period
10. Coordination of schedules
11. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required
12. Maintenance of quality standards
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-4 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
13. Review status of all issued proposal requests and change orders
14. Review proposed changes for:
a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date
b. Effect on other contracts of the Project
15. Other business
D. All decisions, instructions, and interpretations given by the Architect/Engineer or its representative at these meetings shall be binding and conclusive on the Contractor.
1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE(S)
A. The Contractor to hold pre-installation conferences where required by individual specification sections or others at the discretion of the Owner. Minimum attendees would be Architect and/or their specific sub-consultant, Owner, Contractor, Subcontractor, key Suppliers, testing & inspection firm, Facilities Engineering subject matter expert, etc. Minimum agenda would include review of key submittals, RFI’s, safety, logistics, material procurement, quality control, etc. Contractor to assemble and distribute the Agenda minimum 48 hours prior to meeting as well as distribute meeting minutes a minimum of seven (7) calendar days after the meeting.
B. Submit a list of pre-installation meetings with preliminary dates within fifteen (15) days of issuance of the Notice to Proceed.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
****END OF SECTION 01 31 19***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT
CORNELL STORE EM POWER ELECTRONIC PROJECT 01 31 50-1 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MANAGEMENT (ePM) SYSTEM MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 31 50 ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
B. Owner Provided System: The Contractor will utilize the Owner’s electronic Project Management (e-PM) system eBuilder on this project.
1. The Owner shall manage the day to day use of the Owner provided ePM system and organize the training, support and maintenance of the ePM Website System for the entire project team for the period of its use on the Project.
C. There are no fees to utilize this system.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions Article 9 – Coordination and Cooperation.
B. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ePM: defined as an internet-based information and project communication system that allows the entire project team to collaborate in a centralized and secured repository. All project-specific correspondence, workflow processes, and documentation will be stored and routed within the ePM system.
1.4 PROCEDURES
A. Users will be provided a username and password. The Contractor shall log into the e-PM system to enter the Project Documentation listed in section 2.0. All correspondence should be communicated through the e-PM system.
B. Training
1. The Owner will hold training sessions to familiarize team members with the system, and all Contractor staff are expected to attend one of these sessions or otherwise receive proper training on the system’s use. All cost for personnel time and travel to attend the training as needed shall be included in the Contractor’s proposal.
C. The Contractor shall provide on-site personnel with personal computer(s) and personal computer equipment that will allow the Contractor’s personnel to access and use the ePM Website System in a timely and efficient manner. At a minimum the Contractor is to provide the following equipment and software:
1. Web Browser: with high-speed connection, up/downloading capability.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT
CORNELL STORE EM POWER ELECTRONIC PROJECT 01 31 50-2 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MANAGEMENT (ePM) SYSTEM MARCH 22, 2021
2. Color printer and plotter capable of full-size document production.
3. Scanner: capable of scanning a high volume of project documents clearly and quickly.
4. Digital Camera: (1) single lens reflex (SLR) type camera.
5. Portable Document Format (PDF) Reader/writer software.
D. Contractor shall log on to the ePM Website System on a daily basis, and as necessary to be kept fully appraised of the project developments, correspondence, assigned tasks and other matters that occur on the site. These may include but are not limited to RFI’s, action items, meeting minutes, discussion threads, schedule updates, submittals, submittal log, punch list items, daily reports, site photos and/or videos and pre-
construction surveys.
1.5 PROCESS OVERVIEW
A. The Contractor is required to timely and accurately post, review, respond, and collaborate with other team members using the following features and/or workflow processes within
the ePM system.
B. Project Team Directory – Contractor shall provide an updated directory of contact information for all companies, subcontractors and project team members who are engaged on this project.
C. Request for Information (RFI): All project RFI’s will be submitted using the ePM Website System. The submission of a Request for Information (RFI) is the Contractor’s exclusive means of requesting information from the Owner and/or Architect. Attachments to RFI’s (which may include sketches, photographs, documentation, and the like, will be uploaded to the ePM Website System and attached to the RFI electronically.
D. Meeting Minutes: Contractor shall enter meeting agendas, records and minutes in the system for all applicable meetings as designated by the Owner.
E. General Communications, memorandums and Letters (Project Correspondence): Shall be created in or posted to the ePM Website System in PDF format electronically linked to action items. These action items shall include names of party (ies) required to respond, time frame within which action is to be taken and any solutions the Contractor recommends.
F. Drawings and Specifications: The Contract Documents will be posted to the ePM Website System as directed by the Owner. The Owner shall retain the right to assign download rights to active CAD or model files. CAD or model files, in any format, posted to the ePM Website System are for viewing and printing only and cannot be edited.
G. Submittals: All submittals shall be fully electronic. Reference Section 01 33 00.
H. Submittal Schedule and Log: Contractor shall post and/or update on a daily basis.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT
CORNELL STORE EM POWER ELECTRONIC PROJECT 01 31 50-3 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MANAGEMENT (ePM) SYSTEM MARCH 22, 2021
I. Field Reporting: The Contractor shall post and/or update on a daily basis all reports required by other specification sections. These reports include, but are not limited to, daily construction reports, material location reports, unusual event reports, safety and accident reports.
J. Project Photographs: Contractor shall upload project photographs to the ePM system, field by date and type including but not limited to:
1. General Progress Photographs
2. RFI Issues
3. Non-Conforming Work
4. Special Events
5. As required by individual Specification Sections
K. Project Schedule: The contractor shall post, distribute, review, and/or respond to the project schedule, monthly updates, and any other schedule submittals onto the ePM in both native and PDF formats.
L. Permits & Approvals: Contractor shall upload and maintain current copies of all permits and agency approvals that relate to the project.
M. Issue Tracking: Contractor to log and respond to issues that are related and affect other stakeholders within the project team.
N. Quality Assurance: The Owner and/or Architect will issue reports on conforming items in the ePM system. The Contractor is required to review and respond with corrective actions in the system.
O. Change Management – Cost Events and Change Orders will be managed by the e-PM system and the Contractor shall be responsible for reporting potential changes and logging Requests for Change Orders in the system. The Contractor shall also upload and manage all documentation supporting Requested Change Orders.
P. Pay Applications Requests (Invoices) – The Contractor shall create and submit invoices for review by the Owner. Once the invoices are agreed to by the Owner then the invoices should be submitted electronically per the instructions for the ePM system.
Q. Budget and Cost Management – Contractor to provide estimates and work breakdown structure (WBS) to provide Owner with accurate budget/cost analysis.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT
CORNELL STORE EM POWER ELECTRONIC PROJECT 01 31 50-4 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MANAGEMENT (ePM) SYSTEM MARCH 22, 2021
1.6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
A. The Owner may change the standards for distribution and process prescribed above as required to suit the project.
B. The Owner shall retain ownership of all data entered into either system and shall administrate and distribute all information contained therein.
C. The Contractor shall make certain that all subcontractors performing significant work on the project shall actively participate in the e-PM system. Requirements for participation in the e-PM system shall be made part of each bid document and final contract.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
****END OF SECTION 01 31 50***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
CORNELL STORE EM POWER CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-1 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Contractor shall, within fourteen (14) calendar days of Notice to Proceed, prepare and submit to the Owner estimated construction progress schedules for the entire Work, with sub-schedules of related activities which are essential to the progress of the Work.
B. Conferences will be held with the Architect, Owner and Contractor at the start of the project to agree mutually on a progress schedule which must be diligently followed.
C. Submit revised progress schedules periodically and when requested to do so by Owner.
D. Submit to Owner and Architect a cash flow projection in accordance with Schedule of Values.
E. Submit electronic versions of all schedules, including updates, as well as all back-up to the submitted schedules.
1.2 FORM OF SCHEDULES
A. Prepare Network Analysis system, or prepare schedules in the form of a horizontal bar chart.
1. Provide separate horizontal bar for each trade or operation.
2. Horizontal time scale: Identify the first work day of each week.
3. Scale and spacing: To allow space for notations and future revisions. B. Format of listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of work.
C. Identification of listings: By specification section numbers.
1.3 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES
A. Construction Progress Schedule:
1. Show the complete sequence of construction by activity.
2. Show the dates for the beginning, and completion of, each major element of construction. Specifically list:
a. Site clearing
b. Site utilities
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
CORNELL STORE EM POWER CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-2 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
c. Foundation work
d. Structural framing
e. Subcontractor work
f. Equipment installations
g. Finishes
h. Pre-Installation meetings
3. Show projected percentages of completion for each item, as of the first day of each month.
4. Show estimated dates for the beginning and completion of work which must be completed by or coordinated with the Owner such as hazardous materials abatement, moving, training and other such items as they are identified.
B. Submittals Schedule for Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Confer with the Architect and agree on all elements of the Submittals Schedule. The schedule will be based on the understanding that minimum turn-around time in the Architect's office is ten (10) working days. Some submittals or groups of submittals may take longer to review. Submittals which do not conform to the agreed schedule may be subject to delays in processing. Show:
1. The dates for Contractor's submittals.
2. The dates reviewed submittals will be required from the Architect.
3. Confirmed lead time for manufacturing, production, fabrication and shipment to the project site of all materials which have an impact on the critical path of the Project's construction schedule.
1.4 PROGRESS REVISIONS
A. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submission.
B. Show changes occurring since previous submission of schedule:
1. Major changes in scope
2. Activities modified since previous submission
3. Revised projections of progress and completion
4. Other identifiable changes
C. Provide a narrative report as needed to define:
1. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on the schedule.
2. Corrective action recommended, and its effect.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
CORNELL STORE EM POWER CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-3 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
3. The effect of changes on schedules of other prime contractors.
1.5 SUBMISSIONS
A. Submit initial Construction Progress Schedules within fifteen (15) calendar days after award of Contract.
1. Owner will review schedules and return review copy within ten (10) days after receipt.
2. If required, resubmit within seven (7) days after return of review copy.
B. Submit progress revision schedules to accompany each application for payment.
C. Submit Submittals Schedule within thirty (30) calendar days after date of commencement of work.
D. Submit one reproducible transparency and one opaque reproduction.
2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 DISTRIBUTION
A. Distribute copies of the reviewed schedules to:
1. Owner Job Site personnel
2. Subcontractors
3. Other concerned parties
B. Instruct recipients to report to the Contractor, in writing, any problems anticipated by the projections of the schedule.
***END OF SECTION 01 32 16***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 33 Ithaca, New York PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
CORNELL STORE EM POWER PHOTOGRAPHIC 01 32 33-1 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT DOCUMENTATION MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall provide existing condition photographs taken before commencement of Work, progress photographs taken periodically during progress of the Work, and final photographs upon completion and full occupancy of the building.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Progress Submittals
1. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project area and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph.
2. Submit digital photograph electronic files, organizationally filed by week, to E-Builder within five (5) days of taking photographs.
3. Each photograph shall be identified with project title, date, and a description of the view.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING CONDITION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Before commencement of selective demolition, take photographs of Project area and surrounding areas, including existing items to remain during construction.
3.2 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Photographs shall be taken weekly in a manner which completely documents the work.
B. The photographs shall be submitted to the Owner at the end of the first week for review.
C. Provide photographs of any wall, ceiling or floor assembly containing MEP, A/V or any infrastructure that will thereafter become concealed-prior to closure. Note location on Key Plan.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 33 Ithaca, New York PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
CORNELL STORE EM POWER PHOTOGRAPHIC 01 32 33-2 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT DOCUMENTATION MARCH 22, 2021
3.3 FINAL COMPLETION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Photographs shall be taken in a manner which completely documents the completed work, for submission as project record documents.
***END OF SECTION 01 32 33***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-1 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals, including the following:
1. Shop Drawings
2. Product Data
3. Samples
4. Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals
5. Coordination Drawings
6. Certification of Asbestos free products
7. Owner audio/visual
8. Owner furnishings and fixed equipment
B. Designate in the construction schedule, and/or in a separate Submittals Schedule, the dates for submission and the dates reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples will be
needed.
C. With the exception of physical samples and color charts, or as otherwise approved by the Owner, all submittals shall be electronic images in PDF format created electronically (saved
with commenting allowed) which shall be submitted for review and approval via the electronic project management web site. PDFs shall be created directly from the native file format electronically. Scanning of paper to PDF shall be used minimally. Any non-electronic submittals shall be approved on a case by case basis and logged into the electronic management system as directed by a Cornell representative.
1.2 SUBMITTAL REGISTRY AND SCHEDULE
A. The Architect shall provide a draft submittal registry in the template needed for eBuilder importation. It will be part of the contract documents and turned over to the Contractor in native format for their use. The Contractor shall be responsible for review and completion of the registry including addition of dates identified below and other information as deemed necessary by the Owner.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-2 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
B. The submittal registry and schedule shall list all submittals required by the specifications, listed in order by the specification section in which they are required. Coordinate the Submittal Schedule with the Contractor's Critical Path Method Construction Schedule and other related documents.
C. The Submittal Registry shall include the following information:
1. Title (by Architect for Contractor review)
2. Related specification section and paragraph numbers (by Architect for Contractor
review)
3. Subsection (by Architect for Contractor review)
4. Category of Submittal (Certification, Mock-Up, Operations/Maintenance Manual, Product Data, Sample, Shop Drawing, Test Report, As Built, etc.) (by Architect for Contractor review)
5. Submittal Description including description of the part of the Work covered by the submittal (by Architect for Contractor review)
6. Name of Subcontractor, if applicable (Contractor provided, optional)
7. Date due from Subcontractor (Contractor provided, optional)
8. Date due to be submitted for review (Contractor provided, required)
9. Date due for submittal review to be completed (Contractor provided, required)
10. Date for transmittal to Subcontractor (Contractor provided, optional)
11. Date for material or product delivery to project (Contractor provided, required)
12. Priority. Low, normal or high (Contractor provided, required)
D. Schedule a resubmittal for each major submittal. Except where specified otherwise in the contract documents, provide review times for submittals in accordance with Submittal Procedures and Architect’s Duties below.
E. Distribution: Initially submit the Submittal Schedule to the Owner for review via the electronic Project Management system. A submittal schedule compliant with the requirements of this section showing all submittals for the preliminary schedule submission duration shall be submitted with the Contractor’s preliminary schedule submittal described in Section 01 32 16. The schedule shall also enumerate all submittals to be processed after the initial preliminary schedule submission duration period, although the date for these submittals does not have to be indicated. A final baseline submittal schedule showing all submittals for the entire project shall be included in the baseline schedule submittal described in Section 01 32 16.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-3 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
F. Updating: The Submittal Schedule shall be kept up-to-date by the Contractor until all submittals are approved. Failure to provide the requested information, or delay in submitting required submittals may result in the payment request being returned to the Contractor until the required schedule or submittals are received.
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Drawings shall be newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale by skilled draftsperson and presented in a clear and thorough manner.
1. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from Contract Documents.
2. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as basis of Shop Drawings.
3. Standard information prepared without specific reference to Project is not Shop Drawing.
B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar Drawings. Include the following information:
1. Dimensions.
2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number.
3. Compliance with specified standards.
4. Notation of coordination requirements.
5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurements.
6. Submittal:
a. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned
electronically marked with action taken.
b. Maintain returned document as a “Record Document”.
1.4 PRODUCT DATA
A. Product Data includes brochures, diagrams, standard schedules, performance charts, and instructions that illustrate physical size, appearance and other characteristics of materials and equipment. All submittals shall identify all products as being asbestos free, see Section 01 35 29.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-4 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
B. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system.
1. Clearly mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Failure to do so will result in rejection of the submission.
2. Show performance characteristics and capacities.
3. Show dimensions and clearances required.
4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls.
5. Where Product Data includes information on products that are not required, eliminate or mark through information that does not apply.
6. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the Work.
7. Preliminary Submittal: Submit single copy of Product Data where selection of options by Architect is required.
8. Submittals:
a. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned electronically marked with action taken.
b. Maintain one (1) copy as a “Record Document”.
1.5 SAMPLES
A. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern.
B. Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate:
1. Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices.
2. Full range of color, texture and pattern.
C. Field samples and mock-ups:
1. Contractor shall erect, at the Project site, at a location acceptable to the Architect.
2. Size or area: that specified in the respective specification section.
3. Fabricate each sample and mock-up complete and finished.
4. Remove mock-ups when directed by the Architect.
5. Perform necessary work to bring any area disturbed by mock-ups to the areas original condition.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-5 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
D. Submit fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with material or product proposed.
1. Mount or display Samples in manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated.
2. Identify Samples with generic description, product name, and name of manufacturer.
3. Submit Samples for review and verification of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture.
4. Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics is inherent in material or product represented, submit at least three (3) multiple units that show approximate limits of variations.
5. Preliminary Submittals: Submit one (1) full set of choices where Samples are submitted for Architect’s selection of color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices.
6. Submittals:
a. Submit four (4) sets for Architect’s review. Architect will return at least one (1) set marked with action taken. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at Project Site, for quality comparisons throughout course of construction. Additionally, for electronic transmittal, photograph sample and its label and attached to the submittal item electronically via the electronic project management.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS
A. Quality assurance and quality control submittals include design data, test reports, certifications, manufacturer’s instructions, and manufacturer’s field reports.
B. Professional design services or certifications: Where Contract Documents require professional design services or certifications by a design professional, Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a qualified design professional, whose registration seal shall appear on drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Architect shall be entitled to rely upon adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of services, certifications, or approvals performed by such design professionals.
C. Inspection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports from independent testing agencies as specified in the Contract Documents.
D. Manufacturer’s instruction: Preprinted instructions concerning proper application or installation of system or product.
E. Manufacturer’s field reports: Reports documenting testing and verification by manufacturer’s field representative to verify compliance with manufacturer’s standards or instructions.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-6 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
F. Submittals:
1. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned electronically marked with action taken.
2. Maintain one (1) additional copy as “Record Document”.
1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall coordinate and manage the preparation and submittal of coordinated layouts of the mechanical, electrical and fire protection systems and equipment for all areas; drawn at a scale not less than 1/4" per foot showing on both plan and elevation including but not limited to all equipment, ducts, pipe sleeves, piping including plumbing and, sprinkler system, lighting, special supports and other items contained within the space. Show mechanical and electrical services as well as architectural and structural features drawn to scale. Provide electronic record of each coordination drawing submitted in TIFF and PDF formats to the Owner. Provide coordination drawings for all corridors, laboratories, offices, mechanical rooms, boiler room, shafts, tunnels, and all congested areas. Copies of coordination drawings shall be distributed to all trades to assure a complete, coordinated installation of work within the space available.
B. Submittal and review of coordination drawings will be required thirty (30) days prior to commencement of fabrication and/or installation of any work item.
C. Prepare and submit coordinated layouts of the mechanical and electrical systems and equipment for all areas; drawn at a scale not less than 3/8 inch =1 foot (1:32) showing on both plan and elevation including but not limited to all equipment, ducts, pipe sleeves, piping including plumbing and, sprinkler system, lighting, special supports and other items contained within the space. Show mechanical and electrical services as well as architectural and structural features drawn to scale. Provide copies of each coordination drawing submitted. Provide coordination drawings for all spaces, including but not limited to, corridors, laboratories, offices, mechanical rooms, boiler room, shafts, tunnels, and other areas. Copies of coordination drawings shall be distributed to all trades to assure a complete, coordinated installation of work within the space available.
1. Show architectural, structural and other adjacent work requiring coordination with services. Show items, including but not limited to, access doors, ceiling grids, ceiling construction, structural decks and framing, fixtures, devices, and other adjacent work coordinated with services and architectural layouts shown on Drawings.
2. Prepare plans, sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.
3. Include room names and numbers of each space.
4. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple entities in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-7 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
5. Contract drawings are diagrammatic. Exact location of receptacles, light fixtures, exit signs, fire alarm devices, and other devices shall be coordinated with the Architectural Drawings and shall not be scaled from locations indicated on the Mechanical and Electrical Drawings. Coordinate modifications in layout as necessary to complete the
Work in accordance with the design intent.
6. Coordinate modifications in layout and components necessary to ensure maintenance accessibility and prevent conflict between each portion of the Work.
7. Maintain maximum headroom at all locations. Unless indicated otherwise, all mechanical and electrical systems and associated components are to be installed as tight to underside of structure as possible.
8. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, electrical systems, communications systems, security systems, and other portions of the Work. Drawings shall indicate dimensions, to avoid interference with existing conditions, structural frame, ceilings, partitions, services, and other portions of the Work. Where conflicts occur with placement of materials of various portions of the Work, Contractor shall be responsible to resolve conflicts and coordinate the available space to accommodate each portion of the Work. Adjustments resulting from coordination shall be initialed and dated by the entity(s) affected by the adjustments.
9. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation.
10. Show location and size of access doors and access panels required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls.
11. Indicate required installation sequences.
12. Indicate dimensions, elevations, and alignments shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions, elevations, and alignments that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements and notify Architect. Provide
alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.
13. Indicate suspended ceiling heights and show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid.
14. Indicate locations of fire-rated partitions, smoke partitions, and other required barriers.
15. Plenum Space: Indicate sub-framing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, toilet partitions, overhead-mounted equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components and notify Architect.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-8 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
16. Exposed Ceiling Construction: In addition to other indicated information, show fully-dimensioned locations of all items exposed at ceiling space. Indicate alignment requirements and centerline locations of light fixtures, ducts, piping, conduit, and other services. Show dashed outline locations of laboratory casework, shelving, and other
items that extend 7 feet or more above the floor.
17. Mechanical and Electrical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical and electrical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-
protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment. Indicate paths of egress from rooms. Indicate paths for equipment removal from rooms. Indicate clear areas required for access and maintenance.
18. Structural Penetrations: Indicate scheduled and requested penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. Request un-scheduled penetrations and openings where Contractor has reviewed, analyzed, and coordinated all possible routing options and structural penetrations are only feasible option to accommodate indicated ceiling heights. Refer to the drawings for general guidelines and request confirmation by Architect for structural penetrations.
19. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show dimensioned locations, sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, accessories, and support systems. Show locations of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.
20. Electrical Work: Show electrical distribution, systems, equipment, and runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) in diameter and larger. Show light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, fire alarm, and other device locations. Show panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, bus way, generator, and motor control center locations. Show location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines. Show lighting control systems. Show cable tray layouts including vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions, clearances for access above and to side of cable trays, and vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure.
21. Fire Suppression System: Show locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads.
22. Refer to individual Sections for additional Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those Sections.
23. Contractor Sign-Off: Contractor and each entity performing portions of the Work shall sign and date coordination drawings.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-9 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
24. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so
inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit. Review of coordination drawings shall not reduce Contractor’s responsibility for final coordination of installation and maintenance clearances of systems and equipment with existing conditions and each portion of the Work.
D. Submittal and review of coordination drawings will be required before work can start in any given area of the building.
1.8 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Review submittals for compliance with Contract Documents and approve submittals prior to transmitting to the Architect.
B. Specifically record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitation. Comply with requirements of Section 01 25 00 Substitutions and Product Options.
C. Contractor’s approval of submittals shall indicate that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria, and has checked and coordinated information within each submittal with requirement of the Work and Contact Documents. Field conflicts which arise from the contractor’s failure to fully review and approve submittals before ordering equipment, will result in the contractor being burdened with all costs to remediate the situation.
D. Contractor shall be responsible for:
1. Compliance with the Contract Documents.
2. Confirming and correlating quantities and dimensions.
3. Selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction.
4. Coordination of the work represented by each submittal with other trades.
5. Performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner.
6. Compliance with the approved Construction Schedule.
7. All other provisions of the agreements.
E. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittals is not to be construed as an authorization for additional work or additional cost.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-10 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
F. If any notations represent a change to the Contract Sum, submit a cost proposal for the change in accordance with procedures specified before proceeding with the work.
G. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittal is not to be construed as approval of colors. Make all color-related submittals at one time.
H. Notify the Architect by letter of any notations made by the Architect which the Contractor finds unacceptable. Resolve such issues prior to proceeding with the Work.
I. Begin no fabrication of work until all specified submittal procedures have been fulfilled.
J. Do not submit shop drawings, product data or samples representing work for which such submittals are not specified. The Architect shall not be responsible for consequences of inadvertent review of unspecified submittals.
K. The review of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for proper construction and the furnishing of materials and labor required even though the same may not be indicated on the review shop drawings.
L. Certify that only asbestos free material is used in the execution of all work. Reference Section 01 35 39.
1.9 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Coordination
1. Coordinate submittals with performance of construction activities in accordance with the Submittal Schedule approved by the Architect and Owner.
2. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity.
3. Prepare and transmit each submittal in accordance with the Submittals Schedule, agreed to by all entities involved.
4. Prepare, review, approve and transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay.
5. Architect's Review: Allow ten (10) working days for Architect's initial processing of each submittal requiring the Architect’s review and response, except for longer periods required as noted below, and where processing must be delayed for coordination with subsequent submittals. The Architect will advise the Contractor promptly when it is determined that a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. Allow ten (10) working days for Architect's reprocessing of each submittal. Notify the Architect when processing time for a submittal is critical to the progress of the work, and the work would be expedited if its processing time could be shortened.
An additional five (5) working days will be required for items specified in Divisions 2, 3, 5, 23 and 26, and for Architectural Woodwork, Hollow Metal Work and Hardware Schedules.
6. Allow time for delivery in addition to review.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-11 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
7. Allow time for reprocessing each submittal.
8. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to prepare submittals sufficiently in advance of Work to permit processing.
9. Submittals made which do not conform to the schedule are subject to delays in processing by the Architect.
10. Refer to Section 01 32 16 Construction Schedules for requirements of the Submittals Schedule.
11. Failure of the Contractor to obtain approval of Shop Drawings shall render all work thereafter performed to be at Contractor’s sole risk, cost and expense.
B. Submittal Preparation
1. Place permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
2. Indicate name of entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
3. Provide space on label or beside title block on Shop Drawings to record Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, action taken, verification of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the submittal with requirements of the Work and of Contract Documents.
4. Complete all fields on submittal item details in ePM system including meaningful description.
5. Include the following information on submittal documentation:
a. Drawing, detail or specification references, including section number, as appropriate to clearly identify intended use of product.
b. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such.
c. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials.
d. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers.
e. Provide a blank space for the Architect’s stamps
f. On transmittal, record relevant information including deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations.
6. Identification of revisions on re-submittals, other than those noted by the Architect on previous submittals.
7. Shop drawings with the comment "by others" are not acceptable. All such work must specifically identify the related responsible subcontractor.
C. Submittal Transmittal:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-12 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
1. Transmit submittals via the electronic project management system to Architect unless otherwise noted or directed.
2. Prepare and generate transmittal in ePM system for submission of samples. Package sample and other each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling.
1.10 RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Provide a record copy of the submittal (electronic format) for the O&M Manual.
1.11 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. Make any corrections or changes noted on previous submittals.
B. Shop Drawings and Product Data:
1. Revise initial drawings or data, and resubmit as specified for the initial submittal.
2. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those noted by the Architect.
C. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal.
1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES
A. Review submittals with reasonable promptness as identified in 1.8, paragraph 5 of this Section.
B. Notations on the Submittal Review Stamp or eBuilder file mean the following:
1. "Approved (APP)" indicates that no deviations from the design concept have been found and Work may proceed.
2. "Approved as Noted (AAN)" indicates that deviations from the design concept which have been found are noted, and the Contractor may proceed accordingly.
3. "Revise and Resubmit (RAR)" indicates that Work covered by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity may not proceed. Revise or prepare new submittal according to Architect’s notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark.
4. “Rejected (REJ)” indicates that Work covered by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity may not proceed. Revise or prepare new submittal according to Architect’s notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if
necessary to obtain different action mark.
5. “On Hold (ONH)” is used in a very limited capacity and means that the Contractor should not take action until the reason for hold has been cleared and may be required to
revise and resubmit.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-13 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
6. “Not Reviewed (NRV)” is used for submittals that were submitted in error, duplicate, or other reason that does not require review by the Architect but need to be closed by the Contractor upon return to them.
7. “For Record Only (FRO)”: Submittals for information or record purposes, including Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals, and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), will not require responsive action by the Architect.
a. Architect will forward informational submittals without action.
b. Architect will reject and return informational submittals not in compliance with Contract Documents.
C. Incomplete Submittals: Architect will return incomplete submittals without action.
D. Unsolicited Submittals: Architect will return unsolicited submittals to sender without action.
E. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution, or for resubmission.
1.13 DISTRIBUTION
A. Distribute reviewed Shop Drawings and copies of Product Data when possible via the electronic project management system to:
1. Job site file
2. Record Documents file
3. Subcontractors
4. Installers
5. Suppliers
6. Manufacturers
7. Fabricators
8. Architect
9. Owner
B. Do not permit use of unmarked copies or rejected copies of submittals in connection with construction at Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 33 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY
CORNELL STORE EM POWER GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-1 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 35 29 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section provides requirements for general health and safety during the project. The requirements of this Section shall apply to both Contractor and all tiers of sub-contractors involved in the project.
B. In addition to the requirements of this Section, all laws and regulations by applicable local, state, and federal agencies shall apply to the work of this contract. In some cases the requirements of these Specifications may by intention exceed such legal requirements, but in no case shall this Specification be interpreted or understood to reduce or eliminate such
requirements.
1.2 CONTRACTOR’S PROJECT SITE SPECIFIC PLAN
A. Contractors are required to submit a Project Site Specific Plan (PSSP) for review by Cornell University representatives before commencement of work on the site. The PSSP should
address site specific information, controls and or requirements as it relates to the entire scope of work for the project. All contractors shall use the Project Site Specific Plan Template below to develop their Project’s PSSP. The template may be downloaded at: https://ehs.cornell.edu/campus-health-safety/occupational-safety/contractor-safety
1. Within the PSSP Template are example(s) to use as reference. The provided examples demonstrate Cornell University’s expectations for providing detailed site specific information, controls and requirements.
2. Project Site Specific Plan’s that inadequately address site specific operations will be returned with comments for resubmission. Failure to submit a PSSP may result in delay of project and/or denial of the payment.
3. All projects must have the PSSP submitted via e-Builder for review and comment.
B. PSSP submittal should be submitted a minimum of ten (10) days prior to the commencement of work on site. The Contractor may opt to submit their PSSP in phases. The Contractor must submit a phase submission plan using the PSSP Submission table included in the PSSP template for approval by Owner’s Representative with initial submission. Submit remaining phases no later than ten (10) days prior to the start of a new, predetermined project phase or milestone.
1. Projects having less than a ten (10) day turn-around shall coordinate their submittal with the Owner’s Representative, who should coordinate with Occupational Health, Safety and Injury Prevention (OHSIP), the University Fire Marshall’s Office and Contract College’s Codes Enforcement Official, if applicable.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY
CORNELL STORE EM POWER GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-2 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
C. The Contractor is responsible for its employees and its subcontractors. Subcontractors are required to submit their PSSP to the General Contractor. The General Contractor is responsible to ensure all subcontractor(s) PSSP’s are adequate per their scope of work.
D. The General Contractor is required to ensure their project’s PSSP is accurately maintained throughout the duration of the contract. Resubmission is required for any new scope elements not previously addressed by the Contractor’s original PSSP.
E. Definitions:
1. Project Site Specific Plan (PSSP): A structured document that details the scope of the contract work and related site specific controls, requirements and information for University and Contractor personnel. This document is not intended to be all inclusive of all applicable local, state and federal laws and regulations for which the General Contractor and its Subcontractor(s) are expected to comply.
2. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ):
• The organization, office or individual responsible for approving equipment, an installation or a procedure (NYS Fire Code).
• The local government, county government or state agency responsible for the administration and enforcement of an applicable regulation or law (NYS Building Code-§202.2).
3. Occupational Health, Safety and Injury Prevention (OHSIP): A division of Cornell University’s Environmental Safety and Health Department. The OHSIP division can be
contacted at (607)-255-8200 or by email at askEHS@cornell.edu
4. SME: The University’s subject matter expert.
1.3 ASBESTOS
A. All products provided for use in construction at Cornell University are to be free of asbestos. At Substantial Completion, prior to beneficial service, the Contractor shall provide a signed certification form “Exhibit AC” stating that all Contractor supplied & installed products are 100% asbestos free. The Contractor has to attach applicable Safety Data Sheets/ Material Safety Data Sheets for each product documenting a 100% asbestos free status. The University may provide random testing of products for asbestos content. Any Contractor installed product found to contain asbestos shall be classified as defective work. Defective work shall be corrected by the Contractor as specified in the General Conditions.
B. Attached for the Contractor’s information are asbestos reports which represent samples taken within the building.
C. Removal and disposal of asbestos containing material shall be performed by the Contractor in accordance with Division 2 specifications.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY
CORNELL STORE EM POWER GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-3 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
1.4 LEAD
A. Building may contain lead based paint. The Contractor shall protect workers in accordance with OSHA regulations. The Contractor selects the means and/or methods to address the presence of lead based paint, and must concurrently protect its workers based on the Contractor’s means and/or methods. The Contractor is required to submit a lead plan that is site specific, indicating that the protective measures the Contractor proposes meet the OSHA standard 1926.62 “Lead in Construction Standards”. This site specific plan should address the particular methods the Contractor intends to protect its workers, the building occupants and the building structure based on its selection of addressing the presence of lead based paint.
1.5 SITE VISITS
A. The undertaking of periodic Site Visits by Architects, Engineers or the Owner shall not be construed as supervision of actual construction, or make them responsible for the safety of any persons; or make them responsible for means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction selected by the Contractor or its Subcontractors; or make them responsible for safety programs and precautions incident to the Work, or for the safe access, visit, use, Work, travel or occupancy of any person.
1.6 CONFINED SPACE
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the identification of confined space in accordance with OSHA requirements.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 35 29***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
Tel: 607.231.6600
Fax: 607.231.6650
www.delta-eas.com
AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY
“We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations”
January 15, 2021 Mr. Dale Houseknecht, Facilities Coordinator Projects II
Cornell University IPP-Facilities Management FM Administration 116 Humphreys Service Building Ithaca, New York 14853-3701
Re: Cornell Store (Bldg 2088) Emergency Lighting and Emergency Power Replacement Project Asbestos Inspection / Survey Report Cornell Task Authorization No. TA-397, Work Order No. 13055263 Delta Project No.: 2019.003.374
Dear Mr. Houseknecht: Enclosed, please find the Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form, the associated Laboratory Analytical Result Sheets, and the Sample Location Drawings for the bulk sampling performed by Delta Certified
Inspectors Thomas Ferro. The sampling was performed on January 13th, 2021 and addressed accessible
suspect materials with the potential to be impacted by the upcoming Cornell Store Emergency Lighting and Emergency Power Replacement Project. Based on a review of the projects 50% Design Development Drawing set (dated 10/29/20), areas of the 1st, 2nd & 3rd Floor at the Cornell Store, Basement Room B00UP at Olin Hall, and an “outdoor” path between the two buildings are included in the project.
Based on a review of the project scope (via the drawings referenced above), a review of existing bulk sample information for the affected buildings / sites, and a visual inspection of the affected rooms/spaces and associated suspect materials, a total of two (2) bulk samples were collected representing one (1) homogenous material. Both of the samples collected were “Non-Friable Organically Bound” (NOB) and
results for both were reported as “No Asbestos Detected”.
In addition to the materials sampled, several other suspect materials with the potential to be impacted were observed to be present but not addressed as a part of this survey, as they were previously sampled. These included various ceiling / wall system materials & suspect materials associated with the Emergency
Generator at the Cornell Store and various wall system materials at Olin Halls. All accessible wiring was
observed to be non-suspect vinyl. Based on the above, no asbestos containing materials are anticipated to be impacted by the Cornell Store Emergency Lighting and Emergency Power Replacement Project, with the exception of the Breeching
Insulation associated with the Cornell Store Emergency Generator, which was previously sampled and
reported as being “Asbestos Containing”. The generator and associated ACM breeching insulation is located in the 2nd Floor Room 20060, with approximately 40 linear feet (average 12” diameter) breeching insulation present. The breeching starts at the Generator and exits the room approximately 15’ aff through the adjacent wall.
“We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations”
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 2 of 8
AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY
Bulk sample analysis was performed by AmeriSci New York, Inc., an independent laboratory approved / accredited by the NYS Department of Health (ELAP), the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA), and the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP). Analysis of all Non-Friable Organically Bound (NOB) materials was initially performed by Polarized Light Microscopy
(PLM) following the NYS DOH ELAP 198.6 Methodology. If the PLM results were reported as “non-
asbestos”, the sample was then analyzed by Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) following the NYS DOH ELAP 198.4 Methodology. “Positive Stop” sample analysis protocol was utilized for a given homogenous material set with multiple samples and based on this; both of the samples collected were analyzed. Please reference the Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form for sample particulars and details.
I have also attached Delta Company, Personnel, and Laboratory Licenses/Certifications. If you have any questions or require any other information, please feel free to contact me at your convenience. Respectfully,
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC
Stephen Prislupsky Director of Environmental Services
Att: Project Paperwork
“We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations”
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 3 of 8
AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY
Attachment A
Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form
MaterialAsbestosPLM ResultTEM ResultBulk Sample Description / DetailsTypeType% Asbestos % Asbestos 2019.003.374 -01A01Ext.Caulk, Sidewalk Expansion JointMiscellaneousNDNDND2019.003.374 -01B01Ext.Caulk, Sidewalk Expansion JointMiscellaneousNDNDND860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax 607.231.66450Client: Cornell UniversityDelta Proj. No.: 2018.003.374Asbestos Inspector: Thomas FerroHA*Number of Samples Collected: 2Project: Cornell Store Emergency Power/Lighting Replacement Project Asbestos Bulk Sampling Number of Samples Analyzed: PLM - 2 / TEM -2 Task Authorization No.: TA-397 / Work Order No.: 13055263Asbestos Bulk Sample Report FormHA - Homogenous Area ND - No Asbestos Detected NA - Not Analyzed by Methodology NA/PS - Not Analyzed, Positive StopTSI - Thermal System Insulation Misc - Miscellaneous Material Trace / < 1% - Non-asbestos by definitionNumberwww.delta-eas.comFloor Dates Sampling Performed: 01/13/2021Date of Report: 1/15/2021Laboratory: AmeriSci Labs Building Code: 2088SampleCornell University Cornell StoreEmergency Power/Lighting ReplacementAsbestos Bulk SamplingPage 1 of 1
“We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations”
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 4 of 8
AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY
Attachment B Laboratory Analytical Result Sheets
“We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations”
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 5 of 8
AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY
Attachment C Sample Location Drawing
“We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations”
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 6 of 8
AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY
Attachment D Photos
HA 01 – Sidewalk Expansion Joint Caulk, “No Asbestos Detected”
“We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations”
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 7 of 8
AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY
Cornell Store Room 20060 Emergency Generator Exhaust Breeching Insulation, Previously Sampled - “Asbestos Containing”, approximately 40 LF
Cornell Store Room 20060 Emergency Generator
“We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations”
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 8 of 8
AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY
Attachment E Delta / Laboratory Licenses and Certifications
New York State –Department of Labor
Division of Safety and Health License and Certificate Unit State Campus, Building 12
Albany, NY 12240
ASBESTOS HANDLING LICENSE
Delta Engineers, Architects, Land Surveyors, & Landscape, Architects, D.P.C. 860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
FILE NUMBER: 05-0851 LICENSE NUMBER: 29322 LICENSE CLASS: RESTRICTED DATE OF ISSUE: 10/06/2020
EXPIRATION DATE: 10/31/2021
Duly Authorized Representative – Stephen Prislupsky:
This license has been issued in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 30 of the Labor Law of New York State and of
the New York State Codes, Rules and Regulations (12 NYCRR Part 56). It is subject to suspension or revocation for a (1) serious violation of state, federal or local laws with regard to the conduct of an asbestos project, or (2) demonstrated lack of responsibility in the conduct of any job involving asbestos or asbestos material.
This license is valid only for the contractor named above and this license or a photocopy must be prominently displayed at the
asbestos project worksite. This license verifies that all persons employed by the licensee on an asbestos project in New York State have been issued an Asbestos Certificate, appropriate for the type of work they perform, by the New York State
Department of Labor.
Eileen M. Franko, Director
SH 432 (8/12) For the Commissioner of Labor
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-1 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 35 43 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section and the listed Related Sections provides minimum requirements for the protection of the environment during the project. The requirements of this Section shall apply to both Contractor and all tiers of sub-contractors involved in the project.
B. In addition to the requirements of this Section and the listed Related Sections, all laws and regulations by applicable local, state, and federal agencies shall apply to the work of this contract. In some cases the requirements of these Specifications may by intention exceed such legal requirements, but in no case shall this Specification be interpreted or understood
to reduce or eliminate such requirements.
C. Prior to bidding, review the entire Bidding Documents and report in writing to the Owner’s Representative any error, inconsistency, or omission that may have environmental impacts.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 35 44 – Spill Control
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals:
1. Analytical laboratory sample results and material Certifications for all imported soil and granular materials (“borrow”).
2. Contractor’s Waste Material Disposal Plan.
3. Weight tickets from the Borrow Material Supplier.
4. Proposed methods for dewatering and construction water management.
5. Analytical laboratory sample results for all waste materials.
6. Copies of manifests for all waste materials disposed of off-site.
1.4 JOB SITE ADMINISTRATION
A. In accordance with Article 2 of the General Conditions, provide a competent supervisory representative with full authority to act for the Contractor at the site.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-2 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS MARCH 22, 2021
B. If at any time operations under the representative’s supervision do not comply with this Section, or the representative is otherwise unsatisfactory to the Owner, replace, if requested by the Owner, said representative with another representative satisfactory to the Owner. There shall be no change in superintendent without the Owner's approval.
C. Remove from the Work any employee of the Contractor or any Subcontractor when so directed by the Owner. The Owner may request the removal of any employee who does not comply with these specifications.
1.5 CLEARING, SITE PREPARATION AND SITE USE
A. In accordance with Section 01 14 00, only that portion of the working area that is absolutely necessary and essential for the work shall be cleared for construction. All clearing should be approved and performed to provide minimum practical exposure of soils.
B. The Contractor shall make every effort to avoid the destruction of plants, trees, shrubs and lawns outside the area of construction so as not to unduly disturb the ecological or environmental quality of the area.
C. Topsoil excavated as part of the Project, which can be reused as part of the Project, shall be stockpiled for future use and temporarily stabilized to prevent erosion.
1.6 SPOIL AND BORROW
A. Spoil
1. Dispose of excavated material which, in the opinion of the Owner’s Representative, is unfit to be used as backfill or embankment or which is in excess of the amount required under the Contract.
2. All spoil areas shall be graded and seeded to match the surrounding area.
3. Spoil areas shall be covered and protected from erosion into adjacent storm sewers, drainage ways, land areas, or water bodies.
B. Borrow Material
1. Borrow material shall be provided from a clean source. Submittals of proposed borrow material shall be reviewed by the Owner prior to delivery on-site. Submittals shall include the quantity of materials, source location and certification by the material supplier that it is free of chemicals or other foreign matter.
1.7 NOISE AND VIBRATION
A. Limit and control the nature and extent of activities at all times to minimize the effects of noise and vibrations. Take adequate measures for keeping noise levels, as produced by construction related equipment, to safe and tolerable limits as set forth by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), the New York State Industrial Code Guidelines and Ordinances and all City, Town and Local ordinances. Equip all construction equipment
presenting a potential noise nuisance with noise-muffling devices adequate to meet these requirements
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-3 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS MARCH 22, 2021
1.8 DUST CONTROL
A. Take adequate measures for controlling dust produced by drilling, excavation, backfilling, loading, saw cutting or other means. The use of calcium chloride or petroleum-based materials for dust control is prohibited. Dust control measures are required throughout the duration of construction.
B. If, in the opinion of the Owner’s Representative, the Contractor is not adequately controlling dust, the Owner will first notify the Contractor. If the Contractor does not take adequate actions necessary, the Owner may, at the Contractor’s expense, employ alternative means to control dust.
C. Erect, maintain, and remove when appropriate barriers or other devices, including mechanical ventilation systems, as required by the conditions of the work for the protection of users of the project area, the protection of the work being done, or the containment of dust and debris. All such barriers or devices shall be provided in conformance with all applicable codes, laws, and regulations including OSHA.
1.9 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT
A. Construction procedures observed by the Contractor, its subcontractors and other employees shall include protection of the environment, in accordance with all pertinent Cornell standards, policies, local laws, executive orders, ordinances, and federal and state regulations. Construction procedures that are prohibited in the undertaking of work associated with this Contract include, but are not limited to:
1. Dumping of spoil material or any liquid or solid pollutant into any storm or sanitary sewer, drainage way, stream sewer, any wetlands (as defined by federal and state regulations), any surface waters, or at unspecified locations.
2. Indiscriminate, arbitrary, or capricious operation of equipment in any stream corridors, any wetlands, or any surface waters.
3. Pumping of any silt-laden water from trenches or other excavations into any storm sewers, sanitary sewers, drainage ways, wetlands, or surface waters.
4. Damaging vegetation beyond the extent necessary for construction of the facilities.
5. Disposal of trees, brush, and other debris in any location on University property, unless such areas are specifically identified on the drawing or in the specifications or specifically approved by the Owner’s site representative.
6. Permanent or unspecified alteration of the flow line of a stream.
7. Burning trash, project debris, or waste materials.
B. Take all necessary precautions to prevent silt or waste of any kind from entering any drainage or waterways or downstream properties as a result of the Work.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-4 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS MARCH 22, 2021
C. Runoff of potable water used for concrete curing or concrete truck or chute cleaning operations shall not be allowed to reach the storm water system or open water due to the levels of residual chlorine (New York State water quality standards, 6 NYCRR Part 703.5) and other potential contaminants. If necessary, obtain permission from the local sewer
authority and collect and pump the runoff to the sanitary sewer.
D. Limit the nature and extent of any activities that could result in the release or discharge of pollutants. Report any such release or discharge immediately to the Owner’s Representative
and clean up spills immediately, as detailed in Section 01 35 44 – Spill Control Procedures.
1.10 TEMPORARY RE-ROUTING OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK
A. Obtain approval from the Owner’s Representative prior to any temporary re-routing of piping and exhaust ductwork necessary for the completion of the Work. Submit re-routing plans to
the Owner’s Representative in writing.
The following shall require approval of the Owner:
1. Temporary storm, sanitary or water line connections.
2. Temporary exhaust ductwork connections where such connections may impact air emissions.
B. Instruct all personnel to observe extreme caution when working in the vicinity of mechanical equipment and piping. Personnel shall not operate or tamper with any existing valves, switches, or other devices or equipment without prior approval by the Owner’s Representative.
1.11 HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC MATERIALS
A. Inform officers, employees, agents, contractors, subcontractors at every tier, and any other party which may come into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of its performance hereunder of the nature of such materials, and any health and safety or environmental risks associated therewith.
B. Do not use hazardous or toxic materials in a manner that will violate Cornell University Policies or any state, federal, or municipal environmental health and safety regulations. In situations where the risks are unclear consult with Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S) for guidance.
C. Provide complete care and treatment for any injury sustained by any parties coming into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of Contractor’s performance or failure to perform hereunder.
D. At the completion of project Contractor shall remove all unused chemical products and hazardous materials from campus. Transportation of these materials shall be in accordance with all federal, state, and local regulations. Request and receive written approval from EH&S prior to disposal of any on-site disposal.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-5 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS MARCH 22, 2021
1.12 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL AND TITLE
A. Prior to start of work and first payment, Contractor shall prepare and submit “Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan” to the Owner’s Representative. The plan shall identify the waste transportation and treatment, storage or disposal (TSD) companies which will manage all waste material and any site(s) for disposal of the waste material. Contractor must use this form to document waste disposal methods and locations.
B. The “Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan” form, together with definitions associated with the form waste descriptions. Forms may be downloaded at: https://ehs.cornell.edu/sites/default/files/resource-files/FRM_CWMDPContractorWasteMaterialDisposalPlan.pdf
C. Contractor shall be responsible for the proper cleanup, containment, storage and disposal of any hazardous material/chemical spill occurring during its work. For Cornell University owned hazardous waste EH&S will oversee, approve or effect the proper disposal. Title, risk of loss, and all other incidents of ownership to the Waste Material, shall vest in Contractor at the time Contractor or any transporter acting on its behalf takes physical possession of Waste Material. Complete and maintain full records of the chain of custody and control, including certificates of disposal or destruction, of all Waste Materials loaded, transported and/or disposed of. Deliver all such records to the Owner in accordance with applicable laws and regulations and any instructions from the Owner in a timely manner and in any event prior to final payment(s) under this Contract.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 35 43***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL
CORNELL STORE EM POWER SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-1 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 35 44 SPILL CONTROL
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SPILL PREVENTION
A. In order to minimize the potential for discharge to the environment of oil, petroleum, or hazardous substances on site, the following requirements shall apply to all projects:
1. All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored or relocated temporarily on site during the construction process shall be stored in such a manner as to provide protection from vehicular damage and to provide containment of leaks or spills. Horizontal diked oil storage tanks, temporary berms or barriers, or similar methods shall be employed as appropriate at each site.
2. Any on-site filling or dispensing activities shall occur within an area in which a temporary berm, boom, or similar containment barrier has been placed to prevent the inadvertent discharge to the environment of harmful quantities of any products.
3. All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored on site shall be located in such a manner as to minimize the potential of damage from construction operations or vehicles, away from drainage ways and environmentally sensitive areas, and in accordance with all fire and safety codes.
B. Remove immediately from the site any storage, dispensing, or operating equipment that is leaking oil or hazardous substances or is in anyway unsuitable for the safe storage of such materials.
1.2 SPILL CONTROL PROCEDURES
All Contractor personnel working at the project site shall be knowledgeable of the potential health and safety concerns associated with petroleum and other hazardous substances that could potentially be released at the project site. Following are a list of activities that should be conducted by the Contractor in the event of an oil/petroleum spill or the release of any other hazardous substance. In the event of a large quantity spill that would require cleanup procedures that are beyond the means of the Contractor, an emergency spill cleanup contractor shall be hired by the Contractor. In the event the Contractor has the personnel necessary to clean up the spill, the following procedures shall be followed:
A. Personnel discovering/responding to a spill shall:
1. Identify and locate the source of the spill. If unsafe conditions exist, leave the area, inform nearby personnel, notify the site supervisor, and initiate spill reporting (Section 1. 3).
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL
CORNELL STORE EM POWER SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-2 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
2. Limit the discharge of product, if safely possible, by: (1) diverting discharge to a containment area; (2) creating temporary dikes with soils or other available materials; and (3) utilizing sorbent materials. If secondary containment is present, verify that valves and drains are closed prior to diverting the product to this area.
3. The individual discovering a spill shall initiate containment procedures to prevent material from reaching a potential migratory route, through implementation of the following actions, or any other methods necessary. Methods employed shall not
compromise worker safety.
a. Stop the spill at once (if possible).
b. Extinguish sources of ignition (e.g., flames, sparks, hot surfaces, cigarettes, etc.).
c. Clear personnel from the spill location and rope off the area.
d. Utilize available spill control equipment in an effort to ensure that fires, explosions, and releases do not occur, recur, or spread.
e. Use sorbent materials to control the spill at the source.
f. Construct a temporary containment dike of sorbent materials, cinder blocks, bricks, or other suitable materials to help contain the spill.
g. Attempt to identify the character, exact source, amount, and area of the released materials. Identification of the spilled material should be made as soon as possible so that the appropriate cleanup procedure can be identified.
h. Assess possible hazards to human health or the environment as a result of the release, fire, or explosion.
i. If spill response measures involve the temporary cessation of any operations, the Contractor shall monitor the affected equipment for: (1) leaks; (2) pressure buildup; (3) gas generation; or (4) ruptures in valves, pipes, or other equipment.
B. Spill Cleanup:
1. Following containment of the spill, the following spill cleanup procedures shall be initiated.
a. Use proper waste containers.
b. Remove bulk liquid by using vacuum, pump, sorbents, or shovel and place material in properly labeled waste container. Be sure not to collect incompatible or reactive substances in the same container.
c. Cleanup materials not reclaimed on-site shall be disposed of in accordance with all applicable state and federal regulations.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL
CORNELL STORE EM POWER SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-3 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
d. Apply sorbent materials to pick up remaining liquid after bulk liquid has been removed. The Contractor shall not walk over spilled material. Absorbed material shall be picked up with a shovel and placed in a separate waste container, and shall not be mixed with bulk liquid.
e. Clean spill control equipment and containers. Replace equipment in its proper location. Restock or reorder any sorbents used to clean up the spill.
f. Carefully wash spilled product from skin and clothing using soap. Change clothes, if necessary, to avoid further contact with product.
g. Disposal of all spilled product shall be made off-site, and shall be arranged through the Contractor.
h. A Spill Report shall be completed, including a description of the event. A sample Spill Documentation Form is provided in Appendix B.
C. Fire or Explosion:
1. In the event of a fire or explosion at the site, the Contractor shall:
a. Verify that the local fire department and the appropriate response personnel (e.g., ambulance, police) have been notified.
b. Report to the scene, if safe to do so, and evaluate the situation (e.g., spill character, source, etc.). Coordinate, as necessary, with other appropriate site and emergency personnel.
c. Ensure that people are cleared from the area.
d. Ensure that fires are safely extinguished (if possible), valves closed, and other immediate actions necessary to mitigate the emergency, if safe to do so.
e. Initiate responsible measures necessary to prevent subsequent fires, explosions, or releases from occurring or spreading to other areas of the site. These measures include stopping processes or operations, collecting and containing released oil, or removing and isolating containers.
f. Take appropriate action to monitor for: (1) leaks; (2) pressure build-ups; (3) gas generation; or (4) ruptures in pipes, valves, or other equipment.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL
CORNELL STORE EM POWER SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-4 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
1.3 SPILL REPORTING AND DOCUMENTATION
In the event of a spill CALL CORNELL POLICE AT 255-1111 who will notify the appropriate departments within the university and coordinate with the contractor for external reporting, if required.
The contractor shall be responsible for the initiation of spill reporting and documentation procedures. All petroleum spills must be reported to NYSDEC Spill Hotline at 1-800- 457-7362, less than two hours following discovery. Notification must be made to Cornell Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S), 607.255.8200, within 24 hours of reporting the release. The Contractor will be expected to provide EH&S with the DEC issued spill number. Any petroleum spill must be reported to NYSDEC unless ALL of the following criteria apply: TABLE 1 CRITERIA TO EXEMPT SPILL REPORTING
CRITERIA DESCRIPTION
Quantity The spill must be known to be less than 5 gallons.
Containment The spill must be contained on an impervious surface or within an impervious structure, such that it cannot enter the environment.
Control The spill must be under control and not reach a drain or leave the impervious
surface.
Cleanup The spill must be cleaned-up within two hours of occurrence. Environment The spill must not have already entered into the soil or groundwater or onto surface water.
A release of a “reportable quantity”1 or unknown amount of a hazardous substance must also be immediately reported to NYSDEC Spill Hotline. Spills of reportable quantities of chemicals or “harmful quantities”2 of oil to navigable waters must be reported to the federal National Response Center, 1-800-424-8802.
Spill Reporting Information: When making a telephone report, the caller should be prepared to provide the following information, if possible:
1. The date and time of the spill or release.
2. The identity or chemical name of the material released or spilled, including an indication of whether the material is defined as an extremely hazardous substance.
3. An estimate of the quantity of material released or spilled into the environment and the approximate duration of the event.
4. The exact location of the spill, including the name(s) of the waters involved or threatened, and/or other medium or media affected by the release or spill.
5. The source of the release or spill.
6. The name, address, and telephone number of the party in charge of, or responsible for, the facility or activity associated with the release or spill.
7. The extent of the actual and potential water pollution.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL
CORNELL STORE EM POWER SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-5 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
8. The name and telephone number of the person in charge of operations at the spill site.
9. The steps being taken or proposed to contain and cleanup the released or spilled material and any precautions taken to minimize impacts, including evacuation.
10. The extent of injuries, if any.
11. Any known or anticipated acute or chronic health risks associated with the emergency, and information regarding necessary medical attention for exposed individuals.
12. Assistance required, if any.
If the release of a hazardous substance or oil occurs in an amount which exceeds a reportable quantity (RQ) as defined in 40 CFR Part 110, 40 CFR Part 117, 40 CFR Part 302, or 6 NYCRR Part 597, then the Contractor shall do the following:
1. Call to the National Response Center shall be made by the person in charge of the site. The applicable phone numbers are 1-800-424-8802 or 1-202-426-2675.
2. Within 14 days of the release, submit a written description of the release. The description should include: (1) a description of the release, (2) the type of material released, (3) estimated amount of the spill; (4) the date of the release, (5) an explanation of why the release occurred; and (6) a description of the measures to be implemented to prevent and control future releases.
(1)Reportable Quantity: A Reportable Quantity is the quantity of a hazardous substance or oil that triggers reporting requirements under the Comprehensive Emergency Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (CERCLA) (USEPA, September 1992). While the Contractor is legally responsible for knowing the risks of materials that are part of construction, members of the owner’s spill response team have access to information that may help identify these quantities with you.
(2)Harmful Quantity: A Harmful Quantity of oil includes discharges that violate applicable water quality standards; cause a film, sheen, or discoloration on a water surface or adjoining shoreline; or cause a sludge or emulsion to be deposited beneath the water surface or shoreline (40 CFR 110.3).
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 35 44***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 41 00 Ithaca, New York REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER REGULATORY 01 41 00-1 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 PERMITS AND LICENSES
A. The Contractor shall obtain, maintain and pay for all permits and licenses necessary for the execution of the Work and for the use of such Work when completed. Such permits shall include but are not limited to building, electrical, plumbing, backflow prevention, dig safe, fill, street use and building demolition.
1. City of Ithaca building permit applications shall be presented for review at the regularly scheduled Owner’s meeting with the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
B. For any projects which include demolition of a structure or load-bearing elements of a structure, the Contractor is required to complete a “Notification of Demolition and Renovation” and provide this notification to the United State Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) in advance of the work as specified in 40 CFR 61.145. The Contractor shall also provide a copy of this notification to the Owner’s Representative prior to any demolition.
C. All Construction / Building / Hot Work and Occupancy permits shall be issued and maintained through the City of Ithaca.
D. Ithaca Fire Department Permitting:
1. A permit is required from the Ithaca Fire Department to install or substantially repair a fire suppression, fire detection, or fire alarm system as such as defined under the Uniform Code of New York State.
2. If the scope of work is classified under the Existing Building Code of NYS as Alteration –Level 1; Alteration – Level 2; Alteration – Level 3; or Addition; a permit from the Ithaca Fire Department is required for all work affecting the fire suppression, fire detection, or fire alarm system for that building. A building permit is also required for this type of work.
3. Work classified as a ‘Repair’ under the Existing Building Code of NYS does not require a permit from the Ithaca Fire Department.
1.2 INSPECTIONS
A. Apply for and obtain all required inspections, pay all fees and charges for same, include all service charges, pavement cuts and repairs.
1.3 COMPLIANCE
A. The Contractor shall give all notices, pay all fees and comply with all laws, rules and regulations applicable to the Work.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 41 00 Ithaca, New York REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER REGULATORY 01 41 00-2 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS MARCH 22, 2021
1.4 OWNER’S REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor, Subcontractors, and employees of the Contractor and Subcontractors shall comply with all regulations governing conduct, access to the premises, operation of equipment and systems, and conduct while in or near the premises and shall perform the Work in such a manner as not to unreasonably interrupt or interfere with the conduct of business of the Owner.
B. Upon completion of the project, the Contractor agrees to provide the Owner with a summary of municipal permit fees paid. This shall include the name of the permits secured, the permit fees paid by the Contractor and a copy of the permit. If no permit fees were required, the Contractor shall so state, in writing, upon completion of the project.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 41 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER REFERENCES 01 42 00-1 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Notes or instructions shown on any one Drawing, apply where applicable, to all other Drawings.
B. All references to codes, specifications and standards referred to in the Specification Sections and on the Drawings shall mean, and are intended to be, the latest edition, amendment and/or revision of such reference standard in effect as of the date of these Contract Documents.
C. Install All Work in Compliance with:
1. NYS Uniform Code
a. International Building Code
b. International Residential Code
c. International Existing Building Code
d. International Fire Code
e. International Plumbing Code
f. International Mechanical Code
g. International Fuel Gas Code
h. International Property Maintenance Code
i. Uniform Code Supplement
2. NYS Energy Code
a. International Energy Conservation Code
b. ASHRAE 90.1
c. Energy Code Supplement
3. National Electric Code
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER REFERENCES 01 42 00-2 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
4. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
5. Life Safety Code NFPA 101.
6. All local ordinances
7. Plans and Specifications in excess of code requirements and not contrary to same.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. “General”: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. “Contract Documents”: The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor, General Conditions, General Requirements, Drawings, Specifications, addenda issued before execution of the Agreement, other documents listed in the Agreement, and modifications issued after execution of the Agreement.
C. “The Contract”: The Contract Documents form the Contract for construction and represent the entire integrated Agreement between the Owner and Contractor.
D. “The Work”: The work comprises the completed construction required by the Contract Documents and includes all labor necessary to produce such construction and all materials
and equipment incorporated in such construction.
E. “Owner”: Cornell University a New York corporation.
F. “Architect/Engineer”: The Architect or Engineer is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture and/or engineering in the state of New York, identified as such in the Owner Contractor Agreement, and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The terms Architect and/or Engineer mean the Architect and/or his authorized representative.
G. “Contractor”: The Contractor, person, firm, or corporation with whom the Construction Agreement contract is made by Owner.
H. “Subcontractor”: A person, firm, or corporation, supplying labor and/or materials for work at site of the project for and under separate contract or agreement with Contractor.
I. “As Approved” or “Approved”: Architect’s or Owner’s approval.
J. “As Directed”: Owner’s direction or instruction. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
K. “Indicated”: Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as “indicated.”
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER REFERENCES 01 42 00-3 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
L. “Regulations”: Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.
M. “Furnish”: Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.
N. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
O. “Reinstall”. To place back into a former position.
P. “Replace”. Provide a substitute for.
Q. “Provide”: Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
R. “Concealed’: Work installed in pipe shafts, chases or recesses, behind furred walls, above ceilings, either permanent or removable.
S. “Exposed”: All capital Work not identified as concealed.
T. “Project Site”: Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.
U. “As-Built Documents”: Drawings and other records that are maintained by the Contractor to record all conditions which exist when the building construction is completed. This includes both the elements of the project itself and existing elements that are encountered during the course of project construction.
V. “Record Drawings”: Shows construction changes in the project and the final location of all services, lines, outlets, and connections including underground and concealed items. The “record” drawings shall be compiled by the Architect based on the working as-built drawings and revised in accordance with the marked up drawings submitted by the Contractor.
W. “Shop Drawings”: Drawings, diagrams, illustrations, charts, brochures, and other data that are prepared by Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor, for some portion of the work.
X. “Samples”: Physical examples furnished to illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship, and to establish standards by which the work will be judged.
Y. “General Conditions”: The standardized contractual provisions describing the responsibilities, rights and relationships of the Owner and Contractor under the construction contract.
Z. “Contract Limit Lines”: A limit line or perimeter line established on the drawings or elsewhere in the contract documents defining the boundaries of the site available to the
contractor for construction purposes.
AA. "to do", "provide", "furnish", "install", etc., in these Specifications or on Drawings are directions given to the Contractor;
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER REFERENCES 01 42 00-4 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
1.4 OWNER AGREEMENTS
A. Cornell University and the Tompkins-Cortland Counties Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division have entered into an agreement. The local unions which are members of the Tompkins-Cortland Counties Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division are as follows: Local #241 - International Brotherhood of Electrical Workers Local #267 - United Association of Plumbers and Steamfitters Local #281 - United Brotherhood of Carpenters Local #3NY - International Union of Bricklayers and Allied Craftworkers Local #178 - International Union of Painters and Allied Trades
Local #112 - International Brotherhood of Sheetmetal Workers Local #785 - Laborers International Union of North America The definition of craft maintenance as applied to this agreement shall be as follows: All work associated with the demolition, repair, replacement, improvement to or construction of equipment, buildings, structures, utilities, and/or system or components thereof. Craft maintenance for trades assistants shall be limited to work assigned to individuals employed as building trade laborers and which directly assists the craft work performed by other employees covered by this agreement; the Employer is free to assign such work; provided, however, such assignment does not fall within the craft performed by other employees covered by this agreement.
1.5 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.
D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the organizations responsible for the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER REFERENCES 01 42 00-5 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253 Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202) 272-0080 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from Access Board
www.access-board.gov CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-1800 Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1800 www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html FS Federal Specification (215) 697-6257 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil Available from Defense Standardization Program www.dps.dla.mil Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-8925 www.gsa.gov Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800 www.nibs.org UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253 Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080 www.access-board.gov
1.6 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (703) 358-2960 www.aluminum.org AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241-7333 www.aaadm.com AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 www.aabchq.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 www.aamanet.org
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and (202) 624-5800 Transportation Officials www.transportation.org
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER REFERENCES 01 42 00-6 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) (919) 549-8141 www.aatcc.org ABAA Air Barrier Association of America (866) 956-5888
www.airbarrier.org ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155 www.abma-dc.org ACI ACI International (248) 848-3700 (American Concrete Institute) www.aci-int.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 www.concrete-pipe.org AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530 www.aeic.org AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878 www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700 AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 www.aga.org AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118 www.agc.org AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955 www.aham.org AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960 www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 www.aia.org (202) 626-7300 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100
www.steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 www.aitc-glulam.org ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network) ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700 www.alsc.org
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER REFERENCES 01 42 00-7 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 www.amca.org
ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. (505) 522-1437 www.aosaseed.com APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 www.apawood.org APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989 www.archprecast.org API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 www.api.org ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800 www.ari.org ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917 www.asphaltroofing.org ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and (800) 527-4723 Air-Conditioning Engineers (404) 636-8400 www.ashrae.org ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (973) 882-1170 www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9585 (American Society for Testing and Materials International)
www.astm.org AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (800) 449-8811 www.awinet.org (703) 733-0600 AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association (334) 874-9800 www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 www.aws.org (305) 443-9353
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER REFERENCES 01 42 00-8 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.buildershardware.com BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 www.bia.org BICSI BICSI (800) 242-7405 www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991 BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) 342-4772 www.bissc.org CCC Carpet Cushion Council (203) 637-1312 www.carpetcushion.org CDA Copper Development Association (800) 232-3282 www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 www.cganet.com CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462 CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 www.cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137 www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 www.chainlinkinfo.org CPA Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604 www.pbmdf.com CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772
www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607 CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846 www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 www.crsi.org CSI Cast Stone Institute (770) 972-3011 www.caststone.org
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER REFERENCES 01 42 00-9 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300
CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700 www.cedarbureau.org CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087 www.cti.org DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 www.dhi.org EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500 www.eia.org EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 www.eima.com (770) 968-7945 EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (703) 295-5000 www.ejdc.org EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.ejma.org ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937 www.esda.org FMG FM Global (401) 275-3000 www.fmglobal.com FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850 www.fluidsealing.com FSC Forest Stewardship Council 49 228 367 66 0 www.fsc.org GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208
www.glasswebsite.com GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400 www.greenseal.org GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522-8440 www.geosynthetic-institute.org HI Hydraulic Institute (888) 786-7744 www.pumps.org (973) 267-9700
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER REFERENCES 01 42 00-10 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200 www.gamanet.org
HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 www.hpva.org HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550 www.hpwhite.com IBR Institute of Boiler & Radiation Manufacturers ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369 www.icea.net ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830 www.icri.org IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 www.iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 www.ieee.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000 www.iesna.org IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847) 255-1561 www.iest.org IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.igcc.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) 233-1510 www.igmaonline.org ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426 www.iliai.com ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 www.iso.ch
Available from ANSI (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464-7732 www.issfa.net (702) 567-8150 ITS Intertek (800) 345-3851 www.intertek.com (713) 407-3500
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER REFERENCES 01 42 00-11 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11 www.itu.int/home KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690
www.kcma.org LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA) LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 www.lightning.org (804) 314-8955 MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 www.mbma.com MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (847) 480-9138 www.maplefloor.org MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (312) 644-6610 www.metalframingmfg.org MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190 MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222 www.marble-institute.com MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937 www.paintinfo.com MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and (703) 281-6613 Fittings Industry Inc. www.mss-hq.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405 www.naamm.org NACE NACE International (800) 797-6623 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228-6200 www.nace.org
NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926 www.nadca.com NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084 www.naima.org NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 www.nbgqa.com
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER REFERENCES 01 42 00-12 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222 www.ncaa.org
NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 www.ncma.org NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248-9094 www.ncpi.org NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-3550
www.ncta.com NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 www.nebb.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 www.necanet.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901 www.nelma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org NETA International Electrical Testing Association (888) 300-6382 www.netaworld.org (303) 697-8441 NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972-6900 www.nfhs.org NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555 (National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000 www.nfpa.org NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776 www.nfrc.org NGA National Glass Association (866) 342-5642 www.glass.org (703) 442-4890 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318 www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 www.nlga.org NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526-5016
www.nofma.org
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER REFERENCES 01 42 00-13 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622
www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010 www.nsf.org NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415 www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788 NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) 323-9736 www.ntma.com (540) 751-0930 NYBFU New York Board of Fire Underwriters (212) 227-3700 www.nybfu.org PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 www.pci.org PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322 www.pdca.com (314) 514-7322 PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720 PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929 http://pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu PLANET Professional Landcare Network (800) 395-2522 www.landcarenetwork.org PTI Post-Tensioning Institute (602) 870-7540 www.post-tensioning.org RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections (800) 644-2400 www.boltcouncil.org (312) 670-2400 RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340-8580
www.rfci.com RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225-7339 www.calredwood.org (415) 382-0662 SAE SAE International (877) 606-7323 www.sae.org (724) 776-4841 SBI Steel Boiler Institute
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER REFERENCES 01 42 00-14 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458-4647 www.sdi.org
SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 www.steeldoor.org SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (516) 294-5424 www.sefalabs.com SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234
www.sgcc.org SIA Security Industry Association (703) 683-2075 www.siaonline.org SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995 www.steeljoist.org SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991 www.smacentral.org SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980 National Association www.smacna.org SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100 www.smpte.org SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154 www.sprayfoam.org SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 www.spib.org SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781) 647-7026 www.spri.org SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772 www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331 STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 www.steeltank.com SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333
www.steelwindows.com SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974 www.swrionline.org
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER REFERENCES 01 42 00-15 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 www.tileusa.com
TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic (703) 907-7700 Industries Alliance www.tiaonline.org TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700 www.masonrysociety.org TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (703) 683-1010 www.tpinst.org TPI Turfgrass Producers International (847) 649-5555 www.turfgrasssod.org TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312) 670-4177 www.tileroofing.org UFPO Underground Facilities Protective Organization (800) 962-7962 www.ufpo.org (800) 962-7811 UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577 www.ul.com (847) 272-8800 UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 www.uni-bell.org USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (202) 828-7422 www.usgbc.org WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869 www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700 WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506-4636 www.windowcoverings.org WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 www.wdma.com
WI Woodwork Institute (916) 372-9943 www.wicnet.org WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591 WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333 www.wsrca.com (650) 570-5441
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER REFERENCES 01 42 00-16 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 www.wwpa.org
B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-4100 www.iapmo.org ICC International Code Council (888) 422-7233 www.iccsafe.org (703) 931-4533 ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587 www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543
NEC National Electric Code
C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CE Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-7923 DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 www.commerce.gov
DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-6257 http://.dodssp.daps.dla.mil DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220 www.energy.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167 www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322 www.faa.gov FCC Federal Communications Commission (888) 225-5322 www.fcc.gov
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER REFERENCES 01 42 00-17 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332 www.fda.gov GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111
www.gsa.gov HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112 www.hud.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000 www.lbl.gov NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 www.nist.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742 www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999 PBS Public Building Service (See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690-7694 www.osophs.dhhs.gov/ophs RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540 (See USDA) SD State Department (202) 647-4000 www.state.gov TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934 www.nas.edu/trb USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 www.usda.gov USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000 www.usps.com
2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION - NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 42 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL
CORNELL STORE EM POWER QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-1 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain an effective Contractor Quality Control (CQC) program and perform sufficient inspections and tests of all items of work, including those of Subcontractors, to ensure compliance with Contract Documents. Include surveillance and tests specified in the technical sections of the Specifications. Furnish appropriate facilities,
instruments, and testing devices required for performance of the quality control function. Controls must be adequate to cover construction operations and be keyed to the construction sequence. Construction shall not begin until the Owner has approved the CQC program.
1.2 CONTROL OF ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION
A. Include a control system for the following phases of inspection:
1. Pre-Installation Meeting. For all sections where pre-installations are defined, the Contractor shall arrange for a pre-installation meeting. When practical, pre-installation
meetings shall be scheduled to take place on the same day as regularly schedule progress meetings. The Contractor shall make available, during this meeting, all approved submittals and products.
a. Agenda to include the following:
i. Appointment
ii. Appointment of official representatives of participants in the Project.
iii. Review of existing conditions and affected work, and testing thereof as required.
iv. Review of installation procedures and requirements.
v. Review of environmental and site condition requirements.
vi. Schedule of the applicable portions of the Work.
vii. Schedule of submission of samples, color chips, and items for Owners consideration.
viii. Requirements for temporary facilities, site sign, offices, storage sheds, utilities, fences, Section 01500.
ix. Requirements for notification for reviews. Allow a minimum of 48 hour notice to Architect for review of the Work.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL
CORNELL STORE EM POWER QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-2 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
x. Requirements for inspections and tests, as applicable. Schedule and undertake inspections and tests in accordance with Section 01410.
xi. Delivery schedule of specified equipment.
xii. Special safety requirements and procedures.
b. The following minimum personnel shall be at the meeting:
i. Project Manager.
ii. Project Field Supervisor
iii. Subcontractor
iv. Architect’s Representative
v. Owner’s Representative
vi. Testing Agency, when applicable
2. Preparatory Inspection. Perform this inspection prior to beginning work on any definable feature of work. Include a review of contract requirements with the supervisors directly responsible for the performance of the work; check to assure that materials, products, and equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved; check
to assure that provisions have been made for required control testing; examine the work area to ascertain that preliminary work has been completed; physically examine materials and equipment to assure that they conform to shop drawings and data and that the materials and equipment are on hand.
3. Initial Inspection. Perform this inspection as soon as work commences on a representative portion of a particular feature of workmanship review control testing for compliance with contract requirements.
4. Follow-up Inspections. Perform these inspections on a regular basis to assure continuing compliance with contract requirements until completion of that particular work.
1.3 CONTROL OF OFF-SITE OPERATIONS
A. Perform factory quality control inspections for items fabricated or assembled off-site as opposed to "off-the-shelf" items. The CQC Representative at the fabricating plant shall be responsible for release of the fabricated items for shipment to the job site. The CQC Representative at the job site shall receive the item and note any damage incurred during shipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting and maintaining the item in good condition throughout the period of on-site and during erection or installation. Although any item found to be faulty may be rejected before its use, final acceptance of an item by the
Owner is based on its satisfactory incorporation into the work and acceptance of the completed project.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL
CORNELL STORE EM POWER QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-3 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
1.4 TESTING
A. The Owner may engage the services of an independent testing laboratory to confirm that an installed item or element of work conforms to the Specification and workmanship requirements.
1.5 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. The Owner shall designate a Representative to monitor the progress and execution of the work. The Representative shall have the authority to call for test samples, to approve or to reject work performed and to stop work in progress, if, in its opinion, the work is not in conformance with the Contract Documents. The Representative shall not be authorized to make changes or interpretations of the Contract Documents.
1. The Contractor shall maintain a project Deficiency/Issues Log in e-Builder to track non-conforming materials or sub-standard workmanship identified by Owner’s Representative.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 45 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-1 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT AND CONTROLS MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain all temporary facilities and services of every kind, as required by the Contractor and by its subcontractors for their performance of the Work and compliance with the Contract Documents, and shall remove such facilities and complete such services upon the completion of all other work, or as Cornell University may
direct.
B. The Contractor shall obtain all required permits and approvals for and shall provide, construct, or install, as well as operate, maintain, service and remove temporary facilities and
services.
1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Choice of materials, as suitable for the accomplishment of the intended purpose, is the Contractor’s option.
B. Materials may be new or used, but must not violate requirements of applicable codes, standards and specifications.
2.2 TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES
A. Provide first aid equipment and supplies, with qualified personnel continuously available to render first aid at the site.
B. Provide a sign, posted at the telephone, listing the telephone numbers for emergency medical services: Physicians, ambulance services and hospitals.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-2 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT AND CONTROLS MARCH 22, 2021
2.3 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION
A. Provide a fire protection and prevention program for employees and personnel at the site. Any fire watches as a result of construction operations are the responsibility of the Contractor. Comply with NFPA 241. Develop, manage, and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
1. Impairments “Fire Code of NYS Section 901.7”. Impairment; “the removal of fire alarm devices or sprinkler system coverage in a building.” There are two different levels of impairments
a. Partial Impairment. The removal of fire alarm devices or sprinkler system coverage via control valve in the immediate area of where work is to be performed.
- Basic Impairment Notification will be sent to Local Authority Having Jurisdiction and FM Global.
- No fire watch will be required in most cases.
b. Full System Impairment. The complete removal of a fire alarm “system” or sprinkler “system”. Impairment of both the fire alarm system and sprinkler system at the same time is not allowed.
- Full System Impairment Notification will be sent to local Authority Having Jurisdiction, FM Global, Ithaca Fire Department Officers, Building Manager, Maintenance Manager, and Customer Service.
- Fire Watch will be required and will need the Fire Watch Person’s name and contact information. Cornell EH&S does not perform the fire watch, it is the responsibility of the Contractor.
B. Equipment:
1. Provide and maintain fire extinguishing equipment ready for instant use at all areas of the Project and at specific areas of critical fire hazard.
2. Hand extinguishers of the types and sizes recommended by the National Board of Fire Underwriters to control fires from particular hazards.
3. Construction period use of permanent fire protection system.
4. Water hoses connected to an adequate water pressure and supply system to reach each area or level of construction upon building enclosure or heating of the building.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-3 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT AND CONTROLS MARCH 22, 2021
5. Maintain existing standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Provide additional temporary hoses where required to comply with requirements. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. Provide
hoses of sufficient length to protect construction areas.
6. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, siamese connections, standpipes, temporary fire-protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for
firefighting.
7. Where existing or temporary fire protection services are being replaced with new fire protection services, do not remove or impair existing or temporary services until new services are placed into operation and use.
8. At earliest feasible date in each area of Project, complete installation of permanent fire-protection facility and systems, including connected services, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities. Protect and maintain permanent fire protection system. Repair or replace any components damaged during construction.
C. Enforce fire-safety discipline:
1. Store combustible and volatile materials in an isolated, protected location.
2. Avoid accumulations of flammable debris and waste in or about the Project.
3. Prohibit smoking in the vicinity of hazardous conditions.
4. There is NO SMOKING allowed on construction sites located in any occupied building. Smoking is prohibited in all Cornell University buildings.
5. Closely supervise welding and torch-cutting operations in the vicinity of combustible materials and volatile conditions.
6. Supervise locations and operations of portable heating units and fuel.
D. Maintain fire extinguishing equipment in working condition, with current inspection certificate attached to each extinguisher.
E. Welding or burning operations shall be conducted under a Hot Work Permit issued in accordance with Section 01 41 00. Where such work is permitted, the Contractor shall provide an approved fire extinguisher in good operating condition within easy reach of the operating personnel. In each instance, obtain prior approval of Cornell University Environmental Health & Safety.
F. Advise Cornell University Environmental Health & Safety of any items affecting Life Safety, e.g., road blockages, exit closing, etc.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-4 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT AND CONTROLS MARCH 22, 2021
2.4 CONSTRUCTION AIDS
A. Provide construction aids and equipment required to assure safety for personnel and to facilitate the execution of the Work; Scaffolds, staging, ladders, stairs, ramps, runways, platforms, railings, hoists, cranes, chutes, fall protection, harness, tie-off points, and other such equipment.
B. When permanent stair framing is in place, provide temporary treads, platforms and railings, for use by construction personnel.
C. Maintain all equipment in a safe condition.
2.5 SUPPORTS
A. The Contractor shall include cost of all materials and labor necessary to provide all supports, beams, angles, hangers, rods, bases, braces, etc. to properly support the Contract Work. All supports, etc. shall meet the approval of the Architect.
B. Any and all supports that are of “custom” fabrication or installation shall be designed by the Contractor’s NYS licensed PE with stamped & signed shop drawings and calculations provided for same.
2.6 TEMPORARY WATER CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall provide, maintain and operate pumps required to keep the Work free of water at all times.
B. Dispose of all water with due care and shall not infringe on the rights of others on the Site, of adjacent property owners and of the public. All cost in connection with the removal of such water shall be paid by the Contractor.
2.7 TREE, PLANT AND LAWN PROTECTION
A. Preserve and protect existing trees, plants and lawns at the site which are designated to remain, and those adjacent to the site.
B. Consult with Owner, and remove agreed-on roots and branches which interfere with construction.
1. Employ certified arborist to remove, and to treat cuts.
C. Provide temporary fences to a height of six feet, around each, or around each group of trees and plants. Provide temporary lawn protection to prevent soil compaction. Reference Cornell University Design Standards and Details for wood and chain fencing below.
D. Protect root zones of trees, plants and lawn areas:
1. Do not allow vehicular traffic or parking.
2. Do not store materials or products.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-5 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT AND CONTROLS MARCH 22, 2021
3. Prevent dumping of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids.
4. Prevent puddling or continuous running water.
E. Carefully supervise excavating, grading and filling, and subsequent construction operations to prevent damage.
F. Replace, or suitably repair, trees, plants and lawn areas designated to remain which are damaged or destroyed due to construction operations.
G. Roots 2 inches or larger that are damaged or cut during construction are to be sawed off close to the tree side of the excavation by certified arborist.
H. During the leafing-out period in the spring, extra care should be exercised to reduce root damage such as keeping exposed roots wet, saturating soil when backfilling around roots, and backfilling as soon as possible.
I. Consult Cornell University Grounds Department for mitigation of root or tree damage.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-6 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT AND CONTROLS MARCH 22, 2021
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-7 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT AND CONTROLS MARCH 22, 2021
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-8 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT AND CONTROLS MARCH 22, 2021
2.8 PERSONNEL, PUBLIC AND EMPLOYEE PROTECTION
A. Provide guardrails, barricades, fences, footways, tunnels and other devices necessary to protect all personnel, employees, and the public, against hazards on, adjacent to or accessing the construction site.
1. Provide signs, warning lights, signals, flags and illumination as necessary to alert persons to hazards and to provide safe, adequate visibility in areas of hazards.
2. Closed sidewalks need to be indicated with OSHA-approved signs, as well as, proper barricades.
3. Provide flag personnel as necessary to guide vehicles, protect personnel, public and employees.
2.9 ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING AREAS
A. Provide adequate temporary roads and walks to achieve all-weather access into the site from public thoroughfares, and within and adjacent to the site as necessary to provide uninterrupted access to field offices, work and storage areas.
B. Grade and provide drainage facilities to assure runoff of rainwater and to avoid blockage of flow from adjacent areas.
C. During dry weather wet down temporary unpaved areas when necessary to prevent blowing dust.
2.10 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS
A. No Contractor signs to be displayed at the project site, unless authorized by the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall provide and install project identification signage as discussed and approved by the Owner.
2.11 SECURITY
A. The Contractor shall provide security services as required to protect the interests of the Owner.
2.12 FIELD OFFICES
A. The Owner shall designate a space within the facility to serve as a field office for the use of the Contractor and Owner.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-9 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT AND CONTROLS MARCH 22, 2021
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Consult with Owner, review site conditions and factors which affect construction procedures and temporary facilities, including adjacent properties and public facilities which may be affected by execution of the work.
1. Designate the locations and extent of temporary construction, storage, and other temporary facilities and controls required for the expeditious accomplishment of the Work.
2. Allow space for use of the site by Owner and by other contractors, as required by Contract Documents.
3.2 GENERAL
A. Comply with applicable requirements specified in sections of Division 02 through 40.
B. Make work structurally, mechanically and electrically sound throughout.
C. Install work in a neat and orderly manner.
D. Maintain, clean, service and repair facilities to provide continuous usage, and to the quality specified for the original installation.
E. Relocate facilities as required by progress of construction, by storage or work requirements, and to accommodate requirements of Owner and other contractors employed at the site.
F. Keep the site, at all times during the progress of the Work, free from accumulation of waste matter or rubbish and shall confine its apparatus, materials and operations of its workers to the limits prescribed except as the latter may be extended with the approval of the Owner’s Representative. Cleaning of the structure or structures must be performed daily and removal of waste matter or rubbish must be performed at least once a week.
G. Contractor shall at all times keep access road and public roads clean of mud and construction debris and maintain dust control to the satisfaction of the Owner.
3.3 REMOVAL
A. Completely remove temporary structures, materials, equipment and services:
1. When construction needs can be met by use of permanent construction.
2. At completion of the Project.
B. Repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Clean after removal.
C. Restore existing or permanent facilities used for temporary purposes to specified, or to original condition. ***END OF SECTION 01 50 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-1 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain temporary utilities required by all trades for construction. Remove on completion of Work.
B. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for temporary connections and distribution.
1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with National Electric Code, current edition.
B. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations and with utility company requirements.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the required usage, must not create unsafe conditions, and must not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards.
2.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY, LIGHTING AND WATER
A. The Contractor shall have access to the Owner's water and electric power for constructing the Work. Temporary utility connections shall be made by the Contractor as close to its operations as possible as long as such connections do not over-load the capacity of the Owner's utilities or interfere with its customary utilization thereof. Utility access points shall be determined in cooperation with and acceptable to the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the economic use of the Owner's Water and Power. The Owner will pay for the water and power consumed in the construction of the Work as long as economical usage of these utilities is maintained. The Owner reserves the right to
meter and charge for the power and water consumed if in the opinion of the Owner the usage of these utilities is not economically conducted by the Contractor. In such an event, the Owner shall give three (3) days written notice to the Contractor of its intentions to meter and charge for temporary utilities used by the Contractor.
C. All temporary power systems including wiring shall be removed by the Contractor when no longer required.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-2 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
D. The minimum temporary lighting to be provided is at the rate of fifty foot candles, is to be maintained in each room and changed as required when interior walls are being erected. The required temporary lighting must be maintained for twenty-four (24) hours a day and seven (7) days a week at all stair levels and in all corridors below ground; in any and all egress; in
all other spaces temporary lighting is to be maintained only during working hours. All temporary wiring and equipment shall be in conformity with the National Electric Code.
E. The minimum temporary outdoor security lighting to be provided is as follows:
1. Along the perimeter of the site fence, consisting of vandal-resistant light fixtures with HID lamps, located 150 foot center, mounted on the inside of the construction fence.
2. Lighting for temporary pedestrian paths and roadways, to provide a minimum of 0.1 foot-candle on the path of travel.
F. Three-phase temporary power circuits shall be installed as required to operate construction equipment of the various trades and to Install and test equipment such as pumps and elevators. The Contractor shall install and maintain temporary or permanent service for the permanently installed building equipment such as sump pumps, boilers, boiler controls, fans, pumps, so that such equipment may be operated when required and so ordered by the Owner's Representative for drainage or for temporary heat.
G. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner or the Owner's Representative for approval a proposed schedule of all utility shutdowns and cutovers of all types which may be required in connection with the Work. Such schedule shall provide a minimum of four (4) weeks advance notice to the Owner prior to the time of
the proposed shutdown and cutover. The Contractor shall be responsible for all charges relating to shutdowns.
H. Discontinuance, Changes and Removal
The Contractor shall:
1. Discontinue all temporary services required by the Contract when so directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative. The discontinuance of any such temporary service prior to the completion of the Work shall not render the Owner liable for any additional cost entailed thereby.
2. Remove and relocate such temporary facilities as directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, and shall restore the Site and the Work to a condition satisfactory to the Owner.
2.3 TEMPORARY USE OF ELEVATOR
A. Use of Existing Elevator
1. If the Contractor elects to use the existing elevator equipment, the Contractor shall:
a. Provide adequate protection for such equipment and shall operate such equipment within a capacity not to exceed that allowed by law, rule or regulation.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-3 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
b. Provide for the maintenance and cleaning of the elevator equipment as approved by the Owner's Representative.
c. Prior to start of construction, accurately record the condition of the existing elevator. Promptly repair or replace items that are damaged as a result of Contractor’s use. Service calls that arise as a result of Contractor misuse will be charged to the Contractor. At Substantial Completion, restore elevators to condition existing before initial use.
d. Use only elevators designated by Owner’s Representative at dates and times designated by Owner’s Representative. Dates and times available for Contractor’s use shall be scheduled with, and at the convenience of, the Owner, and may vary during the course of the Project.
e. Owner will not provide elevator operators or other monitoring of elevator use.
f. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity.
g. Provide code compliant protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator maintenance contractor to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.
h. Procure and coordinate the elevator maintenance contractor to gain access to the elevator shaft as required to complete the work
2.4 TEMPORARY CONTRACTOR TELEPHONE SERVICE
A. Site Superintendent or their Representative shall carry a cellular telephone at all times.
B. Provide phone number to Cornell project representatives for communication during Work.
2.5 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. The Owner shall designate sanitary facilities to be utilized by the Contractor during construction. The Contractor shall maintain neat, clean and sanitary conditions. The Contractor shall be responsible for costs associated with excessive custodial services associated with such usage.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 REMOVAL
A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer required.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary facilities.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES
CORNELL STORE EM POWER TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-4 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
C. Restore existing and permanent facilities used for temporary services to specified, or to original, condition.
***END OF SECTION 01 51 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION
CORNELL STORE EM POWER STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-1 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 66 00 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Receive, pile, store and handle all materials, equipment and other items incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work, including items furnished by the Owner in a careful and prudent manner and shall protect them against loss or damage from every source.
B. Obscure from public view, in a manner acceptable to the Owner, staging and storage areas.
1.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft.
B. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction space.
C. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.
D. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installation.
E. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct and products are undamaged.
F. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement or damage.
1.3 ON-SITE STORAGE
A. Materials stored on the Site shall be neatly piled and protected, and shall be stored in a neat and orderly manner in locations that shall not interfere with the progress of the Work or with the daily functioning of the Institution.
B. Materials subject to weather damage shall be protected against the weather by floored weatherproof temporary storage sheds.
C. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION
CORNELL STORE EM POWER STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-2 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
D. Storage piles and sheds shall be located within the area designated as the Staging Area. The Contractor shall work to insure that the condition of the staging area has no negative impact on the Campus, visually or otherwise; and that outside of that area. The Contractor has no impact at all on the Campus.
E. Materials stored within the building shall be distributed in such a manner as to avoid overloading of the structural frame, and never shall be concentrated in such a manner as to exceed the equivalent of 50 pounds per square foot uniformly distributed loading. Stored
materials shall be moved if they interfere with the progress of the work.
F. Should it become necessary during the course of the Work to move stored materials or equipment, the Contractor, at the direction of the Owner or the Owner's Representative, shall move such materials or equipment.
1.4 CAMPUS SITE / PALM ROAD STORAGE
A. All property including construction materials and equipment stored at the Palm Road or other Campus site, shall be stored at the Contractor’s sole risk. The Contractor is solely responsible
for repair or replacement of property due to any cause of loss. Due to work at the Palm Road lot, staging space is limited and not guaranteed to be provided. If staging space is needed, a request should be submitted to the Project Manager.
B. The Contractor agrees to hold Cornell harmless from any accident or injury occurring at Palm Road storage or other assigned Campus site associated with the Contractor’s storage.
C. The Contractor understands that Cornell makes “no” warranty regarding any security at the Palm Road or other assigned Campus site.
D. The Contractor agrees that it is solely responsible for any cleanup of any site contamination caused by the Contractor’s storage or storage operations and the Contractor agrees to pay for cleanup of any contamination and restore the site back to the same condition it was found.
E. It shall be assumed that the Contractor is responsible for site contamination unless the Contractor has reported condition prior to moving storage materials and equipment onto the site. Each Contractor shall be responsible for their own general area whether defined formally or not but in cases where pollutants have traveled or are found in the public areas used by all contractors, the Contractor agrees as follows:
1. If it cannot be determined who is responsible for site contamination after an investigation, all contractors who could be responsible based upon location of the incident agree to share the expense of cleanup equally.
F. No storage of hazardous materials or environmental contaminants is permitted at the Palm Road or any Campus site. All barrels must have labels affixed identifying contents.
G. The Contractor will be responsible for securing and maintaining any Campus site area designated to them. All contractor trailers or storage containers located on Cornell Campus Property will need to file for a building permit with the Town of Ithaca. If the trailer/container is there longer than 180 days, the trailer/container will need to meet the Building Code requirements of a permanent structure. The trailer/container will need a means of egress that can be operated from the inside and a fire extinguisher. The contractor will also need to file for a demolition permit when the trailer/container is removed.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION
CORNELL STORE EM POWER STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-3 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
H. Unoccupied storage containers not within the project fence shall be labeled in the Cornell standard. Signs customized for the project shall be ordered from Ithaca Plastics, Inc., 305 West Green Street, Ithaca, New York 14850, Phone - 607.272.8232, Fax - 607.277.2579, Email – db@ithacaplastics.com.
1.5 PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall provide security personnel and adopt other security measures as may be necessary to adequately protect materials and equipment stored at the site. The Contractor shall be obligated to replace or pay for all materials and equipment including items furnished
by the Owner which have been damaged or stolen prior to completion of the Work.
B. Protection of Utilities
1. If during the course of the Project, it is necessary to work adjacent to existing utilities, pipelines, structures and equipment, the Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect existing facilities from damage.
2. Locations of utilities as shown on the Contract Documents are approximate only. The Contractor shall excavate or otherwise locate to verify existing utilities in advance of its operation.
C. Protective Covering
1. All finished surfaces shall be protected by the Contractor as follows:
a. Door and window sills and the jambs and soffits of openings used as passageways or through which material is handled, shall be cased and protected adequately against possible damage resulting from the conduct of the work of all trades.
b. All surfaces shall be clean and not marred upon delivery of the building to the Owner. The Contractor shall, without extra compensation, replace all blocks, gypsum board, plaster, paint, tile, and all other surfaces, whether or not protected, which are damaged, and shall refinish (including painting as specified) to satisfaction of Owner.
c. Tight wood sheathing shall be laid under any materials that are stored on finished concrete surfaces and planking must be laid before moving any materials over these finished areas. Wheelbarrows used over such areas shall have rubber tires on wheels.
d. Contractor has the responsibility for protection of carpeting and all finish flooring during all phases of the work including after installation.
e. All floors exposed to view as a floor finish shall be protected by overlaying with plywood in all areas subject to construction traffic within and without the building, special care shall be taken to protect all stair finish surfaces including but not limited to flooring, wood in-fill stairs, cabinetry, counters, equipment, etc.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION
CORNELL STORE EM POWER STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-4 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
1.6 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
A. Protect installed products, including Owner-provided products, and control traffic in immediate area to prevent damage from subsequent operations.
B. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, corners, and jambs, sills, and soffits of openings in and adjacent to traffic areas.
C. Cover walls and floors of elevator cabins, and jambs of cab doors, when elevators are used by construction personnel.
D. Protect finish floors and stairs from dirt, wear, and damage:
1. Secure heavy sheet goods or similar protective materials in place, in areas subject to foot traffic.
2. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas subject to movement of heavy objects.
3. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas where storage of products will occur.
E. Protect waterproofed and roofed surfaces:
1. Restrict use of surfaces for traffic of any kind, and for storage of products.
2. When an activity is mandatory, obtain recommendations for protection of surfaces from manufacturer. Install protection and remove on completion of activity. Restrict use of adjacent unprotected areas.
F. Restrict traffic of any kind across planted lawn and landscape areas.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 66 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 71 23 Ithaca, New York FIELD ENGINEERING
CORNELL STORE EM POWER FIELD ENGINEERING 01 71 23-1 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 71 23 FIELD ENGINEERING
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering services required for the Project.
1. Survey work required in execution of the Project.
2. Verify grades, lines, levels and dimensions shown on Drawings.
3. Lay out Work from established control points and bench marks.
4. Coordinate the Work of all trades.
5. It may be necessary at times to discontinue portions of Contractor's work in order that the Owner's Representative may check measurements or surveys without interruptions or other interferences that might impair the accuracy of the results. At any time, on request of the Owner's Representative, Contractor shall discontinue its work to such extent as may be necessary for this purpose and shall cooperate in all reasonable means to the extent of providing labor, tools, or materials to assist the Owner's Representative in making measurements and surveys.
6. Notwithstanding anything set forth above, it shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to complete the works within the tolerances of lines and grades as given on the drawings. No direct payment or claim for additional compensation will be allowed the Contractor for any work or delay occasioned by the Owner's Representative establishing or checking lines or grades or making other measurements, and no extension of time will be allowed for such delays.
B. Owner's Representative will identify existing control points and property line corner stakes indicated on the drawings, as required.
1.2 QUALIFICATION OF SURVEYOR
A. The Surveyor shall be a registered civil engineer or registered land surveyor, licensed in the state in which the Project is located and acceptable to the Owner.
1.3 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS
A. Basic horizontal and vertical control points for the Project are those designated on drawings.
B. Locate and protect control points prior to occupation of the site, and preserve all reference points during construction.
1. Make no changes or relocations without prior written approval of the Architect and Owner.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 71 23 Ithaca, New York FIELD ENGINEERING
CORNELL STORE EM POWER FIELD ENGINEERING 01 71 23-2 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
2. Report to Owner when any reference point is lost or destroyed, or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations.
3. Require surveyor to replace reference points which may be lost or destroyed.
a. Establish replacements based on original survey control.
C. The Contractor shall provide and shall maintain axis lines on each floor and shall establish and shall maintain grade marks 4' 0" above the finished floor on each floor level.
D. The Contractor shall furnish such stakes and other required equipment, tools and materials, and all labor as may be required in laying out any part of the Work.
1.4 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
A. Prior to start of construction operations, review and verify figures shown on Drawings and on surveys furnished by Owner.
B. Establish lines and levels, locate and lay out, by instrumentation and similar appropriate means for site improvements, stakes for grading, fill and topsoil replacement, utility slopes and invert elevations, batter boards for structures, foundations, column locations and floor levels, and controlling lines and levels required for the mechanical and electrical trades.
C. From time to time, verify layouts by the same methods.
1.5 RECORDS
A. Maintain a complete, accurate log of all control and survey work as it progresses.
1. Make available to Architect and Owner on request: field books, notes, logs and other data developed in performing survey and control work.
2. Maintain a record plan at field office for the information and use of all parties, recording reference points, control points and bench marks.
B. On completion of foundations and major site improvements, prepare a certified survey showing all dimensions, locations, angles and elevations of construction and turn over to Owner. Submit copies of certified survey in accordance with Section 01 78 39 - Record Documents.
C. When all enclosing walls are complete, certify the location and plumb of the walls.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit written qualifications of surveyor to Architect and Owner prior to starting survey work.
B. Submit name and address of Professional Engineer to the Architect.
C. Submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering work.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 71 23 Ithaca, New York FIELD ENGINEERING
CORNELL STORE EM POWER FIELD ENGINEERING 01 71 23-3 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
D. Submit certificate signed by registered engineer or registered surveyor certifying that elevations and improvements are in conformance, or nonconformance, with Contract Documents.
1. Indicate on record drawings all variations from Contract Drawings.
2. Indicate horizontal locations and elevations of all existing underground utilities encountered during excavation and construction.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 71 23***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
CORNELL STORE EM POWER CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-1 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT AND REPAIRING MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting and patching, including excavation and backfill, required to complete the Work or to:
1. Make its several parts fit together properly.
2. Uncover portions of the Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work.
3. Remove and replace defective work.
4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents.
5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing.
6. Repair or restore existing or new surfaces and finishes to match adjacent existing or new surfaces and finishes.
B. Upon written instructions of the Owner’s Representative:
1. Uncover designated portions of Work for Architect's observation of covered work.
2. Remove samples of installed materials for testing beyond that specified.
3. Remove work to provide for the alteration of previously incorrectly installed work.
4. Patch work uncovered or removed.
C. Do not damage or endanger any work by cutting or altering the Work or any part thereof.
D. Do not cut or otherwise alter the work of the Owner except with the written consent of the Owner’s Representative.
E. Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with the original structure.
F. Openings and Chases
1. Build openings, including but not limited to channels, chases and flues as required to complete the Work as set forth in the Contract.
2. After installation and completion of any work for which openings have been provided, build in, over, and around and finish all such openings as required to complete the Work.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
CORNELL STORE EM POWER CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-2 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT AND REPAIRING MARCH 22, 2021
3. Furnish and install all sleeves, inserts, hangers and supports required for the execution of the Work.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit a written request to the Architect prior to executing any cutting, alteration or excavation which affects the work of the Owner, or which may affect the structural safety of any portion of the Project. Include:
1. Identification of the Project.
2. Description of the affected work.
3. The necessity for doing the cutting, alteration or excavation.
4. The effect on the work of the Owner’s property, or on the structural integrity of the Project.
5. Description of the proposed work:
a. The scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation.
b. Contractor and trades who will execute the work.
c. Products proposed to be used.
d. The extent of refinishing to be done.
6. Alternatives to cutting, patching or excavation.
7. Designation of the responsibility for the cost of cutting and patching.
8. Written permission of any separate contractor whose work will be affected.
B. Should conditions of the work or the schedule indicate a change of products from the original installation, submit a request for substitution as specified in Section 01 25 00 - Substitutions and Product Options.
C. Submit a written notice to the Architect and the Owner designating the date and the time the work will be uncovered.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would change their load-carrying capacity for load-deflection ratio.
1. Obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching structural elements, including but not limited to the following:
a. Foundation construction
b. Bearing and retaining walls
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
CORNELL STORE EM POWER CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-3 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT AND REPAIRING MARCH 22, 2021
c. Structural concrete
d. Structural steel and lintels
e. Structural decking
f. Miscellaneous structural metals
g. Exterior wall back-up supports and anchoring systems
h. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment supports
i. Equipment supports
B. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in increased maintenance or decreased operation life or safety.
1. Obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following operating elements or safety related systems:
a. Primary operational systems and equipment
b. Air or smoke barriers
c. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers
d. Membranes and flashings
e. Fire protection systems
f. Control systems
g. Communication systems
h. Electrical wiring systems
i. Operating systems of special construction in MEP work
C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Owner’s opinion, reduce the building’s aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction which was cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner at no expense to the Owner.
D. Waterproofing and Water Tightness: Do not cut or alter waterproofed walls or floors or any structural members without written permission of the Owner.
1. Waterproofing and Roofing Membranes
a. Employ qualified contractors to accomplish all required cutting, patching, or repairing of existing waterproofing and roofing membranes.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
CORNELL STORE EM POWER CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-4 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT AND REPAIRING MARCH 22, 2021
b. Before beginning cutting, patching or repairing of existing waterproofing and roofing membranes, obtain approval of all materials, methods and contractor to be used from the Owner and agency, or agencies, holding bond or guarantee/warranty in force for membrane.
2. Water Tightness
a. The Contractor shall be responsible for water tightness of product, materials, and workmanship, including work specified to be watertight and inferred by general practice to be watertight.
b. All floors (slabs), walls, roof, glazing, windows, doors, sleeves through foundation walls, flashings, and similar items shall be watertight.
c. If details or materials shown or specified are felt not satisfactory to produce water tightness, the Contractor shall inform the Owner’s Representative before installation and submit proposed substitution or alternative method for review and approval. The Contractor shall execute approved change and make watertight at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.4 WARRANTIES
A. Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by methods and with materials in such a manner as not to void any warranties required or existing.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Comply with the Contract Documents for each product involved.
B. Use materials identical to in-place or existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials whose installed performance will
equal or surpass that of in-place or existing materials, and will match visual appearance of in-place or existing materials.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Inspect existing conditions of the Project, including elements subject to damage or to movement during:
1. Cutting and patching.
2. Excavation and backfilling.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
CORNELL STORE EM POWER CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-5 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT AND REPAIRING MARCH 22, 2021
B. After uncovering work, inspect the conditions affecting the installation of products, or performance of the work.
C. Report unsatisfactory or dubious conditions to the Architect in writing; do not proceed with the work until the Architect has provided further instructions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide shoring, bracing and other support as necessary to assure the structural safety of that portion of the Work.
B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of the Project from damage.
C. Provide for vertical and lateral support required to protect adjacent buildings and properties.
D. Provide protection from the elements for that portion of the Project which may be exposed by cutting and patching work, including but not limited to pumping to maintain excavations free from water.
E. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.
F. Avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay.
1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition.
B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods which will assure safety, will be least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction, and will provide proper surfaces to receive new work.
1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a carbon saw or a diamond-core drill.
4. Comply with the requirements of applicable MEP work where cutting and patching of services is required.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
CORNELL STORE EM POWER CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-6 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT AND REPAIRING MARCH 22, 2021
C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances.
1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation.
2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.
a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
3. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes:
a. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection.
b. For an assembly, refinish the entire unit.
4. When patching existing plaster finished walls and partitions, the Contractor shall utilize plaster trim, lath and other metal components to match the integrity of the existing system. All plaster finishes shall match existing finishes so as to provide a uniform visual appearance.
5. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
a. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
6. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re-hang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.
7. Concrete Masonry Units: Patch walls by toothing-in units using salvaged or new CMU units matching in-place units for type and size. Match coursing patterns, mortar joint profiles, and other features of in-place CMU walls. Use accessory materials compatible with in-place materials.
8. Brick and Masonry: Patch walls by toothing-in units using salvaged or new brick and masonry matching in-place brick and masonry units. Match coursing patterns, mortar joint profiles, and other features of in-place brick and masonry walls. Use accessory materials compatible with in-place materials.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
CORNELL STORE EM POWER CUTTING, PATCHING 01 73 29-7 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT AND REPAIRING MARCH 22, 2021
9. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weather-tight condition.
a. Existing Roofing: Comply with requirements of existing roofing manufacturer for cutting and patching existing roofing system. Provide flashing and trim, base sheets, base flashing, adhesives, insulation, blocking, substrate boards, accessories, and other required items to patch roofing at penetrations and roof-top mounted items.
D. Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials.
1. Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain with an approved masonry patching material applied according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
E. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which will assure safety, will prevent settlement or damage to other work.
F. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes.
G. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
H. The Contractor shall replace, repair and patch all surfaces of the ground and of any structure disturbed by its operations and its Work which surfaces and structures are intended to remain even if such operations and work are outside the property lines. Such replacement, repair and patching shall be with like material and shall restore surfaces as they existed.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean area and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
B. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.
***END OF SECTION 01 73 29***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT
CORNELL STORE EM POWER PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-1 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 77 00 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 INSPECTIONS
A. Substantial Completion:
1. Within a minimum of five (5) days prior to substantial completion, when the Work has reached such a point of completion that the building or buildings, equipment and apparatus can be occupied and used for the purpose intended, the Contractor shall conduct a detailed inspection of the Work to ensure that all requirements of the Contract have been met and that the Work is complete and is acceptable. Contractor shall prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list),
indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.
2. After receipt of the Contractor’s initial punch list, the Architect will make an inspection of the Work to determine that the Work is substantially complete and that requirements of the Contract have been met and that the Work is sufficiently complete and is acceptable for use. The Architect will submit a marked-up list of items to be completed and/or corrected, inclusive of the Contractor’s punch list. The Architect shall prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion, on the basis of an inspection, when the Architect has determined that the work is substantially complete.
3. A copy of the report of the inspection will be furnished to the Contractor as the inspection progresses so that the Contractor may proceed without delay with any part of the Work found to be incomplete or defective.
4. All work performed under a Fire Protection System Installation/Alteration Operating Permit shall be inspected by the Ithaca Fire Department, or if so delegated by the Ithaca Building Department.
a. A member of the Ithaca Fire Department shall witness all acceptance or reacceptance testing of work performed under a Fire Protection System Installation Operating Permit. All testing and inspections shall be in compliance with the applicable NFPA codes as referenced by Section 906.1 of the Fire Code of NYS.
b. Work classified as a ‘Repair’ under the Existing Building Code does not require the Ithaca Fire Department to witness the testing of the affected systems. Systems that have been repaired must still be tested as required by the Fire Code of NYS and NFPA.
c. The Ithaca Fire Department Shall Witness the Acceptance or Reacceptance Testing for the Following Conditions:
- Testing of any new installation of a fire alarm, fire suppression, or fire detection system as required by the Fire Code of New York State.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT
CORNELL STORE EM POWER PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-2 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
- Hydrostatic testing of sprinkler system where the modification affects more than twenty (20) sprinkler heads and the modified area can be isolated from the rest of the system
- Installation or replacement of a fire pump or drive elements of the fire pump.
- A Fire Alarm System with added or deleted components.
- A Fire Alarm System where the wiring or control circuits have been modified.
- A Fire Alarm System where the control unit (Fire Alarm Panel) has been replaced or the control unit software has been replaced.
- A smoke control system where the master control unit, individual fan control unit, or fan drive unit has been replaced or modified
- An alternative fire suppression system that has been replaced or the actuation elements have been modified. Except: fusible link replacement.
- A modification or extension of the piping fur a fire standpipe system where a hydrostatic test is required by NFPA 14.
B. Final Acceptance:
1. When the items appearing on the report of inspection have been completed or corrected, the Contractor shall so advise the Architect. After receipt of this notification and Contractor’s certified list of completed items, the Owner's Representative will inform the Contractor of the date and time of final inspection. A copy of the report of the final inspection containing all remaining contract exceptions, omissions and incomplete work will be furnished to the Contractor.
2. After receipt of notification of completion and all remaining contract exceptions, omissions and incomplete work from the Contractor, the Architect will make an inspection to verify completion of the exception items appearing on the report of final inspection.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial punch list submittal at Substantial Completion.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor, listing by room or space number. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for individual exterior face elevations, ceilings, individual walls, floors, doors, roof levels, casework, equipment, and building systems.
B. Contractor's Certified List of Completed Items: Final signed punch list submittal at Final Completion.
C. Certificates of Release: Occupancy permits from authorities having jurisdiction.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT
CORNELL STORE EM POWER PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-3 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
1.3 FINAL CLEAN UP
A. Upon completion of the work covered by the Contract the Contractor shall leave the completed Project ready for use and occupancy without the need of further cleaning of any kind and with all Work in new condition and in perfect order. In addition, upon completion of all Work the Contractor shall remove from the vicinity of the Work all plant, buildings, rubbish, unused materials, concrete forms and other materials belonging to him or used under its direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance of the property and shall restore such areas affected by the work to their original condition, and, in the event of its failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at the expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor and/or its surety shall be liable therefore. Final clean-up shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. All finished surfaces shall be swept, dusted, washed and polished. This includes cleaning of the Work of all finishing trades where needed, whether or not cleaning by such trades is included in their respective sections of the specifications.
2. Roofs, utility tunnels, manholes and pipe trenches and spaces between the new and existing Work shall be left thoroughly cleaned.
3. Finished flooring shall be thoroughly cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
4. Where the finish of floors has been marred or damaged in any space or area, the entire floor of that space or area shall be refinished as recommended by the manufacturers of the flooring.
5. All equipment shall be in an undamaged, bright, clean, polished and new appearing condition.
6. All new glass shall be washed and polished, both sides. The Contractor shall be responsible for all breakage of glass in the area of the Work from the commencement of its activities until the building is turned over to Owner. The Contractor shall replace all broken glass and deliver the entire building with all glazing intact and clean.
7. Provide new filters for all fan convectors after final cleaning.
8. Refer to exterior clean up. Remove paint and glazing compound from surfaces.
B. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by construction operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before construction operations began.
C. Cleaning of Renovated Duct Systems and Existing Duct Systems in Renovated Areas:
1. Cleaning work shall be performed by firm which has minimum three (3) years’ experience in mechanical cleaning of air systems. Work shall be done by skilled mechanics, technicians and experienced supervisors.
2. Clean dirt, dust and debris from air units, associated equipment air ducts; sanitize same. Cleaning shall include:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT
CORNELL STORE EM POWER PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-4 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
a. Cleaning of air unit’s supply, return and exhaust sections including coils, fans, filter racks, outdoor air intake shaft, and interior surfaces.
b. Cleaning of dampers, heating coils, humidifiers, and similar devices in ductwork.
c. Marking of duct-mounted damper settings, prior to cleaning, and returning dampers to marked positions after cleaning. This includes fire dampers, zone dampers, balancing dampers and volume dampers.
d. Cleaning of terminal supply, return and exhaust grilles, registers and diffusers.
e. Cutting of access holes in ductwork for cleaning process, as well as sealing and patching of same.
f. Removal of portions of duct system which cannot otherwise be thoroughly cleaned, and replacement thereof.
g. Sealing of lined duct systems, upon completion.
h. Removal and reinstallation of ceiling panels, tiles, ceiling support tracks, and other ceiling construction, as required to facilitate cleaning.
i. Providing access doors required to facilitate cleaning.
3. Cleaning shall meet National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA) Standards, capable of verification by NADCA Vacuum Test. Cleanliness shall be subject to Architect’s visual review; provide re-cleaning as necessary to satisfy Architect
a. Cleaning methods may include vacuuming, brushing, mechanical brushing, scraping, or air washing. Use method best suited for locations involved.
b. Do NOT use methods which could damage the system or the building.
c. Remove dirt, dust, lint and other accumulations by HEPA filtered air machine capable of minimum 6000 cfm. Air machine shall operate to obtain 1250 fpm across the work space. Use brushes, mechanical agitators or air whips to dislodge contaminants to be collected by the air machine.
d. Cleaning shall begin at the furthest point of the return system and at the outdoor air intake. Cleaning shall proceed toward the air handling equipment. Cleaning shall finish at the furthest point of the supply ductwork.
1.4 MAINTENANCE STOCK
A. Turn over to Owner's Representative the maintenance stock specified. Contractor shall obtain signed receipt from Owner's Representative for all maintenance stock.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT
CORNELL STORE EM POWER PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-5 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 77 00***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 22 Ithaca, New York FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY
CORNELL STORE EM POWER FIXED EQUIPMENT 01 78 22-1 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT INVENTORY MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 78 22 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY
A. The Owner shall provide the Contractor with a list of Equipment Types to be inventoried and an Excel template.
B. The Contractor shall populate the template (see Example Equipment List to be inventoried in Section 1.2). Once populated, the Contractor shall electronically return to the list to the Owner’s Representative. The initial data to be captured on each piece of equipment shall include:
1. Name of Product
2. Equipment Classification
3. Manufacturer
4. Model Number
5. Serial Number
6. Cost
7. Location (including Building and Room Number)
8. Acquisition Date (Date of Installation)
C. The Owner shall from the Contractor provided data create a follow-up equipment Excel template that contains the MAXIMO ID for the equipment with all the name plate and specification fields for each type of equipment. This template shall then be returned to the Contractor.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the initial labeling of the equipment and its’ disconnects with the MAXIMO ID using an electronic label maker. ID labels shall be in close proximity to Equipment Identification information, visually locatable from the access point to the equipment and on the face of disconnects.
E. The Contractor shall then populate the MAXIMO Equipment Specification Template with the equipment nameplate, specification information, and warranty information. The Contractor shall electronically submit the equipment data and any related documentation (i.e. - O&M manuals) to the Owner’s Representative.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 22 Ithaca, New York FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY
CORNELL STORE EM POWER FIXED EQUIPMENT 01 78 22-2 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT INVENTORY MARCH 22, 2021
F. EXAMPLE EQUIPMENT LIST
• Building Equipment
• AC Drive/VSD
• Air Dryer
• Backflow Preventor
• Air Compressor
• Building
• Sprinkler
• Control
• Vacuum
• Pump
• Condensate
• Glycol
• CWC
• HWC
• Potable
• Sanitary Sewer
• Storm Sewer
• Sump
• Quality Water
• Fuel
• Fan
• Exhaust
• Supply
• Return
• Fume Hood
• Furnace
• Generator
• Hot Water Heater
• Heat Exchangers
• Boiler
• Tank
• Unit Heater
• Fan Coil
• VAV Box
• Transfer Switch
• Motor
• Pump
• Fan
• Lift/Levelers
• Water Softener
• Reverse Osmosis
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 22 Ithaca, New York FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY
CORNELL STORE EM POWER FIXED EQUIPMENT 01 78 22-3 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT INVENTORY MARCH 22, 2021
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 78 22***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
CORNELL STORE EM POWER OPERATING AND 01 78 23-1 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MAINTENANCE DATA MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation of products furnished under the Contract.
1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section, as referenced in other pertinent sections of Specifications and as necessary to operate the completed work.
2. Operations and maintenance data, in final format, shall be available to the Owner prior to substantial completion.
B. Instruct Owner's personnel in the maintenance of products and in the operation of equipment and systems.
1.2 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel.
B. Submit a CD with electronic .pdf files, upload electronic files to ePM system of complete manual in final form.
1. Format:
a. Size: 8-1/2" x 11”.
b. Text: Manufacturer's, scanned .pdf and/or neatly typewritten Word file.
c. Drawings in electronic format
- Drawings are required in PDF format. Drawings shall be in AutoCAD v14 or higher format.
d. Provide fly-leaf for each separate product, and major component parts of equipment.
- Provide type description of product, and major component parts of equipment.
- Provide indexed PDF bookmarks.
- Provide a series of files organized in subdirectories with a summary index with hyperlinks to the various documents.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
CORNELL STORE EM POWER OPERATING AND 01 78 23-2 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MAINTENANCE DATA MARCH 22, 2021
e. Cover: Identify each volume with title "OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS".
List:
- Title of Project
- Identity of separate structure as applicable.
- Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual.
1.3 CONTENT OF MANUAL
A. Table of contents, typewritten, for each volume, arranged in a systematic order.
1. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.
2. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to the content of the volume.
3. List, with each product, the name, address and telephone number of:
a. Subcontract or installer.
b. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate.
c. Identify the area of responsibility of each.
d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement.
4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents.
B. Product Data:
1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product.
2. Annotate each sheet to:
a. Clearly identify the specific product or part installed.
b. Clearly identify the data applicable to the installation.
c. Delete reference to inapplicable information.
C. Submittal Data:
1. Include a record copy of the final, approved product submittal. Record copy shall be a clean copy (free of notes from the design professional) which has been updated to reflect the “as-installed” system.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
CORNELL STORE EM POWER OPERATING AND 01 78 23-3 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MAINTENANCE DATA MARCH 22, 2021
D. Drawings:
1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate:
a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems.
b. Control and flow diagrams.
2. Coordinate drawings with information on Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation.
3. Do not use Record Documents as maintenance drawings.
E. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation:
1. Organize in a consistent format under separate headings for different procedures.
2. Provide a logical sequence of instructions for each procedure.
F. Original copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued.
1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, give:
a. Proper procedures in the event of failure.
b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranties or bonds.
1.4 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Submit electronic .pdf files, upload electronic files to ePM system.
B. Content, for architectural products, applied materials and finishes:
1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products:
a. Catalog number, size, and composition.
b. Color and texture designations.
c. Information required for reordering special-manufactured products.
d. Certification as to asbestos free
2. Instructions for care and maintenance:
a. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods.
b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are detrimental to the product.
c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
CORNELL STORE EM POWER OPERATING AND 01 78 23-4 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MAINTENANCE DATA MARCH 22, 2021
C. Content, for moisture-protection and weather-exposed products:
1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products.
a. Applicable standards
b. Chemical composition
c. Details of installation
2. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair.
D. Additional requirements for maintenance data: The respective sections of Specifications.
1.5 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. Submit electronic .pdf files, upload electronic files to ePM system.
B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate:
1. Description of unit and component parts.
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of all replaceable parts.
2. Operating procedures:
a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions.
c. Summer and winter operating instructions.
d. Special operating instructions.
3. Maintenance Procedures:
a. Routine operations.
b. Guide to "trouble-shooting".
c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
d. Alignment, adjusting and checking.
4. Servicing and lubrication required:
a. List of lubricants required.
5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
CORNELL STORE EM POWER OPERATING AND 01 78 23-5 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MAINTENANCE DATA MARCH 22, 2021
6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer.
7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance.
a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear.
b. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
8. As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.
9. Each contractor's coordination drawings.
a. As-installed color coded piping diagrams.
10. Charts of valve tag numbers, with the location and function of each valve.
11. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
12. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications.
C. Content, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate:
1. Description of system and component parts:
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
2. Circuit directories of panel boards:
a. Electrical service.
b. Controls.
c. Communications.
3. As-installed color coded wiring diagrams.
4. Operating procedures:
a. Routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Sequences required.
c. Special operating instructions.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
CORNELL STORE EM POWER OPERATING AND 01 78 23-6 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MAINTENANCE DATA MARCH 22, 2021
5. Maintenance procedures:
a. Routine operations.
b. Guide to "trouble-shooting".
c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
d. Adjustment and checking.
6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
8. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications.
D. Additional requirements for operations and maintenance data: See the respective sections of Specifications and General Conditions.
1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit through ePM system preliminary draft of proposed formats and outlines of contents thirty (30) calendar days after approved submittals.
B. Submit completed data in final form twenty (20) calendar days prior the Acceptance Phase of the Project.
C. Submit specified number of copies of approved data in final form prior to final acceptance.
1.7 INSTRUCTIONS OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A. Prior to final inspections or acceptance, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in the operation, adjustment and maintenance of all products, equipment and systems:
1. Instruction time shall be sufficient to fully instruct all shifts of the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel.
B. Operations and maintenance shall constitute the basis of instruction:
1. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance.
C. Submit typewritten statement, signed by each of Owner's Representatives who have been instructed, describing:
1. Method of Instruction.
2. Equipment and Systems Operated.
3. Length of Instruction Period.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
CORNELL STORE EM POWER OPERATING AND 01 78 23-7 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MAINTENANCE DATA MARCH 22, 2021
D. Contractor is fully responsible until final acceptance, even though operated by Owner's personnel, unless otherwise agreed in writing.
1.8 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. List under clear plastic (1/8" thick) all operating, maintenance and starting precautions and procedures to be followed by Owner for operating all systems and equipment.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 78 23***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-1 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
The Contractor shall:
A. Compile specified warranties and bonds.
B. Compile specified service and maintenance contracts.
C. Co-execute submittals when so specified.
D. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents.
E. Submit to Architect for transmittal to Owner.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special warranties.
1. Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor's special warranty of workmanship and materials.
2. General closeout requirements are included in Section 01 77 00 - "Project Closeout."
3. Specific requirements for warranties for the Work and products and installations that are specified to be warranted, are included in the individual Sections of Divisions 2 through 40.
4. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Standard Product Warranties are pre-printed written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-2 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
B. Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate care and diligence to review Contract Documents to identify detailed requirements relating to warranties and bonds.
B. Verify that each item required for this submittal conforms with specified requirements.
1.5 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS
A. In addition to standard and special warranties described in Divisions 2 through 40, Contractor shall warrant Work included in this project, for a minimum period of one (1) year following acceptance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion by Owner, to cover performance, materials, workmanship and compliance with Contract Documents.
B. Corrective Work: Provide service within thirty (30) calendar days when requested by Owner. Perform services during normal working hours, unless specifically directed otherwise by Owner. Coordinate with Owner’s representative to schedule performance of corrective work. Where designated service providers cannot perform corrective work within the Owner’s required time frame, engage another qualified service provider. Submit a written statement to Owner upon completion of corrective work; document work performed and list outstanding items, if any.
1. When a completed breakdown of a piece of equipment occurs of the malfunction of a system affects the environment or program involving 50 or more persons at a time (employees and students combined), or creates a safety or security risk to the Owner, an EMERGENCY may be declared by the Owner. The Owner may declare an emergency as defined above at which time the service response must be within 4 hours and may require action during non-normal working hours.
2. When an emergency condition occurs, the Owner may take immediate corrective action to relieve the problem by making, a minimum as possible, temporary adjustments and/or repairs when necessary to decrease the problem until the designated Contractor’s representative can respond. These temporary adjustments and repairs will in no way jeopardize the existing warranty.
3. The Owner’s service staff will advise the Contractor’s Representative of all temporary adjustments and repairs done in relation to the malfunctioning equipment or facility.
4. If the Contractor fails to respond with actual service within four (4) hours, and/or the necessary repairs or adjustments are not satisfactorily complete twenty-four (24) hours, the Owner will have the authority to make the necessary repairs or adjustments and charge the Contractor for parts and labor.
5. If all adjustments and repairs done by the Owner in relation to the above conditions are
done by authorized district personnel, there will be no negative effect of future
warranty claims.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-3 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
C. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted Work, remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work.
D. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.
E. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.
F. Owner's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.
G. Contractor's Procurement Obligations: Do not purchase, subcontract for, or allow others to purchase or subcontract for materials or units of Work for Project where a special project guaranty, specified product warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required until it has been determined that entities required to sign or countersign such commitments are willing to do so.
H. Specific Warranty. Where a special warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such Work or part of the Work, the Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work until the Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so.
1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. If the Architect’s Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Architect or Owner.
1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Architect and Owner within fifteen (15) days of completion of that designated portion of the Work.
B. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner through the Architect for acceptance prior to final execution.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-4 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
1.7 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED
A. Submit warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts as specified in the respective sections of Specifications. Submit a schedule listing all required warranties.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
A. The Warranties and Bonds shall be in electronic pdf format. Each submission shall include the title of the Project and the name of the Contractor.
B. Provide a series of files organized in subdirectories with a summary index with hyperlinks to the various documents and or references.
C. Assemble warranties, bonds and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers and subcontractors.
D. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in orderly sequence. Provide complete information for each item.
1. Product or work item.
2. Item description.
3. Notation of what the equipment serves (e.g. – Provides perimeter heat)
4. Warranty Provider. Is the warranty provided by a manufacturer or installer?
5. Firm, with name of principal and responsible party, address and telephone number.
6. Scope.
7. Duration.
a. Date of beginning of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract
b. End date of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract.
8. Provide information for Owner's personnel:
a. Proper procedure in case of failure.
b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond.
9. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-5 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
3.2 TIME OF SUBMITTALS
A. Make final submittals within ten (10) days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final request for payment.
B. For items of work when acceptance is delayed materially beyond the Date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten (10) days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the start of the warranty period.
***END OF SECTION 01 78 36***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-1 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
SECTION 01 78 39 RECORD DOCUMENTS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall maintain at the site, during construction, one record copy of:
1. Drawings
2. Specifications
3. Addenda
4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract
5. Architect's Field Orders or written instructions.
6. Final Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples
7. Field Test records
8. Construction photographs
1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES
A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for construction.
1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents.
2. Provide cabinet or storage space for storage of samples.
B. File documents and samples in accordance with Data Filing Format of the Uniform Construction Index.
C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes.
D. Make documents and samples available at all times for review by the Owner’s Representative and the Architect.
1.3 RECORDING
A. Label each document "AS BUILT" in neat large printed letters.
B. Record information concurrently with construction progress.
1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-2 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
C. Survey Mapping
1. Provide an accurate topographic, planimetric, utility map of as-built conditions, and mapped locations and elevations of constructed facilities / elements including as-built and exposed underground utilities. Survey work in progress as required to accurately locate constructed facilities / elements. Survey final condition of project extents at final acceptance.
a. Site related elements including:
- Sidewalks, ramps, curbs, and gutters - indicate type and surface material.
- Streets, drive ways, parking areas, labeled with material.
- Fences, walls, steps, handrails, signs, site furniture and light fixtures labeled with material.
- Live trees which have a trunk diameter of three inches (3”) or greater and all isolated or specimen trees. Measure tree trunk 3’ above grade. Indicate approximate trunk diameter, “drip line” and common name of tree.
- Shrubs, show outlines of shrub masses.
- Streams and bodies of water.
b. Utility related elements and supporting infrastructure including:
- Manholes, catch basins, drain inlets, cleanouts, vent stacks, tanks, underdrains, foundation drains, monitoring wells, detention/retention/filtration facilities. Label type (sanitary or storm), dimensions and material of structure and cover/grate; pipe connections; sizes, materials, direction of flow and invert elevations. Locate and identify size, material, and invert elevations for culverts.
- Water, gas, central steam, chilled water or other pressure lines, valve boxes, meter boxes, hydrants, tanks, fittings, etc. Label type, size, material, elevations at building walls and all intersections, connections and vertical angle changes.
- Utility poles, above and below ground lines including but not limited to power, street lighting, traffic control communication and sensors, telephone, television, communication, fire and police call boxes, public communication or display facilities. Label utility as direct buried, in conduit, or concrete encased duct. Identify elevations at building walls and all intersections, connections and vertical angle changes. Label all utilities and associated duct banks or conduits with sizes and materials.
- Existing and abandoned utilities exposed during construction. Show ends of abandoned utilities left in place and assumed continued direction of utilities. Label with information as listed above.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-3 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
2. Survey mapping shall be done under the personal supervision of a Surveyor, registered in and licensed by the State of New York, who shall certify under his/her seal the accuracy of the survey.
3. Field Survey Accuracy:
- Horizontal and Vertical mapping shall be ACSM Second Order Class II, 1 in 20,000.
4. Coordinate base:
- NAD83-86 geodetic system with grid values in the New York Central State Plane coordinate system in feet with elevations in NAVD ’88 in feet.
5. Each different feature shall be drafted on a separate named CAD level/layer in Microstation or AutoCAD format using industry standard symbology of color, line style, line weight, and cells.
6. Provide an ASCII file list of coordinates for all survey points including control, feature, and topographic in the following comma delimited format: Point number, Northing coordinate, Easting coordinate, Elevation coordinate, Point description.
7. Topography and spot elevations:
a. Topographic contours shall be accurately plotted at one foot (1’) contour intervals.
b. Record spot grade elevations as follows:
i. Within natural ground and lawn and planted areas, spot elevations shall be
shown to one-tenth of a foot (0.1’). Within all areas of built-up improvements such as pavements, curbs, steps, walls, utility and drainage systems or other site improvements, spot elevations shall be shown to one-hundredth of a foot (0.01’).
ii. Existing grade at building corners; and thresholds and finished floor at all
entrance, exit, or access points.
iii. Develop road cross sections at 50-foot intervals maximum, record spot elevations for all drive centerlines and all beginning radius of street intersections. For each cross section obtain elevations for front and back of existing sidewalk, top and bottom of curb, and centerline of the street. Obtain elevations for centerline intersection of all roads.
iv. For trees of three inches to eighteen inches (3” - 18”) in diameter, record elevation at high and low side at base of trunk. For specimen trees of eighteen inches (18”) or greater diameter, indicate four (4) spot elevations on the north, south, east, and west at base of each trunk to one-hundredth (.01) foot elevation.
v. Base, top, corners, and at cheek walls for all steps. Indicate elevations at top and bottom of walls and curbs.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-4 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
vi. Rim elevations of all catch basins, drain inlets, manholes, valve boxes, slabs
on grade. Inverts at all sewer pipes and culverts. Bottom of structure floor and sump.
D. Drawings
As built drawings shall consist of making any changes neatly and clearly on the Contract Drawings using colored ink or pencil, shall be kept current by the contractor on a day-to-day basis in concert with the progress of the work. Where applicable, the change marked on a drawing is to carry the notation “per Change Order No. X”, or similar reference which cites the reason for the change. As an alternative approach the Contractor can submit a plan for producing the “As-Built” drawings via electronic mark-up in Bluebeam, Adobe Professional, or other similar program as an alternative to colored pencil or ink mark-ups. Such plan shall be subject to approval of the Owner.
The day-to-day construction as built drawings shall be made available to the Architect or Owner’s Representative for review upon request. The "As built" drawings shall show all changes to the following areas of construction:
1. Architectural:
a. Modifications to components dictated by the building code
b. Wall, door, window locations
c. Built in casework locations
d. New rated door and wall schedules/ locations
e. Material and products where submittals are requested
2. Civil and Structural
a. Dimensions for load carrying elements, both horizontal and vertical
b. Materials and products where submittals are requested
c. Load carrying elements and foundation systems
d. Site related elements including:
- Building outlines, entranceways, areaways, roof overhangs, downspouts, significant architectural projections and other pertinent data.
e. All significant changes in foundations, columns, beams, openings, concrete reinforcing, lintels, concealed anchorages and "knock-out" panels made during
construction.
f. Building envelope systems including roofing systems and building shell systems
g. Geotechnical subsurface information
h. Items that will require future maintenance
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-5 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
i. Life safety critical items
3. Mechanical (HVAC, Plumbing and Fire Protection)
a. Products where submittals are requested
b. Final locations of all equipment.
c. Final sizes and materials of piping and ductwork.
d. Final locations of inaccessible piping and ductwork.
e. Final locations of all controls equipment, including all sensors and actuators.
f. Final locations of all valves and dampers, including all shutoff valves, balance dampers and fire dampers.
g. Location of access doors for all equipment in concealed locations.
h. Final location and arrangement of all mechanical equipment and concealed gas, sprinkler, domestic, sanitary and drainage systems piping and other plumbing, including, but not limited to, supply and circulating mains, principal valves, meters, clean-outs, drains, pumps and controls, vent stacks, sanitary and storm water drainage.
4. Electrical
a. Products where submittals were requested.
b. Circuit (wire and raceway) size, number, and type.
c. Main circuit pathways for Fire Alarm, Emergency Power, and Access Control/Security systems.
d. Final locations of equipment and devices, interior and exterior luminaires, and power supplies.
e. Final location of electric signal system panels, final arrangement of all circuits and any significant changes made in electrical signal system design as a result of Change Order or job conditions.
5. Environmental
a. Utility related elements and supporting infrastructure
b. Storm water maintenance/testing access points
c. Location of unusual excavation findings / contaminated soil (i.e. mercury uncovered during excavation, also on-site spills during construction), including quantity excavated/disposed.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS
CORNELL STORE EM POWER RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-6 & EM LIGHT REPLACEMENT MARCH 22, 2021
E. Specifications and Addenda
Legibly mark each section to record:
1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and Supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed.
2. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order.
1.4 SUBMITTAL
A. At Contract close-out, deliver copies of all record documents to the Owner’s Representative.
B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing:
1. Date
2. Project title and number
3. Contractor's name and address
4. Title and number of each record document
5. Certification that each document is complete and accurate
6. Signature of Contractor or its authorized representative.
2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 78 39
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CORNELL STORE EMERGENCY POWER & EMERGENCY LIGHTING REPLACEMENT CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK
SPECIFICATION SECTION 02 8213
Asbestos Abatement
at Cornell University’s Cornell Store for the Cornell Store Emergency Power and Emergency Lighting Replacement
Prepared for: Cornell University Facilities Engineering 201 Humphreys Service Building Ithaca, NY 14853
Prepared by:
860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760
Phone: 607-231-6600
Fax: 607-231-6640 Delta Project No. 2019.003.004 Stephen Prislupsky, Director of Environmental Services
NYS DOL Certified Asbestos Project Designer
Certificate No. 90-10891 Issue for Construction
Dated:
March 22, 2021
The Cornell Store Emergency Power and Emergency Lighting Replacement 02 8213 - 2 Asbestos Abatement
SECTION 02 8213 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The asbestos abatement work will consist of the removal/disposal of asbestos containing exhaust breeching insulation present on emergency generator exhaust located on the 2nd floor in Room 20060 at the Cornell Store. Approximately 40 linear feet of breeching insulation (12” insulation diameter) is to be removed, starting at the floor-level generator to where it exits the room on the upper wall (approximately 15’ aff). If any ACM Breeching insulation is present within the interstitial wall space that
cannot be accessed / removed, it shall be sealed via encapsulant and lag cloth. Breeching insulation abatement shall be performed via glovebag operations in negative pressure tent work area having an attached small-project decontamination enclosure system as per the requirements of 12 NYCRR Part 56 for Glovebag in Tent operations. Where the installation / use of glovebags is not possible for
given sections of breeching insulation due to space constraints, gross removal of the insulation without glovebags may be performed. If this is necessary, a 2-layer tent work area will be required.
As there are no openings to the exterior of the building in the vicinity of the work area, negative air shall be exhausted to an interior location as per the conditions of the Cornell Campus-Wide Variance File No. 20-0068 (attached at the end of this specification section).
B. Reference Drawing AR-101 for asbestos abatement notes, location, quantities, and details. Reference the GR Section 01 35 29 – General Health and Safety for the Pre-Renovation Asbestos
Survey Report. C. The Contractor shall be aware of all conditions of the Project and is responsible for verifying quantities and locations of all Work to be performed. Failure to do so shall not relieve the Contractor of its
obligation to furnish all labor and materials necessary to perform the Work.
D. All Work shall be performed in strict accordance with the Project Documents and all governing codes, rules, and regulations. Where conflicts occur between the Project Documents and applicable codes, rules, and regulations, the more stringent shall apply. 1.3 SPECIAL JOB CONDITIONS A. The Contractor may submit for a Site Specific Variance to accomplish the Project. Variance petition shall be submitted to the Owners Representative for review and approval prior to submission to the New York State Department of Labor (NYS DOL).
B. Work shifts and working hours shall be as necessary to complete the project in the required time frame and shall be submitted to the Owner’s Representative for review/approval. The Contractor shall coordinate and schedule all Work with the facility, the Owner, and the Owner’s representative.
C. Contractor to submit man power and work schedule with bid.
D. Owner will provide a tie-in location for electric and water source. The contractor will be responsible for providing GFCI electrical panel(s) and connecting to the building system as necessary for project power.
The Cornell Store Emergency Power and Emergency Lighting Replacement 02 8213 - 3 Asbestos Abatement
E. Any air sampling necessary to meet OSHA requirements will be the responsibility of the Asbestos Contractor. F. Waste Dumpster locations shall be approved by the Facility Representative. All dumpsters receiving RACM Waste shall be lined, enclosed and lockable (i.e. no open-to dumpsters). G. Locations of the Sub-Basement Remote Decontamination Enclosure System shall be approved by the Facility Representative. 1.4 PERMITS AND COMPLIANCE A. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility and liability for compliance with all applicable Federal,
State, and local laws, rules, and regulations pertaining to Work practices, protection of Workers, authorized visitors to the site, persons, and property adjacent to the Work. B. Perform asbestos related Work in accordance with New York State Industrial Code Rule 56 (herein referred to as Code Rule 56), 40 CFR 61, 29 CFR 1926, and as specified herein. Where more stringent requirements are specified, adhere to the more stringent requirements.
C. The Contractor must maintain current licenses pursuant to New York State Department of Labor and Department of Environmental Conservation for all Work related to this Project, including the removal, handling, transport, and disposal of asbestos containing materials.
D. The Contractor must have and submit proof upon request that any persons employed by the
Contractor to engage in or supervise Work on any asbestos Project have a valid NYS asbestos handling certificate pursuant to Code Rule 56. E. Failure to adhere to the Project Documents shall constitute a breach of the Contract and the Owner
shall have the right to and may terminate the Contract provided, however, the failure of the Owner to so terminate shall not relieve the Contractor from future compliance.
F. The contractor shall be responsible for any waste water permits required to perform his work under this contract. Any cost associated with waste water permits shall be included in his Bid.
G. The contractor shall be responsible for any Local City and/or State building permits required to perform his work. Any cost associated with building permits shall be included in his Bid.
1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Reference the Front–end and Division 01 documents for eBuilder submittal requirements/procedures.
B. Pre-Work Submittals: Within 7 days prior to the pre-construction conference, the Contractor shall submit via eBuilder an electronic pdf format copy of the documents listed below for review and approval prior to the commencement of asbestos abatement activities: 1. Contractor license issued by New York State Department of Labor. 2. Progress Schedule:
a. Show the complete sequence of abatement activities and the sequencing of Work for each floor. b. Show the dates for the beginning and completion of each major element of Work including substantial completion dates for each Work Area and Floor.
3. Project Notifications: As required by Federal and State regulatory agencies together with proof of transmittal (i.e. certified mail return receipt).
4. Building Occupant Notification: As required by regulatory agencies. 5. Abatement Work Plan: Provide plans that clearly indicate the following: a. All Work Areas/containments numbered sequentially. b. Proposed locations and types of all decontamination enclosures.
c. Location of water and electrical connections to building services.
The Cornell Store Emergency Power and Emergency Lighting Replacement 02 8213 - 4 Asbestos Abatement
d. Waste transport routes through the building to the waste storage container. 6. Disposal Site/Landfill Permit from applicable regulatory agency. 7. NYS Department of Environmental Conservation Waste Transporter Permit. C. On-Site Submittals: Refer to Part 3.01.D for all submittals, documentation, and postings required to be maintained on-site during abatement activities.
D. Project Close-out Submittals: Within 15 days of project completion, the Contractor shall submit an electronic pdf format copy of the documents listed below for review and approval prior to the Contractor’s final payment. 1. OSHA compliance air monitoring records conducted during the Work. 2. Daily progress log, including the entry/exit log.
3. A list of all Workers used in the performance of the Project, including name, NYS DOL certification number and type of certification (i.e. supervisor, asbestos handler, etc.). E. Fully executed/signed Originals of all waste disposal manifests shall be submitted as per applicable State and Federal Regulations and time frame requirements.
F. The contractor shall also be responsible for completing and submitting the Owner’s “Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan” form included in the front-end Bid Documents. This form shall be submitted and approved by the Cornell Project Manager prior to the Owner issuing any payment for the project. 1.6 PRE-BID MEETING
A. Bidders shall attend a pre-bid meeting. Bidding Contractors will be notified in advance of the meeting. B. Contractors shall familiarize themselves with the Contract Documents prior to attending the
conference. 1.7 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS A. The Contractor shall comply with the following codes and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
B. Federal Regulations:
1. 29 CFR 1910.1001, "Asbestos" (OSHA) 2. 29 CFR 1910.1200, "Hazard Communication" (OSHA) 3. 29 CFR 1910.134, "Respiratory Protection" (OSHA) 4. 29 CFR 1910.145, "Specification for Accident Prevention Signs and Tags" (OSHA)
5. 29 CFR 1926, "Construction Industry" (OSHA) 6. 29 CFR 1926.1101, "Asbestos, Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite" (OSHA) 7. 29 CFR 1926.500 "Guardrails, Handrails and Covers" (OSHA) 8. 40 CFR 61, Subpart A, "General Provisions" (EPA) 9. 40 CFR 61, Subpart M, "National Emission Standard for Asbestos" (EPA) 10. 49 CFR 171-172, Transportation Standards (DOT)
C. New York State Regulations: 1. 12 NYCRR, Part 56, "Asbestos", Industrial Code Rule 56 (DOL). 2. 6 NYCRR, Parts 360, 364, Disposal and Transportation (DEC)
3. 10 NYCRR, Part 73, "Asbestos Safety Program Requirements" (DOH)
D. Standards and Guidance Documents: 1. American National Standard Institute (ANSI) Z88.2-80, Practices for Respiratory Protection 2. ANSI Z9.2-79, Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems 3. EPA 560/585-024, Guidance for Controlling Asbestos Containing Materials in Buildings (Purple
Book)
The Cornell Store Emergency Power and Emergency Lighting Replacement 02 8213 - 5 Asbestos Abatement
4. EPA 530-SW-85-007, Asbestos Waste Management Guidance 5. ASTM Standard E1368 “Standard Practice for Visual Inspection of Asbestos Abatement Projects.” 1.8 NOTICES
A. The Contractor shall provide notification of intent to commence asbestos abatement activities as indicated below. 1. If applicable, at least ten (10) Working days prior to beginning abatement activities, send written notification to:
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency National Emissions Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAPS) Coordinator 26 Federal Plaza New York, NY 10007. The Contractor is required to send notification via mail or package delivery service that will
provide proof of delivery and receipt. 2. At least ten (10) days prior to beginning abatement activities, submit notification to:
New York State Department of Labor Division of Safety and Health, Asbestos Control Program.
State Office Campus Building 12 - Room 454 Albany, NY 12240
Contractor shall print copy of electronic NYS DOL Notification Notice and post onsite.
B. The Contractor shall post and/or provide Building Occupant Notification at least 10 days prior to beginning abatement activities as required by Code Rule 56. 1.9 PROJECT MONITORING AND AIR SAMPLING
A. The Owner shall engage the services of an Environmental Consultant (the Consultant) who shall
provide Project Monitoring and Air Sampling for the project. B. The Contractor is required to ensure cooperation of its personnel with the Consultant for the air sampling and Project monitoring functions described in this section. The Contractor shall comply with
all direction given by the Consultant during the course of the Project. C. The Consultant shall review and approve or disapprove all onsite submittals as required by section 3.01. D. The Consultant shall staff the Project with a trained and certified person(s). This individual shall be designated as the Asbestos Project Monitor (APM). 1. The APM shall be on-site at all times the Contractor is on-site. The Contractor shall not be
permitted to conduct any Work unless the APM is on-site (except for inspection of barriers and negative air system during non-working days). 2. The APM shall have the authority to direct the actions of the Contractor verbally and in writing to ensure compliance with the Project documents and all regulations. The APM shall have the
authority to Stop Work when gross Work practice deficiencies or unsafe practices are observed, or when ambient fiber concentrations outside the removal area exceed .01 f/cc or background
level. a. Such Stop Work order shall be effective immediately and remain in effect until corrective measures have been taken and the situation has been corrected. b. Standby time required to resolve the situation shall be at the Contractor's expense.
3. The APM shall provide the following services:
The Cornell Store Emergency Power and Emergency Lighting Replacement 02 8213 - 6 Asbestos Abatement
a. Inspection of the Contractor's Work, practices, and procedures, including temporary protection requirements, for compliance with all regulations and Project specifications. b. Provide abatement Project air sampling as required by applicable regulations and the Owner’s requirements. Sampling will include background, work area preparation, asbestos handling, and final cleaning and clearance air sampling.
c. Verify daily that all Workers used in the performance of the Project are certified by the appropriate regulatory agency. d. Monitor the progress of the Contractor's Work, and report any deviations from the schedule to the Owner’s Representative. e. Monitor, verify, and document all waste load-out operations. f. Verify that the Contractor is performing personal air monitoring daily, and that results are
being returned and posted at the site as required. g. The APM shall maintain a log on site that documents all project related and Consultant and Contractor actions, activities, and occurrences. 4. The following minimum inspections shall be conducted by the APM. Additional inspections shall be conducted as required by Project conditions. Progression from one phase of Work to the next by the Contractor is only permitted with the written approval of the APM.
a. Pre-Construction Inspection: The purpose of this inspection is to verify the existing conditions of the Work Areas and to document these conditions. b. Pre-Abatement Inspection: The purpose of this inspection is to verify the integrity of each containment system prior to disturbance of any asbestos containing material. This
inspection shall take place only after the Work Area is fully prepped for removal. c. Work In-Progress Inspections: The purpose of this inspection is to monitor the Work
practices and procedures employed on the Project and to monitor the continued integrity of the containment system. Inspections within the removal areas shall be conducted by the APM during all preparation, removal, and cleaning activities at least twice every Work shift. Additional inspections shall be conducted as warranted.
d. Visual Clearance Inspection: The purpose of this inspection is to verify that: all materials in the scope of work have been properly removed; no visible asbestos debris/residue
remains; no pools of liquid or condensation remains; and all required cleanings are complete. This inspection shall be conducted before final air clearance testing. e. Post-Clearance Inspection: The purpose of this inspection is to ensure the complete removal of ACM, including debris, from the Work Area after satisfactory final clearance
sampling and removal of all isolation/critical barriers and equipment from the Work Area.
E. The Consultant shall provide abatement Project air sampling and analysis as required by applicable regulations (New York State and/or AHERA). Sampling will include background, work area preparation, asbestos handling, and final cleaning and clearance air sampling. 1. Unless otherwise directed by the Owner, the Consultant shall have samples analyzed by Phase
Contrast Microscopy (PCM). If TEM clearance is required by the Owner, AHERA protocols/methodology shall be followed. 2. Samples shall be collected as required by applicable regulations (New York State and/or AHERA) and these specifications. If Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) clearance air sampling is utilized by the owner, the clearance criteria and sampling protocols must be in compliance with AHERA. If PCM air sample analysis results exceed the satisfactory clearance criteria, then TEM
analysis of the entire set of clearance air samples may be used, provided that a standard NIOSH/ELAP accepted laboratory analysis method is utilized that shall report each air sample result in fibers per cubic centimeter. 3. If the air sampling during any phase of the abatement project reveals airborne fiber levels at or
above .01 fibers/cc or the established background level, whichever is greater, outside the regulated Work Area, Work shall stop immediately and corrective measures required by Code
Rule 56 shall be initiated. Notify all employers and occupants in adjacent areas. The Contractor shall bear the burden of any and all costs incurred by this delay. 4. The Environmental Consultant shall submit copies of all elevated air sampling results collected during abatement and all final air clearance results to the Commissioner of Labor.
The Cornell Store Emergency Power and Emergency Lighting Replacement 02 8213 - 7 Asbestos Abatement
1.10 CONTRACTOR AIR SAMPLING A. In addition to the requirements of OSHA 1926.1101, the Contractor shall be required to perform personal air monitoring every Work shift in each Work Area during which abatement activities occur in order to determine that appropriate respiratory protection is being worn and utilized.
B. The Contractor shall conduct air sampling that is representative of both the 8-hour time weighted average and 30-minute short-term exposures to indicate compliance with the permissible exposure and excursion limits. C. The Contractor's laboratory analysis of air samples shall be conducted by an NYS DOH ELAP approved
laboratory, subject to approval of the Owner’s Representative. D. Results of personnel air sample analyses shall be available, verbally, within twenty-four (24) hours of sampling and shall be posted upon receipt. Written laboratory reports shall be delivered and posted at the Work site within five (5) days. Failure to comply with these requirements may result in all work being stopped until compliance is achieved. 1.11 PROJECT SUPERVISOR A. The Contractor shall designate a full-time Project Supervisor who shall meet the following qualifications:
1. The Project Supervisor shall hold New York State certification as an Asbestos Supervisor. 2. The Project Supervisor shall meet the requirements of a "Competent Person" as defined by
OSHA 1926.1101 and shall have a minimum of one year experience as a supervisor. 3. The Project Supervisor must be able to read and write English fluently, as well as communicate in the primary language of the Workers.
B. If the Project Supervisor is not on-site at any time whatsoever, all Work shall be stopped. The Project Supervisor shall remain on-site until the Project is complete. The Project Supervisor cannot be
removed from the Project without the written consent of the Owner. The Project Supervisor shall be removed from the Project if so requested by the Owner. C. The Project Supervisor shall maintain the bound Daily Project Log that also includes the entry/exit logs
as required by New York State Department of Labor and section 2.03 of the specifications and the Waste Disposal Log required by section 4.04 of the specifications.
D. The Project Supervisor shall be responsible for the performance of the Work and shall represent the Contractor in all respects at the Project site. The Supervisor shall be the primary point of contact for the Asbestos Project Monitor.
1.12 MEDICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Before exposure to airborne asbestos fibers, provide Workers with a comprehensive medical examination as required by 29 CFR 1910.1001, and 29 CFR 1926.1101. 1. This examination is not required if adequate records show the employee has been examined as
required by 29 CFR 1910.1001, and 29 CFR 1926.1101 within the past year. 2. The same medical examination shall be given on an annual basis to employees engaged in an occupation involving asbestos fibers and within thirty (30) calendar days before or after the termination of employment in such occupations.
3. Medical Examination records shall be maintained on site for each employee. 1.13 TRAINING A. As required by applicable regulations, prior to assignment to asbestos Work instruct each employee with regard to the hazards of asbestos, safety and health precautions, and the use and requirements of
protective clothing and equipment.
The Cornell Store Emergency Power and Emergency Lighting Replacement 02 8213 - 8 Asbestos Abatement
B. Establish a respirator program as required by ANSI Z88.2 and 29 CFR 1910.134, and 29 CFR 1926.1101. Provide respirator training and fit testing. C. An onsite "tool box talk" is mandatory for all Contractor field personnel before the asbestos removal
can begin. This talk will review Cornell University practices and procedures pertaining to asbestos control. Workers not complying with these specifications or Cornell University practices and procedures will be asked to leave the job. 1.14 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION
A. Select respirators from those approved by the Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA), and the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), Department of Health and Human Services. B. Respirators shall be individually fit-tested to personnel under the direction of an Industrial Hygienist on a yearly basis. Fit-tested respirators shall be permanently marked to identify the individual fitted, and
use shall be limited to that individual. Fit-test records shall be maintained on site for each employee. C. Where fiber levels permit, and in compliance with regulatory requirements, Powered Air Purifying Respirators (PAPR) are the minimum allowable respiratory protection permitted to be utilized during
gross removal operations of OSHA Class I or OSHA Class II friable ACM.
D. No respirators shall be issued to personnel without such personnel participating in a respirator training program. E. High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) respirator filters shall be approved by NIOSH and shall conform
to the OSHA requirements in 29 CFR 1910.134 and 29 CFR 1926.1101.
F. A storage area for respirators shall be provided by the Contractor in the clean room side of the personnel decontamination enclosure where they will be kept in a clean environment. G. The Contractor shall provide and make available a sufficient quantity of respirator filters so that filter
changes can be made as necessary during the work day. Filters will be removed and discarded during the decontamination process. Filters cannot be reused. Filters must be changed if breathing becomes
difficult. H. Filters used with negative pressure air purifying respirators shall not be used any longer than one eight (8) hour work day.
I. Any authorized visitor, Worker, or supervisor found in the Work Area not wearing the required respiratory protection shall be removed from the Project site and not be permitted to return. J. The Contractor shall have at least two (2) Powered Air Purifying Respirators stored on site designated for authorized visitors use. Appropriate respirator filters for authorized visitors shall be made available
by the Contractor. 1.15 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver all materials to the job site in original packages with containers bearing manufacturer's name and label.
B. Store all materials at the job site in a suitable and designated area. 1. Store materials subject to deterioration or damage away from wet or damp surfaces and under cover.
2. Protect materials from unintended contamination and theft.
The Cornell Store Emergency Power and Emergency Lighting Replacement 02 8213 - 9 Asbestos Abatement
3. Storage areas shall be kept clean and organized. C. Remove damaged or deteriorated materials from the job site. Materials contaminated with asbestos shall be disposed of as asbestos debris as herein specified. 1.16 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Temporary shutdown of HVAC and lock out of electric power to abatement work areas shall be the responsibility of the contractor and shall be coordinated with the owner. If electrical circuits, machinery and other electrical systems in or passing through a given regulated abatement work area must stay in operation, the contractor shall isolate/seal the live electric as per the requirements of 12
NYCRR Part 56 Subpart 56-7.7. B. The Owner will provide a tie-in location to building power for the Contractor’s GFCI electric panel for project power. All temporary power to the work areas shall be brought in from outside the work area through a ground-fault circuit interrupter at the source. The contractor will be responsible for all temporary power (including the power required by the owner's representative for air sampling
equipment). All operations associated with electrical service work (i.e. lockout, temporary power hook-up, etc.) shall be performed by a licensed electrician. C. Provide temporary lighting with "weatherproof" fixtures for all Work Areas including decontamination
chambers. 1. The entire Work Area shall be kept illuminated at all times.
2. Provide lighting as required by the Environmental Consultant for the purposes of performing required inspections. D. All temporary devices and wiring used in the Work Area shall be capable of decontamination
procedures including HEPA vacuuming and wet-wiping.
E. Utilize domestic water service, if available, from Owner's existing system. Provide hot water heaters with sufficient capacity to meet Project demands. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING A. Provide personnel utilized during the Project with disposable protective whole body clothing, head
coverings, gloves and foot coverings. Provide disposable plastic or rubber gloves to protect hands. Cloth gloves may be worn inside the plastic or rubber for comfort, but shall not be used alone. Make sleeves secure at the wrists and make foot coverings secure at the ankles by the use of tape, or provide disposable coverings with elastic wrists or tops. B. Provide sufficient quantities of protective clothing to assure a minimum of four (4) complete disposable
outfits per day for each individual performing abatement Work. C. Eye protection and hard hats shall be provided and made available for all personnel entering any Work Area.
D. Authorized visitors shall be provided with suitable protective clothing, headgear, eye protection, and
footwear whenever they enter the Work Area.
The Cornell Store Emergency Power and Emergency Lighting Replacement 02 8213 - 10 Asbestos Abatement
2.2 SIGNS AND LABELS A. Provide warning signs and barrier tapes at all approaches to asbestos Work Areas. Locate signs at such distance that personnel may read the sign and take the necessary protective steps required before entering the area.
1. Provide danger signs in vertical format conforming to 29 CFR 1926.1101, minimum 20" x 14" displaying the following legend. DANGER ASBESTOS CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD
AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING ARE REQUIRED IN THIS AREA 2. Provide 3" wide yellow barrier tape printed with black lettered, "DANGER ASBESTOS REMOVAL". Locate barrier tape across all corridors, entrances and access routes to asbestos
Work Area. Install tape 3' to 4' AFF. B. Provide asbestos danger labels affixed to all asbestos materials, scrap, waste, debris and other products contaminated with asbestos.
1. Provide asbestos danger labels of sufficient size to be clearly legible, displaying the following legend:
DANGER CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS AVOID CREATING DUST CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD
2. Provide the following asbestos labels, of sufficient size to be clearly legible, for display on waste
containers (bags or drums) which will be used to transport asbestos contaminated material in accordance with United States Department of Transportation 49 CFR Parts 171 and 172: RQ HAZARDOUS
SUBSTANCE SOLID, NOS
ORM-E, NA 9188 ASBESTOS 3. Generator identification information shall be affixed to each waste container indicating the
following printed in indelible ink: Generator Name Facility Name Facility Address 2.3 DAILY PROJECT LOG
A. Provide a Daily Project Log. The log shall contain on title page the Project name, name, address and phone number of Owner; name, address and phone number of Owner’s Representative; name, address and phone number of Environmental Consultant; name, address and phone number of
Abatement Contractor; emergency numbers including, but not limited to local Fire/Rescue department and all other New York State Department of Labor requirements.
B. All entries into the log shall be made in non-washable, permanent ink and such pen shall be strung to or otherwise attached to the log to prevent removal from the log-in area. Under no circumstances shall pencil entries be permitted.
The Cornell Store Emergency Power and Emergency Lighting Replacement 02 8213 - 11 Asbestos Abatement
C. All persons entering and exiting the Work Area shall sign the log and include name, social security number, and time. D. The Project Supervisor shall document all Work performed daily and note all inspections required by Code Rule 56, i.e. testing and inspection of barriers and enclosures. 2.4 SCAFFOLDING AND LADDERS A. Provide all scaffolding and/or staging as necessary to accomplish the Work of this Contract. Scaffolding may be of suspension type or standing type such as metal tube and coupler, tubular welded frame, pole or outrigger type or cantilever type. The type, erection and use of all scaffolding
and ladders shall comply with all applicable OSHA construction industry standards. B. Provide scaffolding and ladders as required by the Environmental Consultant for the purposes of performing required inspections. 2.5 SURFACTANT (AMENDED WATER)
A. Wet all asbestos-containing materials prior to removal with surfactant mixed and applied in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
B. Approved Manufacturer: 1. International Protective Coatings Corp.: Serpiflex Shield
2. American Coatings Corp.: EPA 55 Asbestos Removal Agent 3. Certified Technologies: CerTane 2075 Penetrating Surfactant 2.6 ENCAPSULANT
A. Encapsulant shall be tinted or pigmented so that application when dry is readily discernible.
2.7 DISPOSAL BAGS, DRUMS, AND CONTAINERS A. Provide 6 mil polyethylene disposal bags printed with asbestos caution labels. Bags shall also be
imprinted with U.S. Department of Transportation required markings.
B. Provide 30 or 55 gallon capacity fiber, plastic, or metal drums capable of being sealed air and water tight if asbestos waste has the potential to damage or puncture disposal bags. Affix asbestos caution labels on lids and at one-third points around drum circumference to assure ready identification.
C. Containers and bags must be labeled in accordance with 40 CFR Part 61 NESHAPS and Code Rule 56. When the bags/containers are moved to the lockable hardtop dumpster from the waste decontamination system washroom, the bags must also be appropriately labeled with the date they are moved on the bag/container in waterproof markings. D. Labeled ACM waste containers or bags shall not be used for non-ACM waste or trash. Any material
placed in labeled containers or bags, whether turned inside out or not shall be handled and disposed of as ACM waste. 2.8 HEPA VACUUM EQUIPMENT
A. All dry vacuuming performed under this contract shall be performed with High Efficiency Particulate
Absolute (HEPA) filter equipped industrial vacuums conforming to ANSI Z9.2. B. Provide tools and specialized equipment including scraping nozzles with integral vacuum hoods connected to a HEPA vacuum with flexible hose.
The Cornell Store Emergency Power and Emergency Lighting Replacement 02 8213 - 12 Asbestos Abatement
2.9 POWER TOOLS A. Any power tools used to drill, cut into, or otherwise disturb asbestos material shall be manufacturer equipped with HEPA filtered local exhaust ventilation. 2.10 POLYETHYLENE SHEETING A. All polyethylene (plastic) sheeting used on the Project (including but not limited to sheeting used for critical and isolation barriers, fixed objects, walls, floors, ceilings, waste container) shall be at least 6 mil fire retardant sheeting.
B. Decontamination enclosure systems shall utilize at least 6 mil opaque fire retardant plastic sheeting. At least 2 layers of 6 mil reinforced fire retardant plastic sheeting shall be used for the flooring. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Should visible emissions or water leaks be observed outside the Work Area, immediately stop Work and institute emergency procedures per Code Rule 56. Should there be elevated fiber levels outside
the Work Area, immediately stop Work, institute emergency procedures per Code Rule 56, and notify all employers and occupants in adjacent areas. All costs incurred in decontaminating such non-Work
Areas and the contents thereof shall be borne by the Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Medical approval, fit test reports, and NYS DOL certificates shall be on site prior to admittance of any Contractor’s employees to the asbestos Work Area.
C. The following submittals, documentation, and postings shall be maintained on-site by the Contractor
during abatement activities at a location approved by the Abatement Project Monitor: 1. Contractor license issued by New York State Department of Labor. 2. Certification, Worker Training, Medical Surveillance: a. New York State Asbestos Handler certification cards for each person employed in the
removal, handling, or disturbance of asbestos. b. Evidence that Workers have received proper training required by the regulations and the
medical examinations required by OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101. c. Documentation that Workers have been fit tested specifically for respirators used on the Project. 3. Daily OSHA personal air monitoring results.
4. NYS Department of Health ELAP certification for the laboratory that will be analyzing the OSHA personnel air samples. 5. NYS Department of Environmental Conservation Waste Transporter Permit. 6. Project documents (specifications and drawings.) 7. Notifications and variances (site specific and applicable.) Ensure that the most up-to-date notifications and variances are on-site.
8. Applicable regulations. 9. Material Safety Data Sheets of supplies/chemicals used on the Project. 10. Approved Abatement Work Plan. 11. List of emergency telephone numbers.
12. Magnahelic manometer semi-annual calibration certification. 13. Daily Project Log.
D. The following documentation shall be maintained on-site by the Abatement Project Monitor during abatement activities: 1. Contractor license issued by New York State Department of Labor.
2. Air Sample Log.
The Cornell Store Emergency Power and Emergency Lighting Replacement 02 8213 - 13 Asbestos Abatement
3. Air sample results. 4. Project Monitor Daily Log 5. Asbestos Survey Report. 6. A copy of ASTM Standard E1368 “Standard Practice for Visual Inspection of Asbestos Abatement Projects.”
E. The Work Area must be vacated by building occupants prior to decontamination enclosure construction and Work Area preparation. F. All demolition necessary to access asbestos containing materials for removal must be conducted within negative pressure enclosures by licensed asbestos handlers. Demolition debris may be disposed of as
construction and demolition debris provided the Abatement Project Monitor determines that it is not contaminated with asbestos and there has been no disturbance of ACM within the enclosure. If the demolition debris is determined to be contaminated or ACM has been disturbed, it must be disposed of as asbestos waste. 3.2 PERSONNEL DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE
A. Provide a personnel decontamination enclosure system. The system shall be contiguous to the Work Area unless the use of a remote unit is permitted by Code Rule 56 or a Site Specific Variance. The decontamination enclosure shall not be located within the work area unless isolation barriers are
installed. If the decontamination unit is accessible to the public it shall be fully framed and sheathed to prevent unauthorized entry.
B. For attached Unit, access to the Work Area will be from the clean room through an air-lock to the shower and through an air lock to the equipment room. Each airlock shall be a minimum of three feet from door to door. Additional air locks shall be provided as required by Code Rule 56 for remote
decontamination enclosures.
C. The decontamination enclosure ceiling and walls shall be covered with one layer of opaque 6 mil polyethylene sheeting. Two layers of reinforced polyethylene sheeting shall be used to cover the floor. D. The entrance to the clean room shall have a lockable door. Provide suitable lockers for storage of
Worker's street clothes. Storage for respirators along with replacement filters and disposable towels shall also be provided.
E. Provide a temporary shower with individual hot and cold water supplies and faucets. Provide a sufficient supply of soap and shampoo. There shall be one shower for every six Workers. The shower room shall be constructed in such a way so that travel through the shower chamber shall be through
the shower. The shower shall not be able to be bypassed. F. Shower water shall be drained, collected and filtered through a system with at least a 5.0 micron particle size collection capability containing a series of several filters with progressively smaller pore sizes to avoid rapid clogging of the system. The filtered waste water shall then be discharged in accordance with applicable codes and the contaminated filters disposed of as asbestos waste.
G. The equipment room shall be used for the storage of tools and equipment. A walk-off pan filled with water shall be located in the Work Area outside the equipment room for Workers to clean foot coverings when leaving the Work Area. A labeled 6 mil plastic ACM waste bag for collection of
contaminated clothing shall be located in this room.
H. The personal decontamination enclosure shall be cleaned and disinfected minimally at the end of each Work shift and as otherwise directed by the Asbestos Project Monitor.
The Cornell Store Emergency Power and Emergency Lighting Replacement 02 8213 - 14 Asbestos Abatement
3.3 WORK AREA ENTRY AND EXIT PROCEDURES A. Access to and from the asbestos Work Area is permitted only through the personnel decontamination enclosure unless otherwise stipulated in a Site Specific Variance, the Cornell Ithaca Campus-Wide Variance, or 12 NYCRR Part 56 Subpart 11 Special Projects.
B. Workers shall sign the entry/exit log upon every entry and exit. C. The following procedures shall be followed when entering the Work Area: 1. Before entering the Work Area, Workers shall proceed to the clean room, remove all street clothes, and don protective clothing, equipment, and respirators.
2. Workers shall proceed from the clean room through the shower room and the equipment room and into the Work Area. D. The following procedures shall be followed when exiting the Work Area: 1. Before leaving the Work Area, gross asbestos contamination will be removed by brushing, wet cleaning and/or HEPA vacuuming.
2. In the equipment room, Workers shall remove disposable clothing, but not respirators, and shall place clothing in plastic disposal bags for disposal as contaminated debris prior to entering the shower room. 3. Workers shall shower thoroughly while wearing respirators, then wash respirator with soap and
water prior to removal. 4. Upon exiting the shower, Workers shall don new disposable clothing if the Work shift is to
continue or street clothes to exit area. Under no circumstances shall Workers enter public non-Work Areas in disposable protective clothing. E. If remote decontamination enclosures are permitted by Code Rule 56 or a Site Specific Variance,
workers shall wear two disposable suits for all phases of Work. Workers exiting the work area shall HEPA vacuum the outer suit, enter the airlock, remove the outer suit and then place it back into the
Work Area. A clean second suit shall be donned before exiting the airlock and proceeding to the decontamination enclosure or another work area via the designated pathway required by Code Rule 56. 3.5 NEGATIVE AIR PRESSURE FILTRATION SYSTEM
A. For small-project work areas, provide a portable asbestos filtration system that develops a minimum pressure differential of negative 0.02 in. of water column within all full enclosure areas relative to adjacent unsealed areas and that provides a minimum of 4 air changes per hour in the Work Area during abatement and 6 air changes for non-friable flooring and/or mastic removal.
B. Such filtration systems must be made operational after critical and isolation barriers are installed but before wall, floor, and ceilings are plasticized and shall be operated 24 hours per day during the entire Project until the final cleanup is completed and satisfactory results of the final air samples are received from the laboratory.
C. The system shall include a series of pre-filters and filters to provide High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) filtration of particles down to 0.3 microns at 100% efficiency and below 0.3 microns at 99.9% efficiency. Provide sufficient replacement filters to replace pre-filters every 2 hours, secondary pre-filters every 24 hours, and primary HEPA filters every 600 hours of operation.
D. A minimum of one additional filtration unit of at least the same capacity as the primary unit(s) shall be installed and fully functional to be used during primary unit (s) filter changing and in case of primary
failure. E. At no time will the unit exhaust indoors, within 15 feet of a receptor, including but not limited to windows and doors, or adversely affect the air intake of the building. Exhaust ducting shall not exceed 25’ in
The Cornell Store Emergency Power and Emergency Lighting Replacement 02 8213 - 15 Asbestos Abatement
length unless the conditions of AV-A-2 are utilized. Provide construction fencing at ground level exhaust termination locations per Code Rule 56. F. Upon electric power failure or shut-down of any filtration unit, all abatement activities shall stop immediately and only resume after power is restored and all filtration units are fully operating. For
shut-downs longer than one hour, all openings into the Work Area, including the decontamination enclosures, shall be sealed. G. The Contractor shall provide a manometer to verify negative air pressure. Manometers shall be read twice daily and recorded within the Daily Project Log.
H. There shall be at least a 4 hour settling period after the Work Area is fully prepared and the negative filtration units have been started to ensure integrity of the barriers. I. Once installed and operational, the Contractor’s Supervisor shall conduct daily inspections of the Work Area to insure the airtight integrity of the enclosure and operation of the negative air system. Findings shall be recorded within the Daily Project Log. Inspections shall also be conducted on days when no
abatement activities are in progress per Code Rule 56 (i.e. weekends). 3.6 REMOVAL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS
A. Asbestos-containing materials shall be removed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the approved Asbestos Work Plan. Only one type of ACM shall be abated at a time within a Work Area.
Where there are multiple types of ACM requiring abatement, Code Rule 56 procedures for sequential abatement shall be followed. B. Sufficiently wet asbestos materials with a low pressure, airless fine spray of surfactant to ensure full
penetration prior to material removal. Re-wet material that does not display evidence of saturation.
C. One Worker shall continuously apply amended water while ACM is being removed. D. Perform cutting, drilling, abrading, or any penetration or disturbance of asbestos containing material in a manner to minimize the dispersal of asbestos fibers into the air. Use equipment and methods
specifically designed to limit generation of airborne asbestos particles. All power operated tools used shall be provided with HEPA equipped filtered local exhaust ventilation.
E. Upon removal of ACM from the substrate, the newly exposed surfaces shall be HEPA vacuumed and/or wet cleaned. Surfaces must be thoroughly cleaned using necessary methods and any required solvents to completely remove any adhesive, mastic, etc.
F. All removed material shall be placed into 6 mil plastic disposal bags or other suitable container upon detachment from the substrate. Cleanup of accumulations of loose debris or waste shall be performed whenever there is enough accumulation to fill a single bag or container and minimally at the end of each workshift.
G. Large components shall be wrapped in two layers of 6 mil polyethylene sheeting. Sharp components likely to tear disposal bags shall be placed in fiber drums or boxes and then wrapped with sheeting. H. Power or pressure washers are not permitted for asbestos removal or clean-up procedures unless
approved in a Site Specific Variance.
I. All open ends of pipe and duct insulation not scheduled for removal shall be encapsulated using lag cloth. J. All construction and demolition debris determined by the Environmental Consultant to be contaminated
with asbestos shall be handled and disposed of as asbestos waste.
The Cornell Store Emergency Power and Emergency Lighting Replacement 02 8213 - 16 Asbestos Abatement
K. The use of metal shovels, metal dust pans, etc. are not permitted inside the work area. 3.7 EQUIPMENT AND WASTE CONTAINER DECONTAMINATION AND REMOVAL PROCEDURES
A. External surfaces of contaminated containers and equipment shall be cleaned by wet cleaning and/or HEPA vacuuming in the Work Area before moving such items into the waste decontamination enclosure system airlock by persons assigned to this duty. The persons in the Work Area shall not enter the airlock. No gross removal operations are permitted when waste transfer is in progress. B. The containers and equipment shall be removed from the airlock by persons stationed in the
washroom during waste removal operations. The external surfaces of containers and equipment shall be cleaned a second time by wet cleaning. C. The cleaned containers of asbestos material and equipment are to be dried of any excessive pooled or beaded liquid, placed in uncontaminated 6 mil plastic bags or sheeting, as the item's physical characteristics demand, and sealed airtight.
D. The clean recontainerized items shall be moved into the airlock that leads to the holding area. Workers in the washroom shall not enter this airlock.
E. Containers and equipment shall be moved from the airlock and into the holding area by persons dressed in clean personal protective equipment, who have entered from the holding area.
F. The cleaned containers of asbestos material and equipment shall be placed in water tight carts with doors or tops that shall be closed and secured. These carts shall be held in the holding area pending removal. The carts shall be wet cleaned and/or HEPA vacuumed at least once each day.
G. The exit from the decontamination enclosure system shall be secured to prevent unauthorized entry.
H. Where the waste removal enclosure is part of the personnel decontamination enclosure, waste removal shall not occur during shift changes or when otherwise occupied. Precautions shall be taken to prevent short circuiting and cycling of air outward through the shower and clean room.
3.8 TENT ENCLOSURES
A. Tent enclosures may only be used where specifically permitted by Code Rule 56 or a Site Specific Variance issued by the NYS Department of Labor.
B. The Contractor shall restrict access to the immediate area where tent removal procedures are taking place using barrier tape and/or construction barriers. Caution signs shall be posted. C. Remote personnel and waste decontamination enclosures shall be constructed when required, based on the scope of the tent work scope. Configuration shall be as required by Project size. For tent enclosures with gross abatement of friable materials, a contiguous decontamination system shall be
constructed, maintained and utilized, except for minor size tent enclosure work areas where a remote decontamination enclosure is permitted by Code Rule 56. D. The Work Area shall be precleaned. All objects and equipment that will remain in the restricted area
during abatement shall be sealed with two layers of six mil polyethylene and tape.
E. The tent shall be a single use barrier constructed with a rigid frame and at least two layers of six mil polyethylene unless one layer of six mil polyethylene is otherwise permitted by Code Rule 56. Tents with twenty (20) square feet or less of floor space or no gross removal of friable ACM shall be constructed of one (1) layer of six mil polyethylene and shall include walls, ceilings and a floor (except
The Cornell Store Emergency Power and Emergency Lighting Replacement 02 8213 - 17 Asbestos Abatement
portions of walls, floors and ceilings that are the removal surface) with double folded seams. All seams shall be sealed airtight using duct tape and/or spray adhesive. F. The tent shall be constructed with at least one airlock for worker/waste egress.
G. A manometer shall be used for all OSHA Class I abatement. H. Negative air shall be maintained at four (4) air changes per hour for non-friable and glovebag abatement tent enclosure work areas. Eight (8) air changes shall be maintained for friable gross removal tent enclosure work areas. In a Minor size abatement tent enclosure work area a HEPA vacuum may be used to maintain the required air changes.
I. OSHA compliance air monitoring is required per section 1.09. J. ACM removal shall follow procedures defined in section 3.07. K. Waste material shall be placed in properly labeled 6 mil plastic bags or other appropriate containers.
The outside of the bags or containers shall be wet wiped and/or HEPA vacuumed and shall then be placed in a second bag/container before being transported to the waste storage container. All transportation of waste bags and containers outside the Work Area shall be in watertight carts. These carts shall be held in the holding area pending removal. The carts shall be wet cleaned and/or HEPA
vacuumed at least once each day.
L. Following completion of gross abatement and after all accumulations of asbestos waste materials have been containerized, the following decontamination procedures shall be followed. 1. All bagged asbestos waste and unnecessary equipment shall be decontaminated and removed from the Work Area.
2. All surfaces in the Work Area shall be wet cleaned. A wet-purpose shop vacuum may be used to pick up excess liquid, and shall be decontaminated prior to removal from the Work Area.
3. The Asbestos Project Monitor shall conduct a visual inspection of the Work Area for cleanliness and completion of abatement. 4. After the waiting/settling and drying time requirements have elapsed, aggressive final clearance air sampling shall then be conducted by the Environmental Consultant.
5. Upon receipt of satisfactory final clearance air sampling results, the tent shall be collapsed into itself, placed in suitable disposal bags, and transported to the waste decontamination enclosure.
Isolation and critical barriers shall then be removed. 3.9 GLOVEBAG REMOVAL
A. Glovebag removals may only be used as specifically permitted by Code Rule 56 or a Site Specific Variance issued by the NYS Department of Labor. Glovebags may only be used on piping. B. In addition to conformance with applicable regulations and variances, glovebag removals are only permitted to be conducted within tent enclosures complying with these specifications.
C. The Contractor shall restrict access to the immediate area where tent/glovebag removal procedures are taking place using barrier tape and/or construction barriers. Caution signs shall be posted. D. Remote personnel and waste decontamination enclosures shall be constructed. Configuration shall be
as required by Project size.
E. Glovebag removals shall utilize commercially available glovebags of at least six mil thickness. Use shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the following minimum requirements: 1. The sides of the glovebag shall be cut to fit the size pipe being removed. Tools shall be inserted into the attached tool pocket.
The Cornell Store Emergency Power and Emergency Lighting Replacement 02 8213 - 18 Asbestos Abatement
2. The glovebag shall be placed around the pipe and the open edges shall be folded and sealed with staples and duct tape. The glovebag shall also be sealed at the pipe to form a tight seal. 3. Openings shall be made in the glovebag for the wetting tube and HEPA vacuum hose. The opening shall be sealed to form a tight seal. 4. All glovebags shall be smoke tested by the Asbestos Project Monitor under negative pressure
using the HEPA vacuum before removal operations commence. Glovebags that do not pass the smoke test shall be resealed and then retested. 5. After first wetting the materials to be removed, removal may commence. ACM shall be continuously wetted. After removal of the ACM, the piping shall be scrubbed or brushed so that no visible ACM remains. Open ends of pipe insulation shall be encapsulated. 6. After the piping is cleaned, the inside of the glovebag shall be washed down and the wetting
tube removed. Using the HEPA vacuum, the glovebag shall be collapsed and then twisted and sealed with tape with the ACM at the bottom of the bag. 7. A disposal bag shall be placed around the glovebag that is then detached from the pipe. The disposal bag is then sealed and transported to the decontamination enclosure. F. After glovebag removals are complete, tent decontamination procedures shall be followed.
PART 4 DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS WASTE 4.1 TRANSPORTATION AND DISPOSAL SITE
A. The Contractor's Hauler and Disposal Site shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative. B. The Contractor shall give twenty-four (24) hour notification prior to removing any waste from the site. Waste shall be removed from the site only during normal working hours unless otherwise specified. No
waste may be taken from the site unless the Contractor and Environmental Consultant are present and the Environmental Consultant authorizes the release of the waste as described herein.
C. All waste generated as part of the asbestos project shall be removed from the site within ten (10) calendar days after successful completion of all asbestos abatement work.
D. Upon arrival at the Project Site, the Hauler must possess and present to the Environmental Consultant a valid New York State Department of Environmental Conservation Part 364 Asbestos Hauler's Permit.
The Environmental Consultant may verify the authenticity of the hauler's permit with the proper authority. E. The Hauler, with the Contractor and the Environmental Consultant, shall inspect all material in the
transport container prior to taking possession and signing the Asbestos Waste Manifests. F. Unless specifically approved by the Owner, the Contractor shall not permit any off-site transfers of the waste or allow the waste to be transported or combined with any other off-site asbestos material. The Hauler must travel directly to the disposal site as identified on the notifications with no unauthorized stops.
4.2 WASTE STORAGE CONTAINERS A. All waste containers shall be fully enclosed and lockable (i.e. enclosed dumpster, trailer, etc.). No open
containers will be permitted on-site (i.e. open dumpster with canvas cover, etc.) unless specifically permitted by a Site Specific Variance.
B. The Environmental Consultant shall verify that the waste storage container and/or truck tags (license plates) match that listed on the New York State Department of Environmental Conservation Part 364 permit. Any container not listed on the permit shall be removed from the site immediately.
The Cornell Store Emergency Power and Emergency Lighting Replacement 02 8213 - 19 Asbestos Abatement
C. The container shall be plasticized and sealed with two (2) layers of 6 mil polyethylene. Once on site, it shall be kept locked at all times, except during load out. The waste container shall not be used for storage of equipment or contractor supplies. D. While on-site, the container shall be labeled with EPA Danger signage:
DANGER CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS AVOID CREATING DUST CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD
E. The New York State Department of Environmental Conservation Asbestos Hauler's Permit number shall be stenciled on both sides and back of the container. F. The container is not permitted to be loaded unless it is properly plasticized, has the appropriate danger signage affixed, and has the permit number appropriately stenciled on the container. 4.3 ASBESTOS WASTE MANIFESTS A. The proposed asbestos waste manifest shall be submitted to the Owner’s Representative prior to the start of the project for review and approval.
B. The Manifest shall be completed by the Contractor and verified by the Environmental Consultant that
all the information and amounts are accurate and the proper signatures are in place. C. The Manifests shall have the appropriate signatures prior to any waste being removed from the site.
D. Copies of the completed Manifest shall be retained by the Environmental Consultant and the Contractor and shall remain on site for inspection.
E. Upon arrival at the Disposal Site, the Manifest shall be signed by the Disposal Facility operator to certify receipt of ACM covered by the manifest. The Disposal Facility operator shall return the original Manifest to the Contractor.
F. The Contractor shall forward copies of the Manifest to the Owner’s Representative within 14 days of
the waste container being removed from the site. Failure to do so may result in payment being withheld from the Contractor. G. Originals of all waste disposal manifests shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Owner’s
Representative with the final close-out documentation. END OF SECTION 02 82 13
The Cornell Store Emergency Power and Emergency Lighting Replacement 02 8213 - 20 Asbestos Abatement
Attachment A
Cornell Ithaca Campus-Wide Variance File No. 20-0068
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
07 8400 - 1 Firestopping
SECTION 07 8400
FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Firestopping systems.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
2020.
B.ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems 2013a
(Reapproved 2017).
C.ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products current edition.
D.FM (AG) - FM Approval Guide current edition.
E.SCAQMD 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications 1989 (Amended 2017).
F.UL 1479 - Standard for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestops Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
G.UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory Current Edition.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations.
C.Sustainable Design Submittal: Submit VOC content documentation for nonpreformed
materials.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the scheduled fire
ratings when tested in accordance with methods indicated.
1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions
during and after installation; maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for three
days after installation of materials.
B.Provide ventilation in areas where solvent-cured materials are being installed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.Firestopping Manufacturers:
1.3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop/#sle.
2.Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com/#sle.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.Firestopping Materials: Any materials meeting requirements.
B.Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: Provide products having VOC content lower
than that required by SCAQMD 1168.
C.Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Provide type of
materials as required for tested firestopping assembly.
D.Fire Ratings: Refer to drawings for required systems and ratings.
2.03 FIRESTOPPING PENETRATIONS THROUGH CONCRETE AND CONCRETE MASONRY
CONSTRUCTION
2.04 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS
A.Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements.
1.Fire Ratings: Use system that is listed by FM (AG), ITS (DIR), or UL (FRD) and tested
in accordance with ASTM E814, ASTM E119, or UL 1479 with F Rating equal to fire
rating of penetrated assembly and minimum T Rating Equal to F Rating and in
compliance with other specified requirements.
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
07 8400 - 2 Firestopping
B.Firestopping at Uninsulated Metallic Pipe and Conduit Penetrations, of diameter 4 inches or
less: Caulk or putty.
1.Floors: ULDesign No.See drawings,FRating 2hour.
2.Stairway Walls: ULDesign No.See drawings,FRating 2hour.
3.Corridor Walls: ULDesign No.See drawings,FRating 1-1/2hour.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other materials that
could adversely affect bond of firestopping material.
B.Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions, completely closing openings.
3.04 CLEANING
A.Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
END OF SECTION
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 0519 - 1 Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables
SECTION 26 0519
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Single conductor building wire.
B.Wiring connectors.
C.Electrical tape.
D.Heat shrink tubing.
E.Wire pulling lubricant.
F.Cable ties.
G.Firestop sleeves.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 07 8400 - Firestopping.
B.Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Additional requirements
for grounding conductors and grounding connectors.
C.Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire 2013 (Reapproved
2018).
B.ASTM B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard,
Medium-Hard, or Soft 2011 (Reapproved 2017).
C.ASTM B33 - Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for
Electrical Purposes 2010, with Editorial Revision (2020).
D.ASTM B787/B787M - Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded
Copper Conductors for Subsequent Insulation 2004 (Reapproved 2020).
E.ASTM D3005 - Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic
Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape 2017.
F.ASTM D4388 - Standard Specification for Nonmetallic Semi-Conducting and Electrically
Insulating Rubber Tapes 2013.
G.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015.
H.NEMA WC 70 - Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical
Energy 2009.
I.NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and
Systems 2017.
J.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
K.UL 44 - Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
L.UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
M.UL 486A-486B - Wire Connectors Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
N.UL 486C - Splicing Wire Connectors Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
O.UL 486D - Sealed Wire Connector Systems Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
P.UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1.Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under other
sections with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor
sizes increased for voltage drop.
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 0519 - 2 Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables
2.Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide
terminations suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.
3.Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for
conductors and cables, including detailed information on materials, construction, ratings,
listings, and available sizes, configurations, and stranding.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Do not install or otherwise handle thermoplastic-insulated conductors at temperatures lower
than 14 degrees F, unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's instructions. When
installation below this temperature is unavoidable, notify Architect and obtain direction
before proceeding with work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS
A.Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and
product listing.
B.Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise
indicated, permitted, or required.
C.Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is not permitted.
D.Armored cable is not permitted.
E.Metal-clad cable is not permitted.
2.02 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B.Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
C.Provide new conductors and cables manufactured not more than one year prior to
installation.
D.Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring,
connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system.
E.Comply with NEMA WC 70.
F.Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL
83.
G.Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44.
H.Conductor Material:
1.Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this
project. Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper.
2.Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper
conductors complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B787M unless
otherwise indicated.
3.Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33.
I.Minimum Conductor Size:
1.Branch Circuits: 12 AWG.
a.Exceptions:
1)20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 75 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop.
2)20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 8 AWG, for voltage drop.
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 0519 - 3 Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables
J.Conductor Color Coding:
1.Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having
jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project.
2.Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation.
3.Color Code:
a.480Y/277 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:
1)Phase A: Brown.
2)Phase B: Orange.
3)Phase C: Yellow.
4)Neutral/Grounded: Gray.
b.208Y/120 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:
1)Phase A: Black.
2)Phase B: Red.
3)Phase C: Blue.
4)Neutral/Grounded: White.
c.Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green.
2.03 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE
A.Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
B.Conductor Stranding:
1.Feeders and Branch Circuits:
a.Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Stranded.
b.Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.
C.Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.
D.Insulation:
1.Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN or THHN/THWN-2, except as indicated
below.
a.Size 4 AWG and Larger: Type XHHW-2.
b.Installed Underground: Type XHHW-2.
2.04 WIRING CONNECTORS
A.Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the
conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C as
applicable.
B.Connectors for Grounding and Bonding: Comply with Section 26 0526.
C.Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps:
1.Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Smaller: Use twist-on insulated spring
connectors.
2.Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or
compression connectors.
D.Wiring Connectors for Terminations:
1.Provide terminal lugs for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with
terminations designed for terminal lugs.
2.Provide compression adapters for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with
mechanical lugs when only compression connectors are specified.
3.Where over-sized conductors are larger than the equipment terminations can
accommodate, provide connectors suitable for reducing to appropriate size, but not
less than required for the rating of the overcurrent protective device.
4.Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or
compression connectors where connectors are required.
E.Do not use insulation-piercing or insulation-displacement connectors designed for use with
conductors without stripping insulation.
F.Do not use push-in wire connectors as a substitute for twist-on insulated spring connectors.
G.Twist-on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F for standard
applications and 302 degrees F for high temperature applications; pre-filled with sealant
and listed as complying with UL 486D for damp and wet locations.
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 0519 - 4 Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables
H.Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type or set-screw type.
I.Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A.Electrical Tape:
1.Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Integrally colored to match color code indicated;
listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion,
corrosion, and sunlight; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221
degrees F.
2.Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed as complying
with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight;
conformable for application down to 0 degrees F and suitable for continuous
temperature environment up to 221 degrees F.
3.Rubber Splicing Electrical Tape: Ethylene Propylene Rubber (EPR) tape, complying
with ASTM D4388; minimum thickness of 30 mil; suitable for continuous temperature
environment up to 194 degrees F and short-term 266 degrees F overload service.
4.Electrical Filler Tape: Rubber-based insulating moldable putty, minimum thickness of
125 mil; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 176 degrees F.
5.Moisture Sealing Electrical Tape: Insulating mastic compound laminated to flexible,
all-weather vinyl backing; minimum thickness of 90 mil.
B.Heat Shrink Tubing: Heavy-wall, split-resistant, with factory-applied adhesive; rated 600 V;
suitable for direct burial applications; listed as complying with UL 486D.
C.Wire Pulling Lubricant: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed
and suitable for use at the installation temperature.
D.Cable Ties: Material and tensile strength rating suitable for application.
E.Firestop Sleeves: Listed; provide as required to preserve fire resistance rating of building
elements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.
B.Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
C.Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized
to accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70.
D.Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
E.Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and
cables.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.Circuiting Requirements:
1.Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic.
2.When circuit destination is indicated without specific routing, determine exact routing
required.
3.Arrange circuiting to minimize splices.
4.Include circuit lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of location
indicated.
5.Maintain separation of Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and
power-limited circuits in accordance with NFPA 70.
6.Maintain separation of wiring for emergency systems in accordance with NFPA 70.
7.Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated, when branch circuits are
indicated as separate, combining them together in a single raceway is not permitted.
a.Provide no more than six current-carrying conductors in a single raceway.
Dedicated neutral conductors are considered current-carrying conductors.
b.Increase size of conductors as required to account for ampacity derating.
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 0519 - 5 Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables
c.Size raceways, boxes, etc. to accommodate conductors.
8.Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neutral/grounded
conductors among up to three single phase branch circuits of different phases
installed in the same raceway is not permitted. Provide dedicated neutral/grounded
conductor for each individual branch circuit.
B.Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
D.Installation in Raceway:
1.Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other
contaminants.
2.Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time.
3.Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tension and sidewall pressure.
4.Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not
recommended by the manufacturer.
E.Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same
manner.
F.Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable
supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent
support from building structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or
other systems.
1.Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support
system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conductors and cables to lay
on ceiling tiles.
2.Installation in Vertical Raceways: Provide supports where vertical rise exceeds
permissible limits.
G.Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches of slack at each outlet.
H.Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other
equipment enclosures.
I.Group or otherwise identify neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded
conductors inside enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70.
J.Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors.
1.Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or
make splices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters.
2.Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without
cutting, nicking or damaging conductors.
3.Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.
4.Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion,
oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces.
5.Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's
recommended torque settings.
6.Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended
tools and dies.
K.Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable
for the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced
conductors.
1.Dry Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors,
electrical tape, or heat shrink tubing.
a.For taped connections, first apply adequate amount of rubber splicing electrical
tape or electrical filler tape, followed by outer covering of vinyl insulating electrical
tape.
2.Damp Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors,
electrical tape, or heat shrink tubing.
a.For connections with insulating covers, apply outer covering of moisture sealing
electrical tape.
b.For taped connections, follow same procedure as for dry locations but apply outer
covering of moisture sealing electrical tape.
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 0519 - 6 Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables
3.Wet Locations: Use heat shrink tubing.
L.Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape.
M.Identify conductors and cables in accordance with Section 26 0553.
N.Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using
materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400.
O.Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and
devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B.Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
C.Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.2. The insulation resistance
test is required for all conductors. The resistance test for parallel conductors listed as
optional is not required.
D.Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables.
END OF SECTION
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 0526 - 1 Grounding and Bonding for
Electrical Systems
SECTION 26 0526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Grounding and bonding requirements.
B.Conductors for grounding and bonding.
C.Connectors for grounding and bonding.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Additional
requirements for conductors for grounding and bonding, including conductor color coding.
B.Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015.
B.NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and
Systems 2017.
C.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
D.UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1.Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for
grounding and bonding system components.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS
A.Existing Work: Where existing grounding and bonding system components are indicated to
be reused, they may be reused only where they are free from corrosion, integrity and
continuity are verified, and where acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.
B.Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product
listing.
C.Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required components, conductors,
connectors, conduit, boxes, fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete
grounding and bonding system.
D.Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than
applicable minimum size requirements specified.
2.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS
A.General Requirements:
1.Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
2.Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable.
B.Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 0526:
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 0526 - 2 Grounding and Bonding for
Electrical Systems
1.Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated.
a.Exceptions:
1)Use bare copper conductors where installed underground in direct contact
with earth.
2)Use bare copper conductors where directly encased in concrete (not in
raceway).
C.Connectors for Grounding and Bonding:
1.Description: Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the
conductors and items to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL 467.
2.Unless otherwise indicated, use exothermic welded connections for underground,
concealed and other inaccessible connections.
3.Unless otherwise indicated, use mechanical connectorsfor accessible connections.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has been
completed.
B.Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
C.Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
C.Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors.
1.Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without
cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate
insertion into connector.
2.Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points,
and contact surfaces.
3.Exothermic Welds: Make connections using molds and weld material suitable for the
items to be connected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
4.Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's
recommended torque settings.
5.Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended
tools and dies.
D.Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section 26 0553.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B.Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS except Section 4.
C.Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.
D.Perform ground electrode resistance tests under normally dry conditions. Precipitation
within the previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions.
E.Investigate and correct deficiencies where measured ground resistances do not comply with
specified requirements.
END OF SECTION
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 0529 - 1 Hangers and Supports for
Electrical Systems
SECTION 26 0529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Support and attachment requirements and components for equipment, conduit, cable,
boxes, and other electrical work.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.
B.Section 26 0533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems: Additional support and attachment
requirements for conduits.
C.Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems: Additional support and attachment
requirements for boxes.
D.Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting: Additional support and attachment requirements for
interior luminaires.
E.Section 26 5600 - Exterior Lighting: Additional support and attachment requirements for
exterior luminaires.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products 2017.
B.ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware 2016a.
C.ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and
Steel 2019.
D.MFMA-4 - Metal Framing Standards Publication 2004.
E.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015.
F.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1.Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with the actual equipment
and components to be installed.
2.Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and materials
required for installation.
3.Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting
surfaces at the installed locations.
4.Coordinate the arrangement of supports with ductwork, piping, equipment and other
potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.
5.Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
B.Sequencing:
1.Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until concrete
has fully cured in accordance with Section 03 3000.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for channel
(strut) framing systems, non-penetrating rooftop supports, and post-installed concrete and
masonry anchors.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Comply with NFPA 70.
B.Comply with applicable building code.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 0529 - 2 Hangers and Supports for
Electrical Systems
A.Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A.General Requirements:
1.Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and
hardware as necessary for the complete installation of electrical work.
2.Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended,
where applicable.
3.Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in
accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to be
supportedwith a minimum safety factor of 10. Include consideration for vibration,
equipment operation, and shock loads where applicable.
4.Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product
listing.
5.Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment
where installed.
a.Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633.
b.Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM
A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M.
B.Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to be
supported.
1.Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron.
2.Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated.
C.Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported.
D.Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel
(strut) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly of
supports.
1.Comply with MFMA-4.
E.Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated.
1.Minimum Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required:
a.Equipment Supports: 1/2 inch diameter.
b.Busway Supports: 1/2 inch diameter.
c.Single Conduit up to 1 inch (27 mm) trade size: 1/4 inch diameter.
d.Single Conduit larger than 1 inch (27 mm) trade size: 3/8 inch diameter.
e.Trapeze Support for Multiple Conduits: 3/8 inch diameter.
f.Outlet Boxes: 1/4 inch diameter.
g.Luminaires: 1/4 inch diameter.
F.Anchors and Fasteners:
1.Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and
fastener types indicated for the specified applications.
2.Concrete: Use preset concrete inserts, expansion anchors, or screw anchors.
3.Solid or Grout-Filled Masonry: Use expansion anchors or screw anchors.
4.Hollow Masonry: Use toggle bolts.
5.Hollow Stud Walls: Use toggle bolts.
6.Steel: Use beam clamps, machine bolts, or welded threaded studs.
7.Wood: Use wood screws.
8.Preset Concrete Inserts: Continuous metal channel (strut) and spot inserts specifically
designed to be cast in concrete ceilings, walls, and floors.
a.Comply with MFMA-4.
b.Channel Material: Use galvanized steel.
c.Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of metal channel (strut) framing system.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 0529 - 3 Hangers and Supports for
Electrical Systems
B.Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components.
C.Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
C.Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping,
ductwork, or other systems.
D.Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from
suspended ceiling support system or ceiling grid.
E.Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from roof
deck.
F.Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of
Structural Engineer.
G.Equipment Support and Attachment:
1.Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) to
support equipment as required.
2.Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted on
hollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out.
3.Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp
locations to provide space between equipment and mounting surface.
4.Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies
on its own weight for support.
H.Conduit Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 0533.13.
I.Box Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 0533.16.
J.Interior Luminaire Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 5100.
K.Exterior Luminaire Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 5600.
L.Preset Concrete Inserts: Use manufacturer provided closure strips to inhibit concrete
seepage during concrete pour.
M.Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.
N.Remove temporary supports.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B.Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects.
C.Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.
D.Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment
components.
END OF SECTION
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 0533.13 - 1 Conduit for Electrical Systems
SECTION 26 0533.13
CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).
B.Electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
C.Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit.
D.Conduit fittings.
E.Accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 07 8400 - Firestopping.
B.Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
C.Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC) 2015.
B.ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing -- Steel (EMT-S)
2015.
C.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015.
D.NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT) 2013.
E.NECA 111 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways (RNC, ENT, LFNC) 2017.
F.NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic
Tubing, and Cable 2014.
G.NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit 2020.
H.NEMA TC 3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing
2016.
I.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
J.UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
K.UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
L.UL 651 - Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
M.UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1.Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be installed,
including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.
2.Coordinate the arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork, piping,
equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.
3.Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, and
equipment installed under other sections or by others.
4.Coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that preserve the
integrity of the roofing system and do not void the roof warranty.
5.Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
B.Sequencing:
1.Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of conduit is
complete between outlet, junction and splicing points.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures.
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 0533.13 - 2 Conduit for Electrical Systems
B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conduits
and fittings.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
A.Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway
system.
B.Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
C.Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than
applicable minimum size requirements specified.
2.02 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)
A.Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI
C80.1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.
B.Fittings:
1.Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and
labeled as complying with UL 514B.
2.Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
3.Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and
compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted.
2.03 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A.Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI
C80.3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797.
B.Fittings:
1.Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying
with UL 514B.
2.Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
3.Connectors and Couplings: Use compression (gland) or set-screw type.
a.Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings.
2.04 RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT
A.Description: NFPA 70, Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC
2 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; Schedule 80 unless otherwise
indicated; rated for use with conductors rated 90 degrees C.
B.Fittings:
1.Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected.
2.Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as complying
with UL 651; material to match conduit.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A.Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with
the conduit to be installed.
B.Solvent Cement for PVC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of
conduit and fittings to be installed.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B.Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits.
C.Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 0533.13 - 3 Conduit for Electrical Systems
C.Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 101.
D.Install rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit in accordance with NECA 111.
E.Conduit Support:
1.Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 0529 using
suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
2.Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from
piping, ductwork, or other systems.
3.Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support
system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling
tiles.
4.Use conduit clamp to support single conduit from beam clamp or threaded rod.
5.Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel (strut) with
accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel suspended conduits.
F.Connections and Terminations:
1.Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of
galvanized steel conduits prior to making connections.
2.Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-
piece couplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads.
3.Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another.
4.Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double
lock nuts for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations.
5.Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect
conductors.
6.Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electrical
continuity.
G.Penetrations:
1.Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and
grade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer.
2.Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3.Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation.
Set sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required.
4.Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground.
5.Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible
point to prevent entry of moisture and gases.
6.Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity
of membrane.
7.Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings
and curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where
penetrations are necessary, seal as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of
roofing system and maintain roof warranty. Include proposed locations of penetrations
and methods for sealing with submittals.
8.Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements,
using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400.
H.Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide
expansion and expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or
connected equipment. This includes, but is not limited to:
1.Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or
deflection.
2.Where calculated in accordance with NFPA 70 for rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
conduit installed above ground to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction.
3.Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost.
I.Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential
substantial temperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at
an accessible point near the penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not
limited to:
1.Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces.
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 0533.13 - 4 Conduit for Electrical Systems
2.Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior
spaces.
J.Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B.Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.
C.Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits.
3.04 CLEANING
A.Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.Immediately after installation of conduit, use suitable manufactured plugs to provide
protection from entry of moisture and foreign material and do not remove until ready for
installation of conductors.
END OF SECTION
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 0533.16 - 1 Boxes for Electrical Systems
SECTION 26 0533.16
BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Outlet and device boxes up to 100 cubic inches, including those used as junction and pull
boxes.
B.Cabinets and enclosures, including junction and pull boxes larger than 100 cubic inches.
C.Underground boxes/enclosures.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 08 3100 - Access Doors and Panels: Panels for maintaining access to concealed
boxes.
B.Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
C.Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices:
1.Wall plates.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015.
B.NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices 2010.
C.NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic
Tubing, and Cable 2014.
D.NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports 2013.
E.NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports 2013.
F.NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) 2018.
G.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
H.SCTE 77 - Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity 2017.
I.UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
J.UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
K.UL 508A - UL Standard for Safety Industrial Control Panels 2018.
L.UL 514A - Metallic Outlet Boxes Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
M.UL 514C - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1.Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping,
equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and
working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.
2.Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance
requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.
3.Coordinate minimum sizes of boxes with the actual installed arrangement of
conductors, clamps, support fittings, and devices, calculated according to NFPA 70.
4.Coordinate minimum sizes of pull boxes with the actual installed arrangement of
connected conduits, calculated according to NFPA 70.
5.Coordinate the placement of boxes with millwork, furniture, devices, equipment, etc.
installed under other sections or by others.
6.Coordinate the work with other trades to preserve insulation integrity.
7.Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush-
mounted boxes where indicated.
8.Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 0533.16 - 2 Boxes for Electrical Systems
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for cabinets
and enclosures, boxes for hazardous (classified) locations, floor boxes, and underground
boxes/enclosures.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BOXES
A.General Requirements:
1.Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted
by NFPA 70 and product listing.
2.Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway
system and to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed.
3.Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
4.Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than
applicable minimum size requirements specified.
5.Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors
terminate.
B.Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches, Including Those Used as Junction and
Pull Boxes:
1.Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required.
2.Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless
otherwise indicated or required; furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketed
covers.
3.Use nonmetallic boxes where exposed rigid PVC conduit is used.
4.Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush-mounted in concrete.
5.Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masonry walls.
6.Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device configuration
where required.
7.Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction.
8.Do not use "through-wall" boxes designed for access from both sides of wall.
9.Sheet-Steel Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1, and list and label as complying with UL
514A.
10.Cast Metal Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, and list and label as complying with UL
514A; furnish with threaded hubs.
11.Nonmetallic Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2, and list and label as complying with UL
514C.
12.Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and
weight of load to be supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting
of luminaire where required.
13.Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construction. Do not
use field-connected gangable boxes unless specifically indicated or permitted.
14.Wall Plates: Comply with Section 26 2726.
C.Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:
1.Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or UL
508A.
2.NEMA 250 Environment Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
3.Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:
a.Provide screw-cover or hinged-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated.
D.Underground Boxes/Enclosures:
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 0533.16 - 3 Boxes for Electrical Systems
1.Description: In-ground, open bottom boxes furnished with flush, non-skid covers with
legend indicating type of service and stainless steel tamper resistant cover bolts.
2.Size: As indicated on drawings.
3.Depth: As required to extend below frost line to prevent frost upheaval, but not less
than 12 inches.
4.Applications:
a.Sidewalks and Landscaped Areas Subject Only to Occasional Nondeliberate
Vehicular Traffic: Use polymer concrete enclosures, with minimum SCTE 77 Tier
8 load rating.
b.Do not use polymer concrete enclosures in areas subject to deliberate vehicular
traffic.
5.Polymer Concrete Underground Boxes/Enclosures: Comply with SCTE 77.
a.Combination fiberglass/polymer concrete boxes/enclosures are acceptable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B.Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive boxes.
C.Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.Install boxes in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable,
NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where mounting
heights are not indicated.
C.Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and NFPA 70.
D.Box Locations:
1.Locate boxes to be accessible. Provide access panels in accordance with Section 08
3100 as required where approved by the Architect.
E.Box Supports:
1.Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 0529 using
suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
2.Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other
than boxes used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit connections in
accordance with NFPA 70. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other
systems.
F.Install boxes plumb and level.
G.Flush-Mounted Boxes:
1.Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc.
so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is not set back from finished
surface more than 1/4 inch or does not project beyond finished surface.
2.Install boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that front edge of box or
associated raised cover is flush with finished surface.
3.Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete,
tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that there are no gaps or open spaces greater than 1/8
inch at the edge of the box.
H.Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity.
I.Underground Boxes/Enclosures:
1.Install enclosure on gravel base, minimum 6 inches deep.
2.Install additional bracing inside enclosures in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions to minimize box sidewall deflections during backfilling. Backfill with cover
bolted in place.
J.Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent
devices exceeds 300 V.
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 0533.16 - 4 Boxes for Electrical Systems
K.Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using
materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400.
L.Close unused box openings.
M.Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment
installed or designated for future use.
N.Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.
3.03 CLEANING
A.Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt, debris, plaster and other foreign material.
3.04 PROTECTION
A.Immediately after installation, protect boxes from entry of moisture and foreign material until
ready for installation of conductors.
END OF SECTION
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 0553 - 1 Identification for Electrical
Systems
SECTION 26 0553
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Electrical identification requirements.
B.Identification nameplates and labels.
C.Wire and cable markers.
D.Voltage markers.
E.Underground warning tape.
F.Warning signs and labels.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting.
B.Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting.
C.Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Color coding for
power conductors and cables 600 V and less; vinyl color coding electrical tape.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
B.UL 969 - Marking and Labeling Systems Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1.Verify final designations for equipment, systems, and components to be identified prior
to fabrication of identification products.
B.Sequencing:
1.Do not conceal items to be identified, in locations such as above suspended ceilings,
until identification products have been installed.
2.Do not install identification products until final surface finishes and painting are
complete.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each
product.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Do not install adhesive products when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by
manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
A.Identification for Equipment:
1.Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control
equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components.
a.Panelboards:
1)Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within
sight of equipment.
2)Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards
with a door. Identify spares and spaces using pencil.
3)For power panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate to
identify load(s) served for each branch device. Do not identify spares and
spaces.
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 0553 - 2 Identification for Electrical
Systems
b.Transformers:
c.Enclosed switches, circuit breakers, and motor controllers:
d.Transfer Switches:
1)Identify short circuit current rating based on the specific overcurrent
protective device type and settings protecting the transfer switch.
2.Service Equipment:
a.Use identification nameplate to identify each service disconnecting means.
3.Emergency System Equipment:
a.Use identification nameplate or voltage marker to identify emergency system
equipment in accordance with NFPA 70.
b.Use identification nameplate at each piece of service equipment to identify type
and location of on-site emergency power sources.
4.Available Fault Current Documentation: Use identification label to identify the
available fault current and date calculations were performed at locations requiring
documentation by NFPA 70 including but not limited to the following.
a.Service equipment.
b.Industrial control panels.
c.Motor control centers.
d.Elevator control panels.
e.Industrial machinery.
B.Identification for Conductors and Cables:
1.Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26 0519.
2.Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for
ungrounded and grounded power conductors inside door or enclosure at each piece of
feeder or branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch
circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system.
C.Identification for Raceways:
1.Use voltage markers or color-coded bands to identify systems other than normal
power system for accessible conduits at maximum intervals of 20 feet.
a.Color-Coded Bands: Use field-painting or vinyl color coding electrical tape to
mark bands 3 inches wide.
1)Color Code:
(a)Emergency Power System: Red.
2)Field-Painting: Comply with Section 09 9123 and 09 9113.
3)Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Comply with Section 26 0519.
D.Identification for Boxes:
1.Use voltage markers or color coded boxes to identify systems other than normal
power system.
a.Color-Coded Boxes: Field-painted in accordance with Section 09 9123 and 09
9113 per the same color code used for raceways.
1)Emergency Power System: Red.
2.Use identification labels or handwritten text using indelible marker to identify circuits
enclosed.
2.02 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
A.Identification Nameplates:
1.Materials:
a.Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Use plastic nameplates.
2.Plastic Nameplates: Two-layer or three-layer laminated acrylic or electrically non-
conductive phenolic with beveled edges; minimum thickness of 1/16 inch; engraved
text.
3.Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up to 1
inch high; Four, located at corners for larger sizes.
B.Identification Labels:
1.Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and
abrasion resistant.
2.Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text
unless otherwise indicated.
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 0553 - 3 Identification for Electrical
Systems
C.Format for Equipment Identification:
1.Minimum Size: 1 inch by 2.5 inches.
2.Legend:
a.System designation where applicable:
1)Emergency Power System: Identify with text "EMERGENCY".
b.Equipment designation or other approved description.
3.Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.
4.Minimum Text Height:
a.System Designation: 1 inch.
b.Equipment Designation: 1/2 inch.
5.Color:
a.Normal Power System: White text on black background.
2.03 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS
A.Markers for Conductors and Cables: Use wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl cloth, wrap-
around self-adhesive vinyl self-laminating, heat-shrink sleeve, plastic sleeve, plastic clip-on,
or vinyl split sleeve type markers suitable for the conductor or cable to be identified.
B.Markers for Conductor and Cable Bundles: Use plastic marker tags secured by nylon cable
ties.
C.Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated.
D.Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text, all capitalized unless otherwise
indicated.
E.Minimum Text Height: 1/8 inch.
F.Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated.
2.04 VOLTAGE MARKERS
A.Markers for Conduits: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl, self-adhesive vinyl cloth,
or vinyl snap-around type markers.
B.Markers for Boxes and Equipment Enclosures: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl
or self-adhesive vinyl cloth type markers.
C.Minimum Size:
1.Markers for Conduits: As recommended by manufacturer for conduit size to be
identified.
2.Markers for Pull Boxes: 1 1/8 by 4 1/2 inches.
3.Markers for Junction Boxes: 1/2 by 2 1/4 inches.
D.Legend:
1.Markers for System Identification:
a.Emergency Power System: Text "EMERGENCY".
E.Color: Black text on orange background unless otherwise indicated.
2.05 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A.Materials: Use non-detectable type polyethylene tape suitable for direct burial, unless
otherwise indicated.
B.Non-detectable Type Tape: 6 inches wide, with minimum thickness of 4 mil.
C.Legend: Type of service, continuously repeated over full length of tape.
D.Color:
2.06 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A.Comply with ANSI Z535.2 or ANSI Z535.4 as applicable.
B.Warning Signs:
1.Materials:
2.Minimum Size: 7 by 10 inches unless otherwise indicated.
C.Warning Labels:
1.Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed self-adhesive polyester or self-
adhesive vinyl labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant; produced
using materials recognized to UL 969.
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 0553 - 4 Identification for Electrical
Systems
2.Machine-Printed Labels: Use thermal transfer process printing machines and
accessories recommended by label manufacturer.
3.Minimum Size: 2 by 4 inches unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and
maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows:
1.Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front.
2.Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door.
3.Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with
rear access.
4.Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform.
5.Branch Devices: Adjacent to device.
6.Interior Components: Legible from the point of access.
7.Conduits: Legible from the floor.
8.Boxes: Outside face of cover.
9.Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access.
C.Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified.
D.Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to
interior surfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement.
E.Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles or
wrinkles and edges properly sealed.
F.Install underground warning tape above buried lines with one tape per trench at 3 inches
below finished grade.
G.Mark all handwritten text, where permitted, to be neat and legible.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B.Replace self-adhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles, wrinkles, curling or other
signs of improper adhesion.
END OF SECTION
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 2200 - 1 Low-Voltage Transformers
SECTION 26 2200
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.
B.Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
C.Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
D.Section 26 0533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems: Flexible conduit connections.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.10 CFR 431, Subpart K - Energy Efficiency Program for Certain Commercial and Industrial
Equipment - Distribution Transformers Current Edition.
B.IEEE C57.94 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Installation, Application, Operation, and
Maintenance of Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers 2015.
C.IEEE C57.96 - IEEE Standard Guide for Loading Dry-Type Distribution and Power
Transformers 2013.
D.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015.
E.NECA 409 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Dry-Type Transformers 2015.
F.NEMA ST 20 - Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications 2014.
G.NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) 2018.
H.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
I.UL 506 - Standard for Specialty Transformers Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
J.UL 1561 - Standard for Dry-Type General Purpose and Power Transformers Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1.Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping,
equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and
working clearances required by NFPA 70.
2.Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance
requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.
3.Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc. required for mounting.
4.Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the
conductors to be installed.
5.Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Include voltage, kVA, impedance, tap configurations, insulation system class
and rated temperature rise, efficiency, sound level, enclosure ratings, outline and support
point dimensions, weight, required clearances, service condition requirements, and installed
features.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy
canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and
traffic.
B.Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided
for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to transformer internal components,
enclosure, and finish.
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 2200 - 2 Low-Voltage Transformers
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
1.08 WARRANTY
A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.ABB/GE: www.geindustrial.com.
B.Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com.
C.Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us.
D.Source Limitations: Furnish transformers produced by the same manufacturer as the other
electrical distribution equipment used for this project and obtained from a single supplier.
2.02 TRANSFORMERS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.Description: Factory-assembled, dry type transformers for 60 Hz operation designed and
manufactured in accordance with NEMA ST 20 and listed, classified, and labeled as
suitable for the purpose intended.
B.Unless noted otherwise, transformer ratings indicated are for continuous loading according
to IEEE C57.96 under the following service conditions:
1.Altitude: Less than 3,300 feet.
2.Ambient Temperature:
a.Greater than 10 kVA: Not exceeding 104 degrees F.
b.Less than 10 kVA: Not exceeding 77 degrees F.
C.Core: High grade, non-aging silicon steel with high magnetic permeability and low
hysteresis and eddy current losses. Keep magnetic flux densities substantially below
saturation point, even at 10 percent primary overvoltage. Tightly clamp core laminations to
prevent plate movement and maintain consistent pressure throughout core length.
D.Impregnate core and coil assembly with non-hydroscopic thermo-setting varnish to
effectively seal out moisture and other contaminants.
E.Basic Impulse Level: 10 kV.
F.Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of a visible flexible copper grounding
strap.
G.Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts.
H.Nameplate: Include transformer connection data, ratings, wiring diagrams, and overload
capacity based on rated winding temperature rise.
2.03 GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSFORMERS
A.Description: Self-cooled, two winding transformers listed and labeled as complying with UL
506 or UL 1561; ratings as indicated on the drawings.
B.Insulation System and Allowable Average Winding Temperature Rise:
1.Less than 15 kVA: Class 180 degrees C insulation system with 115 degrees C
average winding temperature rise.
2.15 kVA and Larger: Class 220 degrees C insulation system with 150 degrees C
average winding temperature rise.
C.Coil Conductors: Continuous aluminum windings with terminations brazed or welded.
D.Winding Taps:
1.Less than 3 kVA: None.
2.3 kVA through 15 kVA: Two 5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage.
3.15 kVA through 300 kVA: Two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps above and four
2.5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage.
4.500 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps above and two 2.5
percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage.
E.Energy Efficiency: Comply with 10 CFR 431, Subpart K.
F.Sound Levels: Standard sound levels complying with NEMA ST 20
G.Mounting Provisions:
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 2200 - 3 Low-Voltage Transformers
1.Less than 15 kVA: Suitable for wall mounting.
2.15 kVA through 75 kVA: Suitable for wall, floor, or trapeze mounting.
3.Larger than 75 kVA: Suitable for floor mounting.
H.Transformer Enclosure: Comply with NEMA ST 20.
1.Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the
following installation locations:
2.Construction: Steel.
a.Less than 15 kVA: Totally enclosed, non-ventilated.
b.15 kVA and Larger: Ventilated.
3.Finish: Manufacturer's standard grey, suitable for outdoor installations.
4.Provide lifting eyes or brackets.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B.Verify that suitable support frames and anchors are installed where required and that
mounting surfaces are ready to receive transformers.
C.Perform pre-installation tests and inspections on transformers per manufacturer's
instructions and as specified in NECA 409. Correct deficiencies prior to installation.
D.Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
B.Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.Install transformers in accordance with NECA 409 and IEEE C57.94.
D.Use flexible conduit, under the provisions of Section 26 0533.13, 2 feet minimum length, for
connections to transformer case. Make conduit connections to side panel of enclosure.
E.Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances as specified on transformer nameplate
and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70.
F.Install transformers plumb and level.
G.Transformer Support:
1.Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529, where
not furnished by transformer manufacturer.
2.Use integral transformer flanges, accessory brackets furnished by manufacturer, or
field-fabricated supports to support wall-mounted transformers.
3.Unless otherwise indicated, mount floor-mounted transformers on properly sized 3
inch high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 3000.
4.Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel (strut) to
support suspended transformers. Provide independent support from building structure.
Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems.
H.Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.
I.Remove shipping braces and adjust bolts that attach the core and coil mounting bracket to
the enclosure according to manufacturer's recommendations in order to reduce audible
noise transmission.
J.Where not factory-installed, install lugs sized as required for termination of conductors as
indicated.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A.Measure primary and secondary voltages and make appropriate tap adjustments.
B.Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended
torque settings.
3.05 CLEANING
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 2200 - 4 Low-Voltage Transformers
A.Clean dirt and debris from transformer components according to manufacturer's
instructions.
B.Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.
END OF SECTION
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 2416 - 1 Panelboards
SECTION 26 2416
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
B.Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service 2013e (Amended
2017).
B.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015.
C.NECA 407 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards 2015.
D.NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) 2018.
E.NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards 2011.
F.NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of
Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less 2013.
G.NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and
Systems 2017.
H.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
I.UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
J.UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
K.UL 67 - Panelboards Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
L.UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker
Enclosures Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1.Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping,
equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and
working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.
2.Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance
requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.
3.Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush-
mounted panelboards where indicated.
4.Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the
conductors to be installed.
5.Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for
panelboards, enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components
and accessories.
C.Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity,
overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit
entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 2416 - 2 Panelboards
A.Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and NECA 407.
B.Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy
canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and
traffic.
C.Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to
panelboard internal components, enclosure, and finish.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Maintain ambient temperature within the following limits during and after installation of
panelboards:
1.Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.ABB/GE: www.geindustrial.com.
B.Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com.
C.Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us.
2.02 PANELBOARDS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
B.Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the
following service conditions:
1.Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet.
2.Ambient Temperature:
a.Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104
degrees F.
C.Short Circuit Current Rating:
1.Provide panelboards with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available
fault current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings.
D.Mains: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the
installation.
E.Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Replaceable without disturbing adjacent devices.
F.Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 67 temperature rise requirements.
1.Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each panelboard, with a suitable lug
for each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
G.Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.
H.Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL
50E.
1.Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the
following installation locations:
a.Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1.
2.Boxes: Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated.
a.Provide wiring gutters sized to accommodate the conductors to be installed.
3.Fronts:
a.Fronts for Surface-Mounted Enclosures: Same dimensions as boxes.
b.Fronts for Flush-Mounted Enclosures: Overlap boxes on all sides to conceal
rough opening.
4.Lockable Doors: All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated.
I.Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices including
bussing, connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions.
2.03 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS
A.Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch circuit
type, circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings,
configurations and features as indicated on the drawings.
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 2416 - 3 Panelboards
B.Conductor Terminations:
1.Main and Neutral Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or
copper conductors.
2.Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.
C.Bussing:
1.Phase Bus Connections: Arranged for sequential phasing of overcurrent protective
devices.
2.Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Aluminum.
3.Ground Bus Material: Aluminum.
D.Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic bolt-on type unless otherwise indicated.
E.Enclosures:
1.Provide surface-mounted or flush-mounted enclosures as indicated.
2.Fronts: Provide door-in-door trim with hinged cover for access to load terminals and
wiring gutters, and separate lockable hinged door with concealed hinges for access to
overcurrent protective device handles without exposing live parts.
3.Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door.
2.04 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A.Molded Case Circuit Breakers:
1.Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating
circuit breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS
W-C-375 where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the
drawings.
2.Interrupting Capacity:
a.Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short
circuit current rating indicated, but not less than:
b.Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less
than the short circuit current rating indicated.
3.Conductor Terminations:
a.Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.
4.Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time
tripping element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element
for short circuit protection.
5.Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B.Verify that the ratings and configurations of the panelboards and associated components
are consistent with the indicated requirements.
C.Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive panelboards.
D.Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
B.Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.Install panelboards in accordance with NECA 407 and NEMA PB 1.1.
D.Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and NFPA 70.
E.Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529.
F.Install panelboards plumb.
G.Install flush-mounted panelboards so that trims fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and
rough opening completely covered.
H.Mount panelboards such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit
breakers or switches does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform.
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 2416 - 4 Panelboards
I.Provide minimum of six spare 1 inch trade size conduits out of each flush-mounted
panelboard stubbed into accessible space above ceiling and below floor.
J.Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.
K.Install all field-installed branch devices, components, and accessories.
L.Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B.Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
C.Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section
7.6.1.1for all main circuit breakers and circuit breakers larger than 225 amperes. Tests
listed as optional are not required.
D.Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective panelboards or associated
components.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A.Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended
torque settings.
B.Adjust alignment of panelboard fronts.
3.05 CLEANING
A.Clean dirt and debris from panelboard enclosures and components according to
manufacturer's instructions.
B.Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.
END OF SECTION
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 2729 - 1 Stationary Load Bank
SECTION 26 2729
STATIONARY LOAD BANK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Stationary Load Bank with Automatic Load Regulation.
B.Metering CT's.
C.Remote Color Touch HMI.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures, project meetings,
progress schedules and documentation, reports, coordination.
B.Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Procedures for testing, inspection, mock-ups,
reports, certificates; use of reference standards.
C.Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and
maintenance (O&M) data, warranties and bonds.
D.Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training: Detailed requirements.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials 2020.
B.FM (AG) - FM Approval Guide current edition.
C.UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory Current Edition.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination: Coordinate the installation of the load bankwith size, location and installation
of service utilities.
B.Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of the
work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets, including
detailed information on materials, construction, ratings, listings, and available sizes and
configurations..
C.Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall include dimensional plans, front and side elevations
and mounting details sufficient to properly install the load bank. Load bus configuration and
load connections termination area shall be clearly identified..
D.Wiring Schematics: Electrical schematic drawings shall be provided to detail the operation
of the load bank and the provided safety circuits. Over-current protection and control
devices shall be identified and their ratings marked. A system interconnection drawing shall
be included for control wiring related to the load bank interface with the existing generator
for AUTOMATIC LOAD REGULATION.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Comply with NFPA 70.
B.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in
this section, with at least three years of documented experience.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STATIONARY LOAD BANK SYSTEM
A.Basis of DesignManufacturer: Simplex Polaris.
B.Description:
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 2729 - 2 Stationary Load Bank
1.The total capacity of the load bank shall be rated 150-kW at 480 Volts, 3-Phase, 3-
Wire, 60 Hertz, at unity Power Factor and 25-kW minimum load step resolution.
2.The load bank shall be designed for continuous duty cycle operation with no
limitations. The load bank shall operate in an ambient temperature of -20°F to 120°F.
C.Material and Construction
1.The load bank shall be NEMA 3R outdoor weatherproof construction, suitable for
installation on a concrete pad. All exterior fasteners shall be stainless steel. The load
bank shall include forklift channels in the base for lifting and rain hoods.
2.The load bank shall be constructed of heavy gauge of aluminized steel per ASTM
A463. Aluminized steel provides superior corrosion protection and extended service
life, with a better tolerance to high heat exposure compared to the more common
galvanized steel.
3.The main input load bus, load step relays, fuses and blower/control relays shall be
located within the load bank enclosure. A thermostatically controlled heater shall be
located within the control section to provide protection to the control devices from the
effects of moisture and condensation.Design Criteria:
4.Airflow throughout the load bank shall be horizontal. Intake openings shall be
designed to prevent objects greater than 0.50″diameter from entering the unit.
5.The load bank exhaust hood shall be angled downward. The exhaust hood shall be
constructed of non-corrosive aluminized steel or aluminum.
6.The load bank enclosure shall have a baked polyester powder coated finish with a film
thickness of 2.8 +/- 0.4 mils per coat.
7.Load elements shall be contained in an integral resistor case. Resistors can be
individually removed for inspection or service.
D.Resistive Load Elements
1.Load elements shall be Simplex Powr-Web, chromium alloy, open wire, ceramic
supported rated to operate at approximately ½ of maximum continuous rating of wire.
2.The change in resistance due to temperature shall be minimized by maintaining
conservative watt densities.
3.The overall tolerance of the load bank shall be –0% to +5% kW at rated voltage. A
–5%,+5% rating allows the load bank to deliver less than the rated kW and shall not be
used. The load bank must deliver full rated kW at rated voltage.
4.The loadbank will automatically enter a cooldown period before shutting off.
E.Cooling
1.The load bank shall be cooled by integral TEFC motor(s) which is direct coupled to the
cooling fan blade. The fan motor must be electrically protected against overload using
a motor overload device and short circuit protected using three (3) current limiting
fuses with an interrupting rating of 200K A.I.C.
2.The fan blade is to be an airfoil design constructed from aluminum or non-corroding
material.
3.Fan motor starter with external disconnect.
F.Protective Devices
1.A differential pressure switch shall be provided to detect air loss. The switch shall be
electrically interlocked with the load application controls to prevent load from being
applied if cooling air is not present.
2.An over-temperature switch shall be provided to sense the load bank exhaust in the
resistor case assembly. The switch shall be electrically interlocked with the load
application controls to remove load from being applied in the event of an over
temperature condition.
3.To provide for major fault protection, branch fuses shall be provided on all three
phases of switched load steps above 50 kW. Branch fuses shall be current limiting
type with an interrupting rating of 200K A.I.C.
4.The exterior of the load bank shall have appropriate warning/caution statements on
access panels.
5.The fan motor shall separately protected by motor overload and short-circuit devices.
G.Metering Current Transformers
1.Note
H.Interior Heaters
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 2729 - 3 Stationary Load Bank
1.Anti-condensation heaters with thermostatic control.
I.Control Systems - Digital Controls
1.PLC based controller with industrial connectors and LED status display shall be
installed at the Remote HMI. The module shall connect with Voltage and Current
Transformers to obtain real time monitoring of the load bank at a sampling rate of at
least 28.8kHz. The module shall have large flash memory, which allows remote
upgrading and space for configuration data and calibration maps. Non- volatile RAM
provides 500 event history log time stamped by on-board real time clock.
a.Control Power On/Off switch.
b.Numeric Load Applicaton Mode: direct entry to keypad, apply and remove
function. Allows successive block loading.
c.Master Load Switch function.
d.Load Step Switches function.
e.Fan Failure Indication.
f.High Exhaust Temperature Indication.
g.Load Dump Active Indication.
h.Load Dump Bypassed Indication.
i.Setup Functions.
2.Cooling Failure Load Lockout - disables all load in the event of an exhaust over-
temperature or fan failure.
3.Remote Load Dump Input - allows user to connect normally closed contacts to permit
remote load dump (close to run, open to dump).
4.Load Dump Bypass - provides means to defeat load dump function.
5.Discrete Power Available Lamp - indicates control power available to load bank. LED
indicator on load bank.
6.Summary Alarm Lamp - indicates that there has been a cooling failure, load dump
activation or other failure. LED indicator on load bank.
7.BMS Monitoring (dry contacts) - relay dry contacts for BMS monitoring of "normal
operation", "summary alarm".
8.Usage counters shall provide information on individual contactor operation, element
run times, overall power-on time, load-on time and kWh. Load monitoring checks each
phase for faulty contactors, blown fuses or faulty elements. Faults are logged with
visual indication via blinking stop lamp and warning code. Automatic detection senses
the supply-on-test voltage, frequency, phase and phase rotation.
9.The module shall have a load correction facility, which shall compensate for any
voltage drop on supply.
10.The module shall balance the usage of each load element to increase the life of the
load bank.
11.A Remote HMI controller shall also be provided for operator interface with all
functionality faults and features. When carrying out full-load testing, one page will
show the three-phase measurements of voltage (V), frequency (Hz), current (A),
power (both kW and kVA) and power factor (Cos ø).
12.Automatic option. Allows AUTOMATIC LOAD REGULATION, REGENERATIVE
POWER PROTECTION, via kW sensing. Requires installation of remote current
transformer. User programmable: set point, step up/step down bandwidth, initiate
delay, step up delay, step down delay, shutdown delay. Includes voltage and
frequency sensing with adjustable set point and delay. Includes display of volt-amps-
hertz-kW and MODBUS registers for same.
J.Control Systems - Manual Controls
1.The control panel shall be a (remote) or (local) 19″rack mounted panel housed in a
NEMA 4 type enclosure. The control panel shall contain the following manual controls:
a.Power ON/OFF switch
b.Blower START/STOP pushbuttons.
c.Master load ON/OFF switch.
d.Load step switches for ON/OFF application of individual load steps.
2.Control panel visual indicators shall be as follows:
a.Power ON indication light.
b.Blower ON light.
c.Blower/Air FAILURE light.
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 2729 - 4 Stationary Load Bank
d.OVERTEMPERATURE light.
3.A digital meter shall be installed in the control panel to show 3 line digital display of
voltage, current, frequency, and power measurement. The software interface to the
meter shall allow for real-time data acquisition and data logging from a laptop PC.
4.A standard remote load dump circuit shall be provided as part of the load bank control
circuit. Provisions shall be provided to remove the load bank off-line from the operation
of a remote normally closed set of auxiliary contacts from a transfer switch or other
device. In the event of the remote contact opening, all load is removed.
5.An integral control power transformer shall be provided to supply 120V, 1 phase, 60
Hz to the load banks control and motor starter circuitry. Transformer primary and
secondary control circuits shall be fuse protected.
6.An Automatic Load Controller shall be provided for maintaining a minimum load steps
on the generator set. The controller shall monitor the connected downstream loads
and shall automatically add or subtract load steps in response to building load
changes as to maintain a minimum load level on the generator set. The controller
includes an initial time- delay circuit, and automatic time delayed load step application
circuit. A remote contact closure is required for activation and transfer of control. A
separate current transformer shall be supplied loose for mounting and sensing of
downstream loads.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements for additional requirements.
3.03 SYSTEM STARTUP
A.Provide manufacturer's field representative to performsystem startup (a manufacturer's
authorized representative for both the Cummins generator and the load bank).
B.Prepare and start equipment and systems in accordance with manufacturers' instructions
and recommendations.
C.Testing Procedure
1.Start generator at control panel and allow to come up to speed.
2.Power up load bank and check load bank cooling fan rotation.
3.After generator has fully warmed up, record base readings.
4.After base readings are recorded, apply NFPA 110 2-hour test: 30-minutes at 25%
load bank rating, 30-minutes at 50% load bank rating, and 60-minutes at 75% load
bank rating.
5.Record readings every 15-minutes.
6.Readings shall consist of: Time, DC Battery Voltage, Oil Pressure (PSI), Coolant
Temperature, Ambient Temperature, Exhaust Temperature, Frequency (Hz), Voltage
(AC - L1, L2, L3), Amperage (AC - L1, L2, L3), Power Factor (1.0), kW, Load
Percentage.
7.Upon completion of the test, load is removed from the load bank and a 5-minute cool
down period is allowed for the load bank.
3.04 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals for closeout submittals.
B.See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training for additional requirements.
C.Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation and maintenance of system.
1.Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with
additional training materials as required.
2.Provide minimum of two hours of training.
END OF SECTION
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 2816.13 - 1 Enclosed Circuit Breakers
SECTION 26 2816.13
ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Enclosed circuit breakers.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
B.Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service 2013e (Amended
2017).
B.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015.
C.NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) 2018.
D.NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and
Systems 2017.
E.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
F.UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
G.UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
H.UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker
Enclosures Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
I.UL 869A - Reference Standard for Service Equipment Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1.Coordinate work with other trades. Avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment,
or other potential obstructions within dedicated equipment spaces and within working
clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.
2.Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance
requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.
3.Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the
conductors to be installed.
4.Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for circuit
breakers, enclosures, and other installed components and accessories.
1.Include characteristic trip curves for each type and rating of circuit breaker upon
request.
C.Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage and current ratings,
short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and
installed features and accessories.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy
canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and
traffic.
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 2816.13 - 2 Enclosed Circuit Breakers
B.Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to
enclosed circuit breaker internal components, enclosure, and finish.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Maintain ambient temperature between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F during and after
installation of enclosed circuit breakers.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.ABB/GE: www.geindustrial.com.
B.Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com.
C.Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us.
D.Source Limitations: Furnish enclosed circuit breakers and associated components
produced by the same manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for
this project and obtained from a single supplier.
2.02 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A.Description: Units consisting of molded case circuit breakers individually mounted in
enclosures.
B.Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
C.Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the
following service conditions:
1.Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet.
2.Ambient Temperature: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F.
D.Short Circuit Current Rating:
1.Provide enclosed circuit breakers with listed short circuit current rating not less than
the available fault current at the installed location indicated on the drawings.
E.Enclosed Circuit Breakers Used for Service Entrance: Listed and labeled as suitable for
use as service equipment according to UL 869A.
F.Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.
G.Provide thermal magnetic circuit breakers unless otherwise indicated.
H.Provide electronic trip circuit breakers where indicated.
I.Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each enclosed circuit breaker, with a
suitable lug for terminating each equipment grounding conductor.
J.Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL
50E.
1.Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the
following installation locations:
K.Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position.
2.03 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A.Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuit
breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W-C-375
where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.
B.Interrupting Capacity:
1.Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short
circuit current rating indicated, but not less than:
2.Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than
the short circuit current rating indicated.
C.Conductor Terminations:
1.Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.
D.Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time tripping
element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short
circuit protection.
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 2816.13 - 3 Enclosed Circuit Breakers
E.Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Furnish solid state, microprocessor-based, true rms
sensing trip units.
F.Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B.Verify that the ratings of the enclosed circuit breakers are consistent with the indicated
requirements.
C.Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive enclosed circuit breakers.
D.Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
C.Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and NFPA 70.
D.Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529.
E.Install enclosed circuit breakers plumb.
F.Except where indicated to be mounted adjacent to the equipment they supply, mount
enclosed circuit breakers such that the highest position of the operating handle does not
exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform.
G.Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B.Inspect and test in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NETA ATS, except
Section 4.
C.Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.6.1.1for circuit breakers used
for service entrance and for circuit breakers larger than 225 amperes. Tests listed as
optional are not required.
D.Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective enclosed circuit breakers.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A.Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended
torque settings.
3.05 CLEANING
A.Clean dirt and debris from circuit breaker enclosures and components according to
manufacturer's instructions.
B.Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.
END OF SECTION
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 3600 - 1 Transfer Switches
SECTION 26 3600
TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Transfer switches for low-voltage (600 V and less) applications and associated accessories:
1.Automatic transfer switches.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.
B.Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
C.Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
D.Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015.
B.NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) 2018.
C.NEMA ICS 10 Part 1 - Industrial Control and Systems Part 1: Electromechanical AC
Transfer Switch Equipment 2020.
D.NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and
Systems 2017.
E.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
F.NFPA 110 - Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems 2019.
G.UL 1008 - Transfer Switch Equipment Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1.Coordinate compatibility of transfer switches to be installed with work provided under
other sections or by others.
2.Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping,
equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and
working clearances required by NFPA 70.
3.Coordinate arrangement of equipment with the dimensions and clearance
requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.
4.Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc. required for mounting.
5.Closed Transition Transfer Switches:
a.Coordinate source interconnection requirements with Utility Company.
b.Where applicable, coordinate the work to provide engine generators with
isochronous governors suitable for closed transition transfer.
c.Coordinate the work to provide shunt trip breakers necessary for protection from
source interconnection for longer than specified maximum interconnection time.
d.Arrange for inspections necessary to obtain Utility Company approval of
installation.
6.Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each
product, including ratings, configurations, dimensions, finishes, weights, service condition
requirements, and installed features.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Comply with the following:
1.NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code).
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 3600 - 2 Transfer Switches
2.NFPA 110 (Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems); meet
requirements for Level 1 system.
B.Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Receive, inspect, handle, and store transfer switches in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
B.Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy
canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and
traffic.
C.Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to avoid damage to transfer
switch components, enclosure, and finish.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after
installation.
1.09 WARRANTY
A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.Provide minimum fiveyear manufacturer warranty covering repair or replacement due to
defective materials or workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.Transfer Switches:
1.ASCO Power Technologies: www.ascopower.com.
2.02 TRANSFER SWITCHES
A.Provide complete power transfer system consisting of all required equipment, conduit,
boxes, wiring, supports, accessories, system programming, etc. as necessary for a
complete operating system that provides the functional intent indicated.
B.Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
C.Applications:
1.Utilize closed transition transfer unless otherwise indicated or required.
D.Construction Type: Either "contactor type" (open contact) or "breaker type" (enclosed
contact) transfer switches complying with specified requirements are acceptable.
E.Comply with NEMA ICS 10 Part 1, and list and label as complying with UL 1008 for the
classification of the intended application (e.g. emergency, optional standby).
F.Do not use double throw safety switches or other equipment not specifically designed for
power transfer applications and listed as transfer switch equipment.
G.Load Classification: Classified for total system load (any combination of motor, electric
discharge lamp, resistive, and tungsten lamp loads with tungsten lamp loads not exceeding
30 percent of the continuous current rating) unless otherwise indicated or required.
H.Switching Methods:
1.Open Transition:
a.Provide break-before-make transfer without a neutral position that is not
connected to either source, and with interlocks to prevent simultaneous
connection of the load to both sources.
2.Closed Transition:
a.When both sources are available and synchronized, provide make-before-break
transfer without interruption of power to the load and with momentary
interconnection of both sources for not more than 100 ms, unless otherwise
approved by Utility Company.
b.Provide synchronization/in-phase monitor to initiate transfer when voltage and
phase angle difference between sources are within predetermined requirements
for synchronization.
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 3600 - 3 Transfer Switches
c.Source Synchronization Requirements: Phase angle differential within five
degrees; voltage differential within five volts.
d.When sources fail to synchronize within a predetermined time period, remain
connected to current source and initiate an alarm.
e.When sources remain interconnected for longer than specified maximum
interconnection time, provide contact closure signal to shunt trip designated
circuit breaker and initiate an alarm.
f.Provide additional protective relaying where required by Utility Company.
g.When only one source is available, automatically utilizes open transition (break-
before-make) transfer.
3.Obtain control power for transfer operation from line side of source to which the load is
to be transferred.
I.Service Conditions: Provide transfer switches suitable for continuous operation at indicated
ratings under the service conditions at the installed location.
J.Enclosures:
1.Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the
following installation locations:
2.Finish: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.
K.Short Circuit Current Rating:
1.Withstand and Closing Rating: Provide transfer switches, when protected by the
supply side overcurrent protective devices to be installed, with listed withstand and
closing rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location as
indicated on the drawings.
L.Automatic Transfer Switches:
1.Description: Transfer switches with automatically initiated transfer between sources;
electrically operated and mechanically held.
2.Control Functions:
a.Automatic mode.
b.Test Mode: Simulates failure of primary/normal source.
c.Voltage and Frequency Sensing:
1)Undervoltage sensing for each phase of primary/normal source; adjustable
dropout/pickup settings.
2)Undervoltage sensing for alternate/emergency source; adjustable
dropout/pickup settings.
3)Underfrequency sensing for alternate/emergency source; adjustable
dropout/pickup settings.
d.Outputs:
1)Contacts for engine start/shutdown (except where direct generator
communication interface is provided).
2)Auxiliary contacts; one set(s) for each switch position.
e.Adjustable Time Delays:
1)Engine generator start time delay; delays engine start signal to override
momentary primary/normal source failures.
2)Transfer to alternate/emergency source time delay.
3)Retransfer to primary/normal source time delay.
4)Engine generator cooldown time delay; delays engine shutdown following
retransfer to primary/normal source to permit generator to run unloaded for
cooldown period.
f.In-Phase Monitor (Open Transition Transfer Switches): Monitors phase angle
difference between sources for initiating in-phase transfer.
g.Synchronization/In-Phase Monitor (Closed Transition Transfer Switches):
Monitors voltage and phase angle difference between sources for initiating
synchronized transfer.
h.Engine Exerciser: Provides programmable scheduled exercising of engine
generator selectable with or without transfer to load; provides memory retention
during power outage.
3.Status Indications:
a.Connected to alternate/emergency source.
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 3600 - 4 Transfer Switches
b.Connected to primary/normal source.
c.Alternate/emergency source available.
4.Alarm Indications for Closed Transition Transfer Switches:
a.Failure to synchronize.
b.Extended source interconnection/transfer switch locked out.
5.Automatic Sequence of Operations:
a.Upon failure of primary/normal source for a programmable time period (engine
generator start time delay), initiate starting of engine generator where applicable.
b.When alternate/emergency source is available, transfer load to
alternate/emergency source after programmable time delay.
c.When primary/normal source has been restored, retransfer to primary/normal
source after a programmable time delay. Bypass time delay if
alternate/emergency source fails and primary/normal source is available.
d.Where applicable, initiate shutdown of engine generator after programmable
engine cooldown time delay.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B.Verify that the ratings and configurations of transfer switches are consistent with the
indicated requirements.
C.Verify that rough-ins for field connections are in the proper locations.
D.Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive transfer switches.
E.Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
B.Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances and required maintenance access.
D.Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529.
E.Install transfer switches plumb and level.
F.Unless otherwise indicated, mount floor-mounted transfer switches on properly sized 3 inch
high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 3000.
G.Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.
H.Identify transfer switches and associated system wiring in accordance with Section 26
0553.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B.Prepare and start system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.Automatic Transfer Switches:
1.Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
2.Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.22.3. The insulation-
resistance tests listed as optional are not required.
D.Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies
with Contract Documents.
3.04 CLEANING
A.Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match
original factory finish.
3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A.See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.
B.Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of transfer switches to Owner, and correct
deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 3600 - 5 Transfer Switches
C.Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation, adjustment, and maintenance of transfer
switches.
1.Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with
additional training materials as required.
3.06 PROTECTION
A.Protect installed transfer switches from subsequent construction operations.
END OF SECTION
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 4300 - 1 Surge Protective Devices
SECTION 26 4300
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Surge protective devices for branch panelboard locations.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
1.03 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A.SPD: Surge Protective Device.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015.
B.NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) 2018.
C.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
D.UL 1449 - Standard for Surge Protective Devices Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Include detailed component information, voltage, surge current ratings,
repetitive surge current capacity, voltage protection rating (VPR) for all protection modes,
maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV), nominal discharge current (I-n), short
circuit current rating (SCCR), connection means including any required external overcurrent
protection, enclosure ratings, outline and support point dimensions, weight, service
condition requirements, and installed features.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.Store in a clean, dry space in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after
installation.
1.10 WARRANTY
A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.Field-installed, Externally Mounted Surge Protective Devices:
1.Current Technology; a brand of Thomas & Betts Power Solutions:
www.tnbpowersolutions.com.
2.Schneider Electric; Square D Brand Surgelogic Products: www.surgelogic.com.
2.02 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.Description: Factory-assembled surge protective devices (SPDs) for 60 Hz service; listed,
classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended; system voltage as indicated on
the drawings.
B.Unless otherwise indicated, provide field-installed, externally-mounted or factory-installed,
internally-mouonted SPDs.
C.List and label as complying with UL 1449, Type 1 when connected on line side of service
disconnect overcurrent device and Type 1 or 2 when connected on load side of service
disconnect overcurrent device.
D.Protected Modes:
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 4300 - 2 Surge Protective Devices
1.Wye Systems: L-N, L-G, N-G, L-L.
E.UL 1449 Voltage Protection Ratings (VPRs):
1.208Y/120V System Voltage: Not more than 1,000 V for L-N, L-G, and N-G modes and
1,200 V for L-L mode.
F.UL 1449 Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV): Not less than 115% of nominal
system voltage.
G.Enclosure Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for
the following installation locations:
1.Indoor clean, dry locations: Type 1.
2.03 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR BRANCH PANELBOARD LOCATIONS
A.Surge Protective Device - Basis of Design: Surge Suppression, LLC (SSI); Advantage
Series; Model SSLA (100 kA/phase, Type 2, I-n = 10 kA); www.surgesuppression.com/#sle.
1.Voltage: As indicated on drawings.
2.Features: Discrete "all-mode" protection (10 modes for 3-phase wye circuits);
component-level thermal fusing; internal circuit board-mounted overcurrent fusing; 200
kAIC SCCR; 25 year warranty.
B.Surge Protective Device - Basis of Design: Surge Suppression, LLC (SSI); SpecPRO
Series; Model SSMA8 (80 kA/phase, Type 2, I-n = 10 kA);
www.surgesuppression.com/#sle.
1.Voltage: As indicated on drawings.
2.Features: Seven modes of protection; component-level thermal fusing; internal circuit
board-mounted overcurrent fusing; 200 kAIC SCCR; 15 year warranty.
C.Surge Protective Device:
1.Protection Circuits: Field-replaceable modular or non-modular.
2.Surge Current Rating: Not less than 60 kA per mode/120 kA per phase.
3.UL 1449 Nominal Discharge Current (I-n): 20 kA.
4.UL 1449 Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): Not less than the available fault current
at the installed location as indicated on the drawings.
5.Diagnostics:
a.Protection Status Monitoring: Provide indicator lights to report the protection
status for each phase.
b.Alarm Notification: Provide indicator light and audible alarm to report alarm
condition. Provide button to manually silence audible alarm.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B.Verify that the service voltage and configuration marked on the SPD are consistent with the
service voltage and configuration at the location to be installed.
C.Verify system grounding and bonding is in accordance with Section 26 0526, including
bonding of neutral and ground for service entrance and separately derived systems where
applicable. Do not energize SPD until deficiencies have been corrected.
D.Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
B.Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and NFPA 70.
C.Do not energize SPD until bonding of neutral and ground for service entrance and
separately derived systems is complete in accordance with Section 26 0526 where
applicable. Replace SPDs damaged by improper or missing neutral-ground bond.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
3.04 CLEANING
A.Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 4300 - 3 Surge Protective Devices
END OF SECTION
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 5100 - 1 Interior Lighting
SECTION 26 5100
INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Interior luminaires.
B.Exit signs.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
B.Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.NECA/IESNA 500 - Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems 2006.
B.NECA/IESNA 502 - Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems 2006.
C.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
D.NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction,
Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
E.UL 924 - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
F.UL 1598 - Luminaires Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1.Coordinate the installation of luminaires with mounting surfaces installed under other
sections or by others. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc.
required for mounting. Coordinate compatibility of luminaires and associated trims with
mounting surfaces at installed locations.
2.Coordinate the placement of luminaires with structural members, ductwork, piping,
equipment, diffusers, fire suppression system components, and other potential
conflicts installed under other sections or by others.
3.Coordinate the placement of exit signs with furniture, equipment, signage or other
potential obstructions to visibility installed under other sections or by others.
4.Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from Contract Documents to obtain
direction prior to proceeding with work.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including
detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting
requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, installed accessories,
and ceiling compatibility; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all
proposed features.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 500 (commercial lighting),
NECA/IESNA 502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for
installation.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after
installation.
1.09 WARRANTY
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 5100 - 2 Interior Lighting
A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 LUMINAIRE TYPES
A.Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings.
2.02 LUMINAIRES
A.Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B.Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.
C.Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
D.Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets,
ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize
and protect the lamp and distribute the light.
E.Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring,
connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete
operating system.
F.Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any
damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.
2.03 EXIT SIGNS
A.Description: Exit signs complying with NFPA 101 and applicable state and local codes, and
listed and labeled as complying with UL 924.
1.Number of Faces: Single- or double-face as indicated or as required for installed
location.
2.Directional Arrows: As indicated or as required for installed location.
B.Powered Exit Signs: Internally illuminated with LEDs unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B.Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and
are properly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.
C.Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required.
D.Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to
luminaires.
E.Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B.Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0533.16 as required for
installation of luminaires provided under this section.
B.Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 500
(commercial lighting) and NECA 502 (industrial lighting).
D.Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529.
E.Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent
luminaires.
F.Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
G.Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
H.Exit Signs:
I.Install lamps in each luminaire.
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 5100 - 3 Interior Lighting
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B.Inspect each product for damage and defects.
C.Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.
D.Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or
replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A.Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as
directed by Architect. Secure locking fittings in place.
B.Exit Signs with Field-Selectable Directional Arrows: Set as indicated or as required to
properly designate egress path as directed by Architect or authority having jurisdiction.
3.06 CLEANING
A.Clean surfaces according to NECA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA 502 (industrial
lighting), and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign
material and restore finishes to match original factory finish.
3.07 PROTECTION
A.Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations.
END OF SECTION
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 5600 - 1 Exterior Lighting
SECTION 26 5600
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.Exterior luminaires.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
B.Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.IES LM-79 - Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State
Lighting Products 2008.
B.IES LM-80 - Approved Method: Measuring Luminous Flux and Color Maintenance of LED
Packages, Arrays, and Modules 2015, with Errata (2017).
C.NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction 2015.
D.NECA/IESNA 501 - Standard for Installing Exterior Lighting Systems 2006.
E.NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
F.UL 1598 - Luminaires Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
G.UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.Coordination:
1.Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from Contract Documents to obtain
direction prior to proceeding with work.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including
detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting
requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, weight, effective
projected area (EPA), and installed accessories; include model number nomenclature
clearly marked with all proposed features.
1.LED Luminaires:
a.Include estimated useful life, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 501 and manufacturer's
written instructions.
B.Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for
installation.
1.08 WARRANTY
A.See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 LUMINAIRE TYPES
A.Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings.
2.02 LUMINAIRES
A.Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B.Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 5600 - 2 Exterior Lighting
C.Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
D.Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets,
ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize
and protect the lamp and distribute the light.
E.Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring,
connectors, hardware, poles, foundations, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary
for a complete operating system.
F.Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any
damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.
G.LED Luminaires:
1.Components: UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable.
2.Tested in accordance with IES LM-79 and IES LM-80.
3.LED Estimated Useful Life: Minimum of 50,000 hours at 70 percent lumen
maintenance, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B.Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and
are properly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.
C.Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required.
D.Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to
luminaires.
E.Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B.Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0533.16 as required for
installation of luminaires provided under this section.
B.Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.Install luminaires in accordance with NECA/IESNA 501.
D.Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529.
E.Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent
luminaires.
F.Wall-Mounted Luminaires: Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to
center of luminaire.
G.Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
H.Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
I.Install lamps in each luminaire.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B.Inspect each product for damage and defects.
C.Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.
D.Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or
replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A.Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as
directed by Architect. Secure locking fittings in place.
3.06 CLEANING
The Cornell Store Emergency
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
26 5600 - 3 Exterior Lighting
A.Clean surfaces according to NECA/IESNA 501 and manufacturer's instructions to remove
dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore finishes to match original
factory finish.
3.07 PROTECTION
A.Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 31 0000
EARTHWORK
The Cornell Store Emergency 310000 - 1
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Site Restoration: Section 310101.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. The following terms shall have the meanings ascribed to them in this Article,
wherever they appear in this Section.
1. Earth Excavation: The removal of all surface and subsurface material
not classified as rock (as defined below).
2. Rock: Limestone, sandstone, shale, granite, and similar material in solid
beds or masses in its original or stratified position which can be removed
only by blasting operations, drilling, wedging, or use of pneumatic tools,
and boulders with a volume greater than 1.0 cu yd. Concrete building
foundations and concrete slabs, not indicated, with a volume greater than
1.0 cu yd shall be classified as rock.
a. Limestone, sandstone, shale, granite, and similar material in a
broken or weathered condition, which can be removed with an
excavator or backhoe, equipped with a bucket with ripping teeth
or any other style bucket shall be classified as earth excavation.
b. Masonry building foundations, whether indicated or not, shall be
classified as earth excavation.
3. Subgrade Surface: Surface upon which subbase or topsoil is placed.
4. Subbase: Select granular material or subbase course Type 2 which is
placed immediately beneath pavement or concrete slabs.
5. Foundation Bearing Grade: Grade/elevation at which the bottom-of-
footings are constructed.
6. Maximum Density:
a. The dry unit weight in pounds per cubic foot of the soil at
“Optimum Moisture Content” when determined by ASTM D 698
(Standard Proctor) for backfilling of utility lines or pavement
construction.
b. If the earthwork includes placement of placements of large
amounts of fill to establish subgrade or a new building, addition,
or retaining wall, use ASTM D 1557 (Modified Proctor).
7. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs,
tanks, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made
stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.
8. Landscaped Areas: Areas not covered by structures, walks, roads,
paving, or parking.
9. Unauthorized Excavation: The removal of material below required
elevation indicated on the Drawings or beyond lateral dimensions
indicated or specified without specific written direction by the
University’s Representative.
10. Grading Limit Line (Limit of Disturbance): Limits of grading,
excavations and filling required for the work of this contract. Unless
SECTION 31 0000
EARTHWORK
The Cornell Store Emergency 310000 - 2
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
specifically noted otherwise, the Grading Limit Line and Contract Limit
Line shall be considered the same.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Filter Fabric: Manufacturer’s catalog sheets, specifications, and
installation instructions.
B. Samples: Submit samples as follows. Take the samples in the presence of the
University’s Representative, and submit to the Directors Representative the
laboratory test results for gradation, proctors and soundness tests, when required.
These tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM standards, shall be
performed and signed by a certified soils laboratory, and shall be submitted as
part of the original submittal. At a minimum, the samples taken shall be of the
following quantities:
1. Select Granular Material: 50 - 60 lb. (Two Samples).
2. Subbase Course Type 2: 50 - 60 lb. (Two Samples).
3. Selected Fill: 40 - 50 lb.
4. Cushion Material: 30 lb.
5. Crushed Stone: 30 lb
C. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Excavation Procedure: Submit a lay out drawing or detailed outline of
intended excavation procedure for the Director’s information. This
submittal will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the
successful performance of intended excavation methods.
2. Subbase Materials: Name and location of source and the DOT Source
Number. If the material is not being taken from an approved DOT
Source, the results of the gradation and soundness tests performed by an
ASTM certified soils laboratory will be required.
3. Other Aggregates: Name and location of source and soil laboratory test
results.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Care shall be taken when exposing subgrade for construction of pavements to
protect any loose or un-compacted subgrade from being saturated by rain events
and runoff. Subgrade shall be proof rolled to assure no movement is observed
under loaded truck traffic before placing subbase course. Open subgrade, and
subbase materials should be properly pitched and sealed (compacted) to avoid
saturation from rain or runoff. In some instances, it may be necessary to scarify
and leave open for air-drying existing site soils that become unstable due to
excessive moisture. In the event subgrade is exposed and saturation or high
water table is observed upon its initial exposure, than a Campus representative
shall be notified and the condition properly documented.
B. Protect existing trees and plants during performance of the Work unless
otherwise indicated. Box trees and plants indicated to remain within the grading
limit line with temporary steel fencing or solidly constructed wood barricades as
SECTION 31 0000
EARTHWORK
The Cornell Store Emergency 310000 - 3
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
required. Protect root systems from smothering. Do not store excavated
material, or allow vehicular traffic or parking within the branch drip line.
Restrict foot traffic to prevent excessive compaction of soil over root systems.
C. Cold Weather Requirements: When freezing temperatures are predicted, do not
excavate to final required elevations for pipe, conduit or equipment requiring
concrete work unless concrete can be placed immediately. Retain enough earth
over the bottom elevation of excavations to prevent frost penetration.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Select Granular Material: Stockpiled, sound, durable, sand, gravel, stone, or
blends of these materials, free from organic and other deleterious materials.
Comply with the gradation and material requirements specified below:
Sieve Percent Passing Sieve Size Size opening (mm)
2 inch 50.8 100
1/4 inch 6.35 30-65
No. 40 0.425 5-40
No. 200 0.075 0-10
1. Magnesium Sulfate Soundness Test: 20 percent maximum loss by
weight after four test cycles.
2. Plasticity Index: The plasticity index of the material passing the No. 40
mesh sieve shall not exceed 5.0.
3. Elongated Particles: Not more than 30 percent, by weight, of the
particles retained on a 1/2 inch sieve shall consist of flat or elongated
particles. A flat or elongated particle is defined as one which has its
greatest dimension more than three times its least dimension.
B. Subbase Course Type 2: Stockpiled, crushed ledge rock or approved blast
furnace slag. Comply with the gradation and material requirements specified
below:
Sieve Percent Passing Sieve Size Size opening (mm)
2 inch 50.8 100
1/4 inch 6.35 25-60
No. 40 0.425 5-40
No. 200 0.075 0-10
1. Magnesium Sulfate Soundness Test: 20 percent maximum loss by
weight after four test cycles.
SECTION 31 0000
EARTHWORK
The Cornell Store Emergency 310000 - 4
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
2. Plasticity Index: The plasticity index of the material passing the No. 40
mesh sieve shall not exceed 5.0.
3. Elongated Particles: Not more than 30 percent, by weight, of the
particles retained on a 1/2 inch sieve shall consist of flat or elongated
particles. A flat or elongated particle is defined as one which has its
greatest dimension more than three times its least dimension.
C. Selected Fill: Sound, durable, sand, gravel, stone, or blends of these materials,
free from organic and other deleterious materials. Comply with the gradation
requirements specified below:
Sieve Percent Passing Sieve Size Size opening (mm)
4 inch 101.6 100
No. 40 0.425 0-70
No. 200 0.075 0-15
D. Suitable Material (Fill and Backfill for Landscaped Areas): Material consisting
of mineral soil (inorganic), blasted or broken rock and similar materials of
natural or man-made origin, including mixtures thereof. Maximum particle size
shall not exceed 2/3 of the specified layer thickness prior to compaction. NOTE:
Material containing cinders, industrial waste, sludge, building rubble, landfill,
muck, and peat shall be considered unsuitable for fill and backfill, except topsoil
and organic silt may be used as suitable material in landscaped areas provided it
is placed in the top layer of the subgrade surface.
E. Cushion Material (Pipe Bedding): Shall consist of clean, hard, durable, uncoated
particles, free from lumps of clay and all deleterious substances and shall meet
the following gradation requirements:
Sieve Size Percent Passing Sieve Size Size opening (mm)
1/4 inch 6.35 100
No. 60 0.25 0-35
No. 100 0.15 0-10
F. Rip Rap: Fine, Light, Medium or Heavy Stone Filling that complies with DOT
Article 620-2.02 for stone filling.
Sieve Percent Passing Sieve Size Size opening (mm)
1-1/2 inch 38.1 100
1 inch 25.4 95-100
½ inch 12.7 45-60
¼ inch 6.35 0-15
H. No. 1 Coarse Aggregate: Crushed Stone that complies with material
requirements of DOT Article 703-02 and meets the following gradation.
SECTION 31 0000
EARTHWORK
The Cornell Store Emergency 310000 - 5
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
Sieve Percent Passing Sieve Size Size opening (mm)
1 inch 25.4 100
1/2 inch 12.7 90-100
1/4 inch 6.35 0-15
I. No. 2 Coarse Aggregate: Crushed Stone that complies with material
requirements of DOT Article 703-02 and meets the following gradation.
Sieve Percent Passing Sieve Size Size opening (mm)
1-1/2 inch 38.1 100
1 inch 25.4 90-100
1/2 inch 12.7 0-15
J. Marker Tape: FL Industries Blackburn/Holub’s Type YT6, or Seton Nameplate
Corporations Type 6 ELE, imprinted with message suited to item buried below.
2.2 GEOTECHNICAL FABRICS
A. Filter Fabric (GeoTextile)
1. Separation/Stabilization beneath pavements: Amoco 4551, Bonded
Fibers Products PN080, Maccaferri Gabions MacTex MX275 & 340,
Mirafi 160N & 180N or equivalent.
2.3 BRICK AND MORTAR
A. Manhole Brick: Standard size, ASTM C 32, Grade MS.
B. Mortar Materials: Dry packaged, proportioned for Type M unit masonry mortar,
complying with ASTM C 387.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Clear and grub the site within the Grading Limit Line (GLL) of trees, shrubs,
brush, other prominent vegetation, debris, and obstructions except for those items
indicated to remain. Completely remove stumps and roots protruding through the
ground surface.
B. Fill depressions caused by the clearing and grubbing operations in accordance
with the requirements for filling and backfilling, unless further excavation is
indicated.
SECTION 31 0000
EARTHWORK
The Cornell Store Emergency 310000 - 6
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
3.2 UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
A. Locate existing underground utilities prior to commencing excavation work.
Determine exact utility locations by hand excavated test pits. Support and
protect utilities to remain in place.
B. Do not interrupt existing utilities that are in service until temporary or new
utilities are installed and operational.
C. Utilities to remain in service: Shall be re-routed as shown on the Contract
Drawings.
D. Utilities abandoned beneath and five feet laterally beyond the structure’s
proposed footprint shall be removed in their entirety. Excavations required for
their removal shall be backfilled and compacted as specified herein.
E. Utilities located outside the limits specified above may be abandoned in place
provided their ends are adequately plugged as described below.
1. Permanently close open ends of abandoned underground utilities exposed
by excavations, which extend outside the limits of the area to be
excavated.
2. Close open ends of metallic conduit and pipe with threaded galvanized
metal caps, plastic plugs, or other approved method for the type of
material and size of pipe. Do not use wood plugs.
3. Close open ends of concrete and masonry utilities with concrete or flow-
able fill.
3.3 EXCAVATION
A. Excavate earth as required for the Work.
B. Install and maintain all erosion and sedimentation controls during all earthwork
operations as specified on the Contract Drawings or as directed by local officials.
If the erosion and sedimentation controls specified by the local officials are more
stringent than those specified on the Contract Drawings contact the University’s
Representative.
C. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe condition until completion of
backfilling. Comply with Code of Federal Regulations Title 29 - Labor, Part
1926 (OSHA).
1. Trenches: Deposit excavated material on one side of trench only. Trim
banks of excavated material to prevent cave-ins and prevent material
from falling or sliding into trench. Keep a clear footway between
excavated material and trench edge. Maintain areas to allow free
drainage of surface water.
SECTION 31 0000
EARTHWORK
The Cornell Store Emergency 310000 - 7
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
D. Stockpile excavated materials classified as suitable material where directed, until
required for fill. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage as
approved by the University’s Representative.
E. Pipe Trenches and/or Bell and Spigot Pipe Trenches: Open only enough trench
length to facilitate laying pipe sections. Unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings, excavate trenches approximately 24 inches wide plus the outside pipe
diameter, equally divided on each side of pipe centerline. Cut trenches to cross
section, elevation, profile, line, and grade indicated. Accurately grade and shape
trench bottom for uniform bearing of pipe.
1. Trench in Rock: Excavate an additional 6 inches below bottom of pipe
for bed of cushion material under the piping.
F. Conduit, Cable, Tubing and Piping (other than Bell and Spigot): Provide
sufficient trench width for installation and to accommodate special backfill when
specified.
G. Open Ditches: Cut ditches to cross sections and grades indicated.
H. Pavement: Excavate to subgrade surface elevation.
I. Unauthorized Excavations: Unless otherwise directed, backfill unauthorized
excavation under footings, foundation bases, and retaining walls with compacted
select granular material without altering the required footing elevation.
Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavation as specified for
authorized excavation of the same classification, unless otherwise directed by the
Director.
1. Unauthorized excavations under structural Work such as footings,
foundation bases, and retaining walls shall be reported immediately to
the Director before any concrete or backfilling Work commences.
J. Notify the University’s Representative upon completion of excavation
operations. Do not proceed with the Work until the excavation is inspected and
approved. Inspection of the excavation by the University’s Representative will
be made on 3 working days notice.
3.4 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface and subsurface water from flowing into excavations and trenches
and from flooding the site and surrounding area.
B. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations or trenches. Remove water
from all excavations immediately to prevent softening of foundation bottoms,
undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to the stability of subgrades
and foundations. Furnish and maintain pumps, sumps, suction and discharge
piping systems, and other system components necessary to convey the water
away from the Site.
SECTION 31 0000
EARTHWORK
The Cornell Store Emergency 310000 - 8
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
C. Convey water removed from excavations, and rain water, to collecting or run-off
area. Cut and maintain temporary drainage ditches and provide other necessary
diversions outside excavation limits for each structure. Do not use trench
excavations as temporary drainage ditches.
D. Provide temporary controls to restrict the velocity of discharged water as
necessary to prevent erosion and siltation of receiving areas.
3.5 PLACING FILTER FABRIC
A. Place and overlap filter fabric in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation
instructions, unless otherwise shown.
B. Cover tears and other damaged areas with additional filter fabric layer extending
3 feet beyond the damage.
C. Do not permit traffic or construction equipment directly on filter fabric.
D. Backfill over filter fabric within two weeks after placement. Backfill in
accordance with the fabric manufacturer’s instructions and in a manner to
prevent damage to the fabric.
3.6 PLACING FILL AND BACKFILL
A. Surface Preparation of Fill Areas: Strip topsoil, remaining vegetation, and other
deleterious materials prior to placement of fill. Remove all asphalt pavement in
its entirety from areas requiring the placement of fill or break up old pavements
to a maximum size of four inches. Prior to placement of fill, smooth out and
compact areas where wheel rutting has occurred due to stripping or earthwork
operations.
B. Excavations: Backfill as promptly as practicable, but only after approval by the
University’s Representative. Do not backfill with excavated material unless it
meets the requirements of this Section.
C. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches thick in loose
depth unless otherwise specified. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each
layer as necessary to facilitate compaction to the required density. Do not place
backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or covered with ice.
1. Place fill and backfill against foundation walls, and in confined areas
(such as trenches) not easily accessible by larger compaction equipment,
in maximum six inch thick (loose depth) layers.
D. Prevent wedging action of backfill against structures by placing backfill
uniformly around structure to approximately same elevation in each layer. Place
backfill against walls of structures containing basements or crawl spaces only
after the first floor structural members are in place.
E. Under Pavements and Walks:
SECTION 31 0000
EARTHWORK
The Cornell Store Emergency 310000 - 9
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
1. Up to Subgrade Surface Elevation: Place selected fill when fill or
backfill is required.
2. Subbase Material: Place as indicated.
F. Landscaped Areas: Place suitable material when required to complete fill or
backfill areas up to subgrade surface elevation. Do not use material containing
rocks over four inches in diameter within the top 12 inches of suitable material.
G. Plastic Pipe in Trenches: Place backfill material a minimum of six inches deep
under pipe, 12 inches on both sides, and 12 inches above top of pipe. Complete
balance of backfill as specified.
H. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit: Except where concrete encasement is required,
place cushion material a minimum of four inches deep under conduit, four inches
on both sides, and 12 inches over top of conduit. Complete balance of backfill as
specified.
3.7 COMPACTION
A. All materials with exception of open graded stone (No. 2 Coarse aggregate, No. 1
Coarse aggregate, Item B-12, etc.):
1. Compact each layer of fill and backfill for the following area
classifications to the percentage of maximum density specified below
and at a moisture content suitable to obtain the required densities, but at
not less than three percent drier or more than two percent wetter than the
optimum content as determined by ASTM D 698 (Standard Proctor) or
1557 (Modified Proctor).
a. Concrete Slabs and Steps: 95 percent.
b. Landscaped Areas: 90 percent.
c. Pavements and Walks: 95 percent.
d. Pipe Bedding: 95 percent.
2. If a compacted layer fails to meet the specified percentage of maximum
density, the layer will be re-compacted and retested. If compaction
cannot be achieved the material/layer will be removed and replaced. No
additional material may be placed over a compacted layer until the
specified density is achieved
B. Open graded Stone: Place material in maximum twelve inch lifts. Each lift shall
be raked smooth and compacted through several passes of a walk behind
vibratory roller. Compaction Testing is not required.
3.8 GRADING
A. Rough Grading: Trim and grade area within the Grading Limit Line and
excavations outside the limit line, required by this Contract, to a level of four
inches below the finish grades indicated unless otherwise specified herein or
where greater depths are indicated. Provide smooth uniform transition to
adjacent areas.
SECTION 31 0000
EARTHWORK
The Cornell Store Emergency 310000 - 10
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
B. Finish Grading: Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes, and as
follows:
1. Grassed Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within 1 inch above or
below the required subgrade surface elevations.
2. Walks and Pavements: Place and compact subbase material as specified.
Shape surface of areas to required line, grade and cross section, with the
finish surface not more than 1/2 inch above or below the required
subbase elevation.
3. Building Slabs: Grade subbase material smooth and even, free of voids,
compacted as specified to within 1/4 inch above or below required
subbase elevation.
C. Spread approved topsoil directly upon prepared subgrade surface to a depth
indicated drawings (min. of 4”) after natural settlement of the topsoil has
occurred in areas to be seeded or to receive sod. Place to greater depth when
necessary to adjust grades to required elevations.
1. Approved existing topsoil within the Grading Limit Line may be used.
Provide additional topsoil from outside sources as required.
D. Finish topsoil surface free of depressions which will trap water, free of stones
over 1 inch in any dimension, and free of debris.
3.9 RESTORATION
A. Restore pavements, walks, curbs, lawns, and other exterior surfaces damaged
during performance of the Work to match the appearance and performance of
existing corresponding surfaces as closely as practicable.
B. Topsoil and seed or sod damaged lawn areas outside the GLL and new lawn
areas inside the GLL. Water as required until physical completion of the Work.
3.10 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND UNSUITABLE MATERIALS
A. Remove from University property (unless otherwise directed) and lawfully
dispose of excess and unsuitable materials, including materials resulting from
clearing and grubbing and removal of existing improvements.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Compaction Testing: Notify the University’s Representative at least 3 working
days in advance of all phases of filling and backfilling operations. Compaction
testing will be performed by the University’s Representative to ascertain the
compacted density of the fill and backfill materials. Compaction testing will be
performed on certain layers of the fill and backfill as determined by the
University’s Representative. If a compacted layer fails to meet the specified
percentage of maximum density, the layer shall be re-compacted and will be
retested. No additional material may be placed over a compacted layer until the
specified density is achieved.
SECTION 31 0000
EARTHWORK
The Cornell Store Emergency 310000 - 11
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
3.12 PROTECTION
A. Protect graded areas from traffic and erosion, and keep them free of trash and
debris. Grade and compact areas such that ponding or saturation of material does
not occur. Areas left unprotected, and vulnerable to weather events and runoff,
may be required to be replaced at contractor’s expense.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 31 0101
SITE RESTORATION
The Cornell Store Emergency 310101 - 1
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver fertilizer in manufacturer’s standard size bags or cartons showing weight,
analysis, and the name of the manufacturer. Store as approved by University’s
Representative.
B. Store all seed at the site in a cool dry place as approved by the University’s
Representative. Replace any seed damaged during storage.
1.2 SCHEDULING
A. Time For Seeding: Seed immediately after preparation of seed bed. Seeding
shall be done between April 1 and June 1, or between August 15 and September
30. When delays in operations carry the work beyond the seasons specified, or
when conditions of high winds (winds that exceed 5 mph velocity), drought,
excessive moisture or ice are such that satisfactory results are not likely to be
obtained at any stage of the work, the work will stop and it shall be resumed only
when the desired results are likely to be obtained, or when approved corrective
measures and procedures are adopted. Fungicide coated seed may be required
for seeding between June 1 and August 15. Seeding outside of these periods to be
reviewed with the Owner’s Representative to review seed type and warranty
provisions.
B. Provide temporary seed and mulch when final grading is complete while waiting
for optimal seeding period.
C. Provide temporary seed and mulch for temporary cover on disturbed ground not
to be worked on for more than 7 days.
D. Provide temporary seed and mulch on disturbed earth prior to temporary
shutdown of construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TOPSOIL
A. Source: Provide topsoil from existing stockpiles stripped from the project site
(where applicable) and approved by the University’s Representative.
B. Provide topsoil conforming to the following:
1. Original loam topsoil, well drained homogeneous texture and of uniform
grade, without the admixture of subsoil material and entirely free of
dense material, hardpan, sod, or any other objectionable foreign material.
2. Containing not less than 4 percent nor more than 20 percent organic
matter in that portion of a sample passing a 1/4 inch sieve when
determined by the wet combustion method on a sample dried at 105
degrees C.
SECTION 31 0101
SITE RESTORATION
The Cornell Store Emergency 310101 - 2
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
3. Containing a Ph value within the range of 4.5 to 7 on that portion of the
sample that passes a 1/4 inch sieve.
4. Containing the following gradations:
SIEVE DESIGNATION PERCENT PASSING
1 inch 100
1/4 inch 97 - 100
No. 200 20 - 65 (of the 1/4 inch sieve)
2.2 FERTILIZER
A. For lawns, provide fertilizer with percentage of nitrogen required to provide
between 0.5 and not to exceed 0.7 of actual nitrogen per 1,000 sq ft of lawn area
and not less than 4% phosphoric acid and 2% potassium. Provide nitrogen in a
form that will be available to lawn during initial period of growth; at least 50% of
nitrogen to be in slow-release form.
2.3 SEED
A. All grass seed will be fresh, clean, new crop seed delivered in original unopened
packages, bearing guaranteed analysis.
B. Seed germination test results for each seed type and cultivar must be performed
within 10 months prior to landscape installation of seed, and must have no less
than ninety percent (85%) germination rate.
C. All grass seed cultivar purity must be no less than ninety percent (95%) by
weight.
D. Provide Type 1 – Cornell Turfgrass Seed Blend *
This seed mix will consist of the following by weight:
46% Minimum 2 varieties of endophyte enhanced perennial rye
49% Minimum 2 varieties of improved turf type tall fescue
5% Midnight-type or Mid–Atlantic –type Kentucky Bluegrass.
1. All seeds shall have performed in the top statistical grouping from the
most recent NTEP trials conducted for the species.
*this blend is on file at Banfield-Baker, Lakeside Sod, Winfield and Crosman Seeds, or you may
have your blend reviewed by University’s Representative and mixed by a seed dealer of your
choice.
2.4 MULCH
A. Dry Application, Straw: Stalks of oats, wheat, rye or other approved crops that
are free of noxious weed seeds. Weight shall be based on a 15 percent moisture
content.
SECTION 31 0101
SITE RESTORATION
The Cornell Store Emergency 310101 - 3
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 TURF AREA PREPARATION
A. Preparation for Planting Lawns
1. Loosen subgrade of lawn areas to a minimum depth of 10" (ten inches).
Remove stones over 1 1/2" (one and one-half inch) in any dimension and
sticks, roots, rubbish and other extraneous matter. Limit preparation to
areas which will be planted promptly after preparation.
a. Spread topsoil to minimum depth required to meet lines, grades and
elevations shown, after light rolling and natural settlement and at least 6
inches in depth
b. Place approximately 1/2 of total amount of top soil required. Work
into top of loosened subgrade to create a transition layer and then place
remainder of planting soil. Add specified soil amendments and mix
thoroughly into upper 10" (ten inches) of topsoil.
B. Fine grade lawn areas to smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture.
Rake and drag lawn areas, remove ridges and fill depressions, as required to meet
finish grades. Limit fine grading to areas which can be planted immediately after
grading. Allow for soil settlement.
C. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and
allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil
condition.
D. Restore lawn areas to specified condition if eroded or otherwise disturbed after
fine grading and prior to planting.
3.2 PREPARATION FOR SEEDING
A. Loosen subgrade of lawn areas to a minimum depth of 10" (ten inches).
Remove stones over 1 1/2" (one and one-half inch) in any dimension and
sticks, roots, rubbish and other extraneous matter. Limit preparation to
areas which will be planted promptly after preparation.
B. Spread top soil to minimum depth required to meet lines, grades and
elevations shown, after light rolling and natural settlement and at least 6
inches in depth
C. Place approximately 1/2 of total amount of top soil required. Work into
top of loosened subgrade to create a transition layer and then place
remainder of planting soil. Add specified soil amendments and mix
thoroughly into upper 10" (ten inches) of topsoil.
3.3 SEEDING
SECTION 31 0101
SITE RESTORATION
The Cornell Store Emergency 310101 - 4
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
A. Assume all risks when seed is sowed before approval of seed analysis.
B. Do not seed when the wind velocity exceeds 5 miles per hour.
C. Application Rate: 8 pounds per 1,000 sq ft.
D. Dry Application: Sow seed evenly by hand or seed spreader on dry or
moderately dry soil.
3.4 MULCHING
A. Dry Application: Within 3 days after seeding, cover the seeded areas with a
uniform blanket of straw mulch at the rate of 50 pounds per 1,000 sq ft of seeded
area.
3.5 LAWN ESTABLISHMENT
A. Maintain the grass at heights between 3 inches and 3-1/2 inches on a weekly
basis until the Final Acceptance of the Work.
B. Water and protect all seeded areas until final acceptance of the lawn or as
otherwise outlined in the Contract Documents.
3.6 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by the
University’s Representative:
1. When landscape work is completed, including maintenance, the
University’s Representative will, upon request, make an inspection to
determine acceptability.
-Landscape work may be inspected for acceptance in parts agreeable to
Architect, provided work offered for inspection is complete, including
maintenance.
2. Where inspected landscape work does not comply with requirements,
replace rejected work and continue specified maintenance until re-
inspected by Architect and found to be acceptable. Legally remove
rejected material promptly from project site.
3. Upon final acceptance, and within one week of such acceptance,
Architect will notify the Director of the Grounds Department, in writing,
before final turn over.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 321216
HOT MIX ASPHALT (HMA) PAVEMENTS
The Cornell Store Emergency 321216 - 1
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 A. All work references and shall conform to the New York State Department of
Transportation (NYSDOT) Standard Specifications, Current Edition at time of
bid. Additionally reference is made to NYS Office of General Services as it
relates to applicable Asphalt Price Adjustments.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Earthwork: Section 310000.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Copy of original Job Mix Formula (JMF) from an active
producing NYSDOT Approved Plant, signed by Regional Materials Engineer for
each mix design to be incorporated in the project.
B. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Plant name and location of asphalt concrete supplier.
2. Copy of Printed Delivery Ticket with breakdown of materials and
quantities in accordance with NYSDOT requirements and project name.
C. Plant Certification: Shall be provided for each day’s placement, certifying that
all materials delivered meets NYSDOT requirements and include a tally of each
day’s mix type delivered to the jobsite specific to the project on that date.
1.4 ASPHALT PRICE ADJUSTMENT
A. The University can require or the Contractor may request evaluation and possible
adjustment of the price of asphalt providing the actual price differs by more than
20 percent from the contract baseline price of asphalt at time of bidding. For the
purposes of determining if contract price adjustments are warranted shall be
based on NYSOGS Data compiled and maintained at
https://www.ogs.ny.gov/purchase/spg/awards/3150223053Can.htm
B. If the actual price paid by the Contractor is more than 120% of the baseline price,
the adjustment will be calculated as follows, with this adjusted value being
credited to the contractor: Price adjustment = actual tonnage X {actual price paid
- (1.2 X baseline price)}.
C. If the actual price paid by the Contractor is less than 80% of the baseline price,
the adjustment will be calculated as follows, with this adjusted value being
credited to the University: Price adjustment = actual tonnage X {(0.8 X baseline
price) - actual price paid}.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Asphalt Concrete Paving: Conform to NYSDOT Section 402 Hot Mix Asphalt.
SECTION 321216
HOT MIX ASPHALT (HMA) PAVEMENTS
The Cornell Store Emergency 321216 - 2
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
1. Top Course: NYSDOT, Item 402.097203, 9.5 mm Top HMA.
2. Top Course: NYSDOT, Item 402.127203, 12.5 mm Top HMA.
3. Binder Course: NYSDOT, Item 402.197903, 19 mm Binder HMA.
4. Base Course: NYSDOT, Item 402.257903. 25 mm Binder HMA.
B. Asphalt PG Binder Specific Requirements:
1. Use a PG 64S-22 meeting the requirements of AASHTO M320, Standard
Specification for Performance Graded Asphalt Binder for the production
of Superpave Hot Mix Asphalt mixtures for this project.
2. Use of polyphosphoric acid (PPA) to modify the PG binder properties is
prohibited. This prohibition also applies to the use of PPA as a cross-linking
agent for polymer modification.
3. The mixture designs must be developed in accordance with the criteria
specified in the SUPERPAVE Hot Mix Asphalt items that are appropriate for
an estimated traffic level of <30 Million 80 kN ESALs.
C. Asphalt Cement Tack Coat.
1. Shall be used in accordance with Section 402 and meet the requirements
of Section 407.
D. Asphalt Joint Adhesive
1. Shall be used in placement of Top Course in accordance with Section
402 and meet the requirements of Section 418.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING
A. Construct asphalt pavement in accordance with DOT, Section 402.
B. Pavement Density will be verified and accepted by the 70 Series Compaction
Method with all acceptance testing provided by Cornell University’s Third Party
Testing Agency.
C. Intent of paving operation shall be to have an adequate number of delivery trucks
available in order to keep the paver moving at all times during paving operation
with the exceptions being during loading, and when repositioning.
D. Special attention shall be paid to joint construction and to avoid concentration of
segregated stones from paver. Excess stones shall be removed from paving mat.
At times, it may be necessary to sweep coated fine particles into the paving joint
prior to compaction.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 32 1300
CONCRETE WALKS
The Cornell Store Emergency 321300 - 1
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Earthwork: Section 310000.
B. Concrete Paving Joint Sealants: Section 321373.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Comply with American Concrete Institute, ACI 301-05, for the Work of this
Section unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Concrete Design Mix: Submit proposed concrete design mix together
with name and location of batching plant at least 28 days prior to the start
of concrete work.
2. Portland Cement: Brand and Manufacturer’s name.
3. Air-entraining Admixture: Brand and manufacturer’s name.
4. Water-reducing or High Range Water-reducing Admixture: Brand and
manufacturer’s name.
5. Penetrating Sealer: Manufacturer’s specifications and application
instructions.
6. Fibrous Concrete Reinforcement: Manufacturer’s specifications, and
batching and mixing instructions for fibrous concrete reinforcement.
7. ADA Detectable Warning Surface: Manufacturer’s specifications,
product data, test reports, method of installation, and maintenance
instructions.
B. Samples:
1. Fibrous Concrete Reinforcement
C. Work Plan:
1. Submit work plan to include quality control, labor and equipment to be
used, detours, and protections; and monitoring plan for weather
conditions and changes.
2. Provide a curing plan including materials use (water source, misters,
sprinklers, hoses, rain protection, evaporation control)
SECTION 32 1300
CONCRETE WALKS
The Cornell Store Emergency 321300 - 2
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. At minimum one ACI Certified Flatwork Finisher shall present for all concrete
flatwork placements. ACI Certified Flatwork Technicians shall fulfill this
requirement in cases where the afore-mentioned finisher cannot be present and
when the concrete contractor has provided a portfolio greater than five years of
consecutive flatwork placement experience and at least 10,000 sf of constructed
flatwork. Equivalent Union/Trade certification and or credentials may be
submitted in lieu of ACI credentials upon approval of the Owner.
B. Concrete batching plants shall be currently approved as concrete suppliers by the
New York State Department of Transportation.
B. Fibrous Concrete Reinforcement:
1. Certificates: Affidavit by the concrete supplier certifying that approved
fibrous concrete reinforcement in the required amount per cubic yard was
added to and properly mixed into each batch of concrete discharged at
the site.
1.5 DELIVERY
A. Batch Ticket Information: Indicate on the delivery ticket the type, brand, and
amount of fibrous concrete reinforcement material added to each batch of
concrete in addition to all other admixtures.
1.6 PRE-CONCRETE PLACEMENT MEETING
A. A mandatory meeting will be held in advance of commencing concrete
placement on all University Capital Projects, or as determined by Facilities
Engineering. The meeting shall include representatives from the architect or
engineer, contractors, material suppliers, owner’s testing agency, Civil Section of
Facilities Engineering, and University project management team. The purpose of
the meeting will be to discuss concrete procedures and mitigating risks to the
project. Furthermore, the design team shall identify critical concrete components
of the structure and critical service conditions. Collectively the attendees will
establish and coordinate procedures to best address these items. Key points
would include mitigating weather conditions including high evaporability, proper
curing procedures, minimizing shrinkage cracking, mix design, cement paste
content, aggregate gradation, placement and finishing techniques, protecting base
course prior to slab on grade placement, flatness/levelness criteria, construction
joints, vapor barriers, list of critical items for inspection, water control,
communication, and key concrete tolerances.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cast-In-Place Concrete: Normal weight, air-entrained concrete with a minimum
compressive strength of 5,000 psi in 28 days with a water/cement ratio of 0.40.
SECTION 32 1300
CONCRETE WALKS
The Cornell Store Emergency 321300 - 3
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
1. Design Air Content: ASTM C 260, and on the New York State
Department of Transportation’s current “Approved List”; 6 percent by
volume plus or minus 1.5 percent.
2. Cement: ASTM C 150 Type I or II Portland cement.
3. Water: Potable. Water in addition to the approved quantity on the
submitted mix design shall not be permitted without permission of the
engineer. The contractor is required to clearly note on the delivery ticket
the quantity of water withheld at the batching plant that can be added
onsite.
4. Aggregates: Coarse and fine aggregates shall be on the New York State
DOT list of approved aggregate sources and shall not be designated as
having ASR potential. • The minimum bulk SSD specific gravity of the
coarse aggregate on the New York State DOT posted test results shall be
2.67. • The maximum absorption of the coarse aggregate on the New
York State DOT posted test results shall be 1.2%. Local aggregates have
the potential for AAR (alkali aggregate reaction) which is a concern for
concrete exposed to moisture. Cornell University prefers that concrete
with the potential for moisture exposure be designed using strategies to
reduce AAR, such as substituting 15% to 20% of cementitious material
with class F fly ash conforming to ASTM C-618.
5. Chloride Limits: Concrete producers shall provide verification that
submitted concrete mixes do not exceed maximum water-soluble
chloride ion (Cl) limits per exposure class as stated in ACI 318-14 Table
19.3.2.1.
6. Slump: Maximum 4 inches; minimum 2 inches before the addition of
any water-reducing admixtures or high-range water-reducing admixtures
(superplasticizers) at the site. Except when a water-reducing admixture
is used, maximum slump shall be 6 inches and when a high range water
reducing admixture is used maximum slump shall be 8 inches.
7. Water-reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494 / C 494M-04 Type A and on
the New York State Department of Transportation’s current “Approved
List”.
8. High Range Water-reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494 / C 494M-04
Type F and on the New York State Department of Transportation’s
current “Approved List”.
9. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D, Water-reducing and
retarding, for use in hot weather concreting, and on the New York State
Department of Transportation’s current “Approved List”.
SECTION 32 1300
CONCRETE WALKS
The Cornell Store Emergency 321300 - 4
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
B. Penetrating Sealer: Chemically reactive penetrating sealer with salt and moisture
resistance that is breathable and has minimal impact on traction. If applied on
freshly placed concrete or partially cured concrete shall meet ASTM C309, Type
1, Class B requirements.
1. **V-Seal 102 Winter Guard by V-Seal, 9042 Cotter Street, Lewis
Center, OH 43035, (877) 738-7325, www.vseal.com
2. PS 102, Concrete Sealers USA, PO Box 1223 Brookfield, WI 53008
(888) 583-2992, www.concretesealersusa.com
3. Silencure, by ChemMasters, 300 Edwards Street, Madison OH 44057,
(800) 486-7866, www.chemmasters.net
** University Basis of Design. Also meets requirements of ASTM C309 for use as a
membrane curing compound (For use in limited applications on Campus when
approved by University)
C. Fibrous Concrete Reinforcement: Macro-synthetic fibers shall be manufactured
specifically for the reinforcement of concrete and be in accordance with ASTM
1116, Class III. Fibers shall provide temperature and shrinkage reinforcement,
provide moderate benefits to reduce cracking, and increase toughness of
concrete. Fibers shall be grey color, virgin polypropylene/co-polymer blend, 2”
minimum length, and designed for broom finished concrete and be designed to
take the place of traditional 6 x 6, W 2.9 W2.9 mesh. Use at minimum 4 pounds /
cubic yard. Micro-synthetic and cellulose fibers shall not be permitted. Concrete
supplier shall provide appropriate representation upon request for first placement
(pre-pour, on-site, or at ready-mix plant) as required.
1. Forta-Ferro by Forta, Grove City, PA, (800) 245-0306, www.forta-
ferro.com
2. ICF M Macro Plus, by ICF Concrete Additives, Warren, NJ (908) 293-
8280, www.icfconcreteaddiitves.com
3. Strux by Grace Construction Products, Cambridge, MA, (877)423-6491,
www.gcpat.com
3. Tuf-Strand by Euclid Chemical Company, Cleveland, OH, (800) 321-
7628, www.euclidchemical.com
4. Or Equal
Supplier shall adjust mix at plant to account for changes in slump after addition
of fibers, possibly requiring need for water reducers or other admixture to assure
workability on the jobsite. Required Water Cement Ratio shall not be changed.
D. Expansion Joint Filler: Preformed, resilient, non-extruding fiber expansion joint
complying with ASTM D 1751 composed of a bond of cellulose fibers and
uniformly saturated with asphalt units. Product shall be designed to be set ½”
below surface, and to later finish with a joint sealant.
E. ADA Detectable Warning Surface: Cast Iron Detectable Warning plate with a
non-slip texture on the travel surface. Material used to provide visual warning
shall be an integral part of the detectable warning surface. Visual contrast to
SECTION 32 1300
CONCRETE WALKS
The Cornell Store Emergency 321300 - 5
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
meet the existing ADAAG A4.2.9.2. University requires panels with deeper web
to allow embedment into concrete and to not simply sit on surface.
1. Detectable Warning Plate Model R-4984 by Neenah Foundry, 2121
Brooks Avenue, Neenah, WE 54956, (800) 558-5075, www.nfco.com
2. Duralast by East Jordan, Phoenix, NY (315) 669-2601, www.ejco.com
3. Or Equal
F. Speed/Slip Dowel Load Transfer System: Shall be designed as to be inserted in
drilled in grouted concrete slab with one part free and one part fixed. Provide
minimum #5 bar at 18” or #4 bar at 12”.
1. Speed Dowel by Greenstreak (Sika)
2. Or Equal
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Do not use items of aluminum for mixing, chuting, conveying, forming, or
finishing concrete. However, magnesium alloy tools may be used for finishing.
B. Set forms true to line and grade and anchor rigidly in position.
C. Space expansion joints equally at not more than 30’-0” on center unless
otherwise indicated. Place expansion joints to isolate sidewalk from other
structures and fixed objects.
D. Place joint filler at expansion joints and where new concrete abuts existing
concrete paving and fixed structures or appurtenances. Protect the top edge of
the joint filler during concrete placement with a temporary cap and remove after
concrete has been placed.
E, Place bond breaker at interface with granite curbing that abuts asphalt roadways.
3.2 TEST PLACEMENT SECTION
A Contractor shall prepare a test placement at minimum equal to 10 linear foot of
sidewalk at the design width. The purpose of this test placement is to become
familiar with the materials, the consistency, admixtures, fibers and other
reinforcing, etc. in addition to the finishing requirements which may include
consolidating, floating, broom finish, etc.
B The Test Placement may be included as part of the finished work at the Approval
of the Owner’s Representative.
C. Subsequent placements shall be staggered such that the test section can be placed
and finished to meet the Owner’s requirements. Any placement prior to
SECTION 32 1300
CONCRETE WALKS
The Cornell Store Emergency 321300 - 6
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
acceptance of the text section may be required to be removed and replaced at the
Contractor’s expense.
D. Removal of test sections not approved for incorporation into the final work shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor.
3.3 PLACEMENT OF FIBER REINFORCEMENT
A. Add minimum of 4.0 lbs. per CY of macro fibrous concrete reinforcement to the
concrete and mix in accordance with fiber manufacturer’s batching and mixing
instructions.
B. Fibers shall be uniformly dispersed in the concrete, and concrete shall be free of
fiber balls or lumps when discharged at the Site.
C. Utilize water reducers and plasticizers as per supplier mix design for provide
required slump and workability. Do not increase water-cement ratio.
D. Add fiber after all or a portion of mixer has been charged. Add water-reducing
admixture after fibers have been added. Follow ACI mixing procedures
(nominally 5 minutes) once all ingredients are in drum.
3.4 LOAD TRANSFER DOWELS
A. At connection to existing concrete, drill and grout as necessary to result in one
side fixed and one end unrestrained at locations shown on drawing and where
new concrete is placed adjacent to building entrances, at expansion joints, and or
along travelled pathways where any vertical settlement would result in a trip
hazard.
B. At expansion joints provide dowel system with bond breaking sleeve.
3.5 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Consolidate concrete by spading, rodding, forking, or using an approved vibrator
eliminating all air pockets, stone pockets, and honeycombing. Work and float
concrete surface so as to produce a uniform texture.
B. Locate construction joints, if any, at expansion joints.
3.6 PLACING ADA DETECTABLE WARNING SURFACE
A. The ADA detectable warning surface shall be installed behind the edge of the
curb.
B. Domes shall be aligned on a square grid in the predominant direction of travel to
permit wheels to roll between the domes.
C. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions.
SECTION 32 1300
CONCRETE WALKS
The Cornell Store Emergency 321300 - 7
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
D. Cutting or supply of radius sections may be required based upon location.
E. The curb, ADA detectable warning surface, and sidewalk shall be flush with the
elevation of the road surface.
3.7 FINISHING AND CURING
A. Wait until bleeding is stopped before final finishing operations.
B. Keep surface damp but not wet between initial strike off and final finish.
1. Utilize a fog spray, evaporative inhibitor, or midrange water reducer that
is compatible with supplementary cementing materials to help control the
amount of surface drying of the fresh concrete.
C. Utilize a magnesium or wood float.
D. Finish edges of walk and expansion and control joints with a 1/4 inch radius
edging tool.
E. Verify timing for final finish by impression depth into surface, and other
judgments, to ensure proper finishing timing. Use steel/magnesium tools. For
broom finish, broom in one direction only, without overlapping broom strokes.
Time brooming as necessary to minimize any fiber in mix being pulled from
concrete. Keep broom clean (and damp only).
F. Once concrete has begun to set (cannot be easily marred) place wet curing
materials, and begin wet cure or other curing methods as specified or approved
by the University.
G. Contractor shall be prepared for weather conditions during placement including
having materials on hand to protect concrete from rain, evaporation, and from
freezing temperatures during placement and curing.
3.8 CURING
A. All cast-in-place concrete shall be wet cured for not less than seven days. The
University understands there is a value associated with this process and the
contractor shall provide a price for wet curing in the schedule of values for each
scope area. The University will provide a water source where possible including
access to hydrants and building spigots, however contractor may be required to
establish tanks, or other storage to assure wet curing. In instances as permitted
by the University due to Code, Means of Egress, or other isolated circumstances
the requirements for wet curing may be waived or reduced in lieu of applied
compounds. The University will then be credited via the Change Order process
for wet curing not performed.
B. All curing supplies shall be on project site prior to commencement of concrete
placement. This shall include identification of water supply, and all curing
materials.
SECTION 32 1300
CONCRETE WALKS
The Cornell Store Emergency 321300 - 8
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
C. Commence curing activity as soon as concrete has set to a state where it cannot
be easily marred. Conditions may require application of an evaporation retarder
to keep surface from drying out during set time. Curing objective shall be to
provide constant water supply for concrete hydration through means and methods
of the contractor. This shall include a source of clean water available at all times.
Avoid concentrated watering that may erode the fresh concrete. If using hydrant
water, flush any discolored water prior to hooking up to soaker hoses or
sprinkler/mister. Water can be turned off at times during cure as long as it
remains wet. Wet cure for 7 days and have personnel available at all times
during that period to attend to curing issues that may arise. If curing has to be cut
short, due to circumstances and as directed by the University, apply specified
cure and seal product on moist concrete to continue curing process for remaining
time. Contractor shall submit detailed curing plan prior to planned placement.
D. Hot Weather Concreting: Comply with ACI 305R whenever the atmospheric
temperature or the form surface temperature is at or above 90 degrees F., or
climatic conditions of wind and/or low humidity will cause premature drying of
the concrete.
E. Curing Temperature: Maintain the temperature of the concrete at 50 degrees F.
or above during the curing period. Keep the concrete temperature as uniform as
possible and protect from rapid atmospheric temperature changes. Avoid
temperature changes in concrete, which exceeds 5 degrees F. in any one hour and
50 degrees F. in any 24-hour period. Contractor may be required to place high-
low thermometers with placement to monitor conditions during curing.
A.10 JOINTS
A. Provide expansion joints as shown on drawings at a distance no greater than 30
feet, and where abutting existing placed concrete, foundations, and other fixed
structures. Install pre-formed joint material for the depth of the slab and with a
removable cap or bond breaker along the top. Set below grade to allow for later
application of a joint sealant. Provide joint sealant in accordance with Section
321373.
B. Sawed control joints (CJ) are the University Standard and shall be cut one inch
deep after the concrete has set. Complete saw cuts within 8-12 hours after slab is
placed or sooner with an early entry saw. Warmer ambient temperatures and low
humidity may require saw cutting sooner. In all cases contractor shall use their
best judgement as to when to begin saw cutting operations to minimize shrinkage
cracks. Concrete cracking due to not cutting soon enough may require
replacement at Contractor’s expense. Space control joints equally between
expansion joints as shown on the drawings.
C. In some cases tooled control joints are allowed to match adjoining tooled
sections, or in other cases approved by the University. In those cases, provide
tooled control joints one inch deep. Space control joints equally between
expansion joints as shown on the drawings.
SECTION 32 1300
CONCRETE WALKS
The Cornell Store Emergency 321300 - 9
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
D. Provide doweled connection where tying into existing concrete surfaces and
buildings. Drill and grout into existing concrete or place in subsequent pours.
Place bond breaker or basket in new concrete as shown on plans.
E. Maintain Curing operations throughout saw cutting and avoid exposing and
drying/shrinkage of curing concrete during operations. A worker may be
required to continually wet surface while exposed to sun and wind.
F. Restore any areas of damage resulting from curing operations including erosion,
puddling, and repair of affected landscapes.
3.11 SEALING
A. Apply penetrating sealer in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations,
including the timing of the applications, the number of coats, protection of other
surfaces, etc.
B. Some sealers are designed to be applied on fresh or moist concrete and others
require concrete to be fully cured and in dry state. Apply as per Manufacturer’s
Recommended.
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 321373
Ithaca, New York CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS
The Cornell Store Emergency 321373 - 1
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Concrete Walks: Section 321300.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications, and installation instructions for
each product specified except miscellaneous materials.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Container Labels: Include manufacturer’s name, trade name of product, kind of
material, federal specification number (if applicable), expiration date (if
applicable) and packaging date or batch number.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions:
1. Temperature: Unless otherwise approved or recommended in writing by
the sealant manufacturer, do not install sealants at temperatures below 40
degrees F or above 85 degrees F.
2. Humidity and Moisture: Do not install the Work under this Section
under conditions that are detrimental to the application, curing and
performance of the specified materials.
B. Protection:
1. Protect all surfaces adjacent to sealants with non-staining removable tape
or other approved covering to prevent soiling or staining.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SEALANTS
A. Type 1B Sealant:
1. For Horizontal Joints: One-part, self-leveling silicone or polyurethane
sealant for traffic bearing construction; Bostik Chem-Calk 955-SL,
Tremco Vulkem 45, Pecora Urexpan NR-201, Pecora 300-SL, Pecora
310-SL, Sika Sikaflex-1CSL, Dow Corning CCS.
2. For Vertical Joints: One-part, non-sag silicone or polyurethane sealant;
Tremco Vulkem 116, Pecora Dynatrol I, Sika Sikaflex Textured Sealant,
Dow Corning CCS or CWS, Pecora 301-NS, Pecora 311-NS.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 321373
Ithaca, New York CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS
The Cornell Store Emergency 321373 - 2
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 321373
Ithaca, New York CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS
The Cornell Store Emergency 321373 - 3
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
2.2 JOINT FILLERS
A. The pre-molded resilient joint filler shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
D1751. This product shall consist of preformed sheets or strips made from cane
or other suitable fibers of a cellulosic nature securely bound together and then
uniformly saturated with asphalt; or strips formed from clean granulated cork
securely bound together by a suitable asphalt binder and encased between two
layers of saturated felt or two layers of glass-fiber felt.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Joint Primer/Sealer/Conditioner: As recommended by the sealant manufacturer
for the particular joint surface materials and conditions.
B. Backer Rod: Compressible rod stock or expanded, extruded polyethylene.
C. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene or other plastic tape as recommended by the
sealant manufacturer; non-bonding to sealant.
D. Cleaning Solvents: Oil free solvents as recommended by the sealant
manufacturer. Do not use re-claimed solvents.
E. Masking Tape: Removable paper or fiber tape, self-adhesive, non-staining.
2.4 COLOR OF MATERIALS
A. For exposed materials, furnish color as indicated, or if not indicated, as selected
by the University’s Representative from the manufacturer’s standard colors. For
concealed materials, provide the natural color, which has the best overall
performance characteristics.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of sealant and other materials
specified in this Section.
1. Remove all loose materials, dirt, dust, rust, oils and other foreign matter
that will impair the performance of materials installed under this Section.
When necessary or when directed, wire brush, grind, or acid etch to
thoroughly clean joint surfaces.
3.2 JOINT FILLER INSTALLATION
A. Set joint fillers at proper depth and position as required for installation of bond
breakers, backer rods and sealants. Do not leave voids or gaps between the ends
of joint filler units.
1. Smooth Edged Joints: For joints between two concrete slabs or where
new concrete abuts smooth edged materials use either filler as specified.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 321373
Ithaca, New York CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS
The Cornell Store Emergency 321373 - 4
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
2. Irregular Edged Joints: For joints where new concrete abuts granite
curbs or other irregular edges use closed cell polyurethane joint filler.
3.3 SEALANT INSTALLATION
A. Except as shown or specified otherwise, install sealants in accordance with the
manufacturer’s printed instructions.
B. Apply sealant with ratchet handgun or other approved mechanical gun. Where
gun application is impractical, apply sealant by knife or by pouring as applicable.
C. Finishing: Tool all vertical, non-sag sealants so as to compress the sealant and
eliminate air voids. Provide a neat smoothly finished joint with a slightly
concave surface unless otherwise indicated or recommended by the
manufacturer.
1. Use tool wetting agents as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Immediately remove misapplied sealant and drippings from metal surfaces with
solvents and wiping cloths. On other materials, remove misapplied sealant and
droppings by methods and materials recommended in writing by the
manufacturer of the sealant material.
B. After sealants are applied and before skin begins to form on sealant, remove all
masking and other protection and clean up any remaining defacement caused by
the Work.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 321640
GRANITE CURBS
The Cornell Store Emergency 321640 - 1
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Earthwork: Section 310000.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples:
1. Granite Curb: Minimum 1 foot long section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Stone: Granite shall be tough, dense, sound and durable, of uniform light color,
reasonably fine grained and free from seams, cracks or other structural defects.
B. Granite Curbs: SUPPLIED BY OTHERS
1. NYSDOT Type “A” Curb, 5” wide, 16” high.
2. Furnish curbs with sawed top, split face and ends. Straight pieces shall
be a minimum of 3 feet long. Curb segments on curves with radius of
100 feet or less shall be shaped to the required curvature, with the ends
split on radial lines.
3. Indicated dimensions for curb segments shall not vary more than 2
inches for depth and 1 inch for width.
4. Top and front surfaces shall be true planes at right angles to each other,
as seen with a straight edge. No projection greater than 3/4 inch or
depression greater than 1/2 inch on the split surfaces will be acceptable.
Top surface shall not vary more than 1/8 inch.
5. Drill holes will not be permitted in exposed curb surfaces.
C. Dry Concrete: One part Portland cement mixed with six parts DOT No. 1A
coarse aggregate dry mix.
D. Lean Concrete: Minimum 2500 psi compressive strength, poured with low
slump, placed along length of curb to a height on curb of 8” along back. In some
instances contractor may place concrete along front of curb no higher than 6” for
additional stabilization during setting.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Remove mortar and concrete from existing curbs to be reused.
SECTION 321640
GRANITE CURBS
The Cornell Store Emergency 321640 - 2
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
B. Set curbs true to line and grade on a foundation of one cubic foot of dry concrete
for each linear foot of curb installed. Fill voids to completely support entire
length of curb.
C. Butt joint curb sections together.
D. Placed low slump concrete backing of curbing up to a height of eight (8) inches
along back of curbing and along front of curb as needed to stabilize.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 321723
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
The Cornell Store Emergency 321723 - 1
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples:
1. Paint: One pint, each type. Include the manufacturer’s label with
product analysis.
B. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Certificates: Affidavit required under Quality Assurance Article.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Certification: Affidavit by the paint applicator, certifying that the materials
comply with the current regulatory requirements in effect at the time products
were delivered and applied.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Perform the painting operations after working hours, on weekends or at such time
so as not to interfere with the flow of traffic. Provide temporary barriers to
prevent vehicles from driving over newly painted areas.
B. Apply paint on dry pavement surface, when the air temperature is above 40
degrees F.
C. In general, white paint shall be used for all parking stalls, stop bars, directional
arrows, ADA symbol interior, and crosswalks. Yellow paint shall be used for
hatching no parking areas and ADA access aisles and delineation on center lines
for travel lanes. Blue Paint shall be used for ADA symbol background.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Paint: DOT Section 640-2, yellow or white as indicated, or if not indicated as
directed. Delete reference to Glass Beads.
B. Rapid Dry Paint:
1. Aexcel Corp., www.aexcelcorp.com, 72W-A042 White, 72Y-A082
Yellow, 72L-A002 Blue.
2. Sherwin-Williams, www.swpavementmarkings.com, TM2196 White,
TM2197 Yellow TM2133 Blue
3. Franklin Paint Company, Inc., www.franklinpaint.com, 2014 White,
2015 Yellow, 2024 Blue
SECTION 321723
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
The Cornell Store Emergency 321723 - 2
Power & Emergency Lighting
Replacement
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material detrimental to paint adhesion.
B. Mark layout of stripes and lines with chalk or paint.
3.2 APPLYING PAVEMENT MARKING
A. Apply paint in accordance with DOT Section 640-3.02, except as follows:
1. Delete references to Glass Beads for parking spaces.
END OF SECTION